🚧This site is under construction — data is currently being added and may be incomplete or change.🚧
🕉

Sanatan Dharma

सनातन धर्म — Hindu Scripture Knowledge Base

Swamini Vato (Gunatitanand Swami)

स्वामिनो वार्ताः

Discourses of Gunatitanand Swami (1785–1867), the first Akshar after Swaminarayan. Recorded in Gujarati by disciples, these talks expound the Akshar-Purushottam relationship, the nature of the Brahmaswarup saint, and the path to moksha.

Chapter 5 · 407 shlokas

+ Add Shloka

Vaat 5.1

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 1 · Chapter 5 · Verse 1

Bhagwān maḷyā pachhī karavānu e chhe je, jāṇpaṇārūp daravāje rahevu tathā sang oḷakhavo tathā haṭh, mān ne īrṣhyā na rākhavī.

Having attained God, one must now maintain constant awareness, recognize the Sadhu and not harbour obstinacy, ego or jealousy.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.2

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 2 · Chapter 5 · Verse 2

Bhagwānnā tathā Ekāntiknā nishchaynā lakṣhaṇ e chhe je, gharmā so karoḍ maṇ dāṇā hoy tathā rūpiyā hoy to kāḷ paḍye maravānī bīk na rahe tathā be hajār bakhtariyā bheḷā hoy to lūṭāvānī bīk na rahe; em nishchayvāḷāne kāḷ, karma ne māyā tenī bīk na rahe; pūraṇkām māne ne Bhagwān vinā koīnī apekṣhā na rahe.

The characteristics of those with firm faith in God and the God-realized Sadhu are: Just as, one with a thousand million kilos of grains and rupees has no fear of death even in the worst drought, and just as a person with two thousand armed soldiers has no fear of being robbed, one is free from the fear of adverse kāl, karma and māyā. One believes oneself to be fulfilled and has no expectations from anyone.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.3

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 3 · Chapter 5 · Verse 3

Divyabhāv manuṣhyabhāv ek samaje to avaguṇ na āve. Jem iyaḷ bhamarīnu dhyān karyethī iyaḷ bhamarī thāy tathā pārasnā sambandhthī loḍhu sonu thāy tathā nanganī parīkṣhā zaverīnā sangthī āvaḍe tathā dhūḍya kumbhārnī kasaṇī khame chhe tethī vāsaṇ thāy chhe, tem ja Bhagwān tathā Ekāntik oḷakhyāthī brahmarūp thāy chhe ne Ekāntik oḷakhyā pachhī kāī karavu rahetu nathī.

If the divine and human traits of God are understood as one, then one will not see faults. Just as by meditating upon a bee, a worm turns into a bee; and by the touch of a pārasmani, metal turns to gold; and by the close association of a jeweler, one learns to appraise gems; and by tolerating the beating of a potter, clay is turned into utensils; similarly, by recognizing the true form of God and the God-realized Sadhu, one becomes brahmarup. And after recognizing the God-realized Sadhu, there is nothing left to do.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.4

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 4 · Chapter 5 · Verse 4

Bhagwān tathā Ekāntikno sang eṭalo ja satsang ne bījo to aradho satsang kahevāy.

True satsang is one’s close association with God and the God-realized Sadhu and the rest is known as just half-satsang.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.5

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 5 · Chapter 5 · Verse 5

Ātyantik mokṣha thāy te ja mokṣha kahevāy. Ne bījā dhāmmā gayethī garbhavāsmā āvavu paḍe ne garbhavāsmā āvavu paḍe tyā sudhī mokṣha na kahevāy. Ne evo mokṣha to pragaṭ Bhagwān ne pragaṭ Bhagwānnā Ekāntikno āsharo karyāthī thāy, bījāthī thāy nahi. Ne sant to Bhagwān jevā samarth chhe.

Only when ultimate moksha is attained can it be described as (true) moksha. And if one attains other abodes, then one will have to take re-birth. So, as long as one has to take re-birth, that cannot be called final moksha. Such moksha is attained by surrendering to the manifest form of God and God’s enlightened Sadhu. Others cannot do it and the Sadhu is as capable as God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.6

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 6 · Chapter 5 · Verse 6

“Chhokarāne bīk lāge tyāre mābāpne gaḷe bāzī paḍe tem āpaṇe āpatkāḷe Bhagwān tathā ā Sādhune gaḷe bāzī paḍavu eṭale e rakṣhā kare.” Pachhī Nathu Paṭele pūchhyu je, “Gaḷe shī rīte bāzavu?” Tyāre Swāmīe uttar karyo je, “Temane sambhārvā. Ane Bhagwān tathā ā Sādhuno jene sang thayo chhe tene māthe vighna nathī; kem je, tenī to Bhagwān rakṣhā kare chhe.” Tyā ghoḍīnu draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, “Nadīnu pūr ūtartā asavār chār vār paḍī gayo ne ghoḍī chār vār pāchhī vaḷī ne asavārne tāryo,1 tem rakṣhā kare.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Nadī pār karatā ghoḍī par beṭhel asavār chār vār paḍī gayo ne ghoḍīe tene chār vār bachāvyo. Ghoḍī jāṇe chhe ke ā vyakti māre āshare chhe, tene tāravo joīe. Tem jīvne Bhagwānno āsharo hoy to Bhagwān tenī rakṣhā kare.

“When children are afraid, they cling to the necks of their parents; similarly, in difficult times, we have to cling to God and this Sadhu, so they will protect us.” Then Nathu Patel asked, “How should one cling to the neck?” Then Swami answered, “Remember them. One who has the company of God and this Sadhu has no obstacles on his head, since God protects him.” Then he gave the example of the mare: while crossing the overflowing river, the rider fell off four times, and each time the mare came back and helped the rider to cross. Thus, she protected him.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. A horserider fell off his mare four times while trying to cross a river. The mare knew that the rider was dependent on it and had to be saved. Similarly, if a jiva surrenders to God, he will save it.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.7

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 7 · Chapter 5 · Verse 7

Gaḍhaḍāvāḷā Ṭhakkar Nāraṇ Pradhāne prashna pūchhyu je, “Viṣhayunu doṣhdhyān na thayu hoy to tenā viṣhay shī rīte ṭaḷe?” Tyāre Swāmīe uttar karyo je, “Samudranu jaḷ sukāy tevu nathī paṇ ātyantik pralaye sukāī jāy chhe. Tem ātyantik gnān thāy to viṣhay ṭaḷī jāy te ātyantik gnān to ā Sādhune oḷakhyā e ja chhe ne tethī viṣhay ṭaḷī jāy chhe, ne te vinā doṣhdhyān karate kāḷe karīne ṭaḷe.” Tyā Garuḍnu draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, Garuḍ rahī gayo ne chakalī pārne pāmī gaī.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Chakalī Garuḍnī mitra hatī. Garuḍ traṇe lokmā gati karī shake. Chakalīne Vaikunṭhmā javānī ichchhā thaī. Garuḍe potānī pānkh par tene besāḍī dīdhī. Garuḍne ek jīvnī mukti karāvyāno garva thayo. Vaikunṭhmā pahochyā tyā to faṭ darvājā bandh thaī gayā. Chakalī to ūḍatī andar pesī gaī. Garuḍ darvāje bahār rahī gayo.

Thakkar Nāran Pradhān of Gadhadā asked, “If the defects of the worldly pleasures have not been contemplated, how can the desire for worldly pleasures be overcome?” Then Swami answered, “The water in the oceans is not likely to dry up, but it dries up at the time of final dissolution. Similarly, when one attains ultimate spiritual wisdom, the desires for worldly pleasures are overcome. Ultimate spiritual wisdom is merely to recognize this Sadhu, and by this desires for worldly pleasures are overcome. And without this wisdom, merely by contemplating on the faults (of worldly pleasures), they are overcome only after a long time.” Then he gave the example of the eagle – the eagle was left behind at the entrance and the sparrow reached Vaikunth.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. An eagle and sparrow were friends. One day, the eagle prepared to go to Vaikunth. The sparrow requested to be taken along also. The eagle agreed and so the sparrow sat on its back. As the eagle flew towards Vaikunth, it became full of pride because it was enabling the sparrow to attain heaven. When they reached the entrance gate to Vaikunth, the sparrow darted in, but the door shut in the face of the eagle because of its pride.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.8

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 8 · Chapter 5 · Verse 8

Boṭād madhye Harishankarbhāīne vāt karī je, “Karakā1 upar be janāvar beṭhā hatā te madhyethī ek thoḍuk doṣhdhyān thavāthī ūḍī gayu ne ek besī rahyu. Tene gnān thayāthī tathā potānī joḍe janāvar hatu tenā guṇ līdhāthī ne potānā doṣh samajāṇāthī mokṣha thayo ne ūḍī gayelā janāvarne karakāmā guṇdhyān rahyāthī janma levā paḍyā.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Hāḍ-pinjar. 2. Doṣh-dhyān eṭale viṣhaya bogavavāthī āvatā kharāb pariṇāmno vichār athavā chintan. 3. Guṇ-dhyān eṭale viṣhaya bhogavavāthī maḷatā sukhno vichār athavā chintan; āsakti.

In Botad, Swami said to Harishankarbhai, “There were two birds sitting on some bones. One realized the detriment of enjoying the panch-vishays and flew away, while one remained sitting. The one that remained sitting gained wisdom, understood the virtue of the one that flew away, and realized its own flaw; therefore, it was liberated. The one that flew away, however, did not completely realize the detriment in enjoying the panch-vishays and had to take another birth.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.9

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 9 · Chapter 5 · Verse 9

Sahajānand Swāmīe Harishankarbhāīne Suratmā swapnamā darshan daīne vāt karī je, “Nishchaymā kasar chhe tethī deh dharāvyo chhe.” Māṭe nishchay paripakva karavo ne āgnā pāḷavī eṭale pūraṇkām thayu, em Swāmīe vāt karī.

Sahajanand Swami gave darshan in a dream to Harishankarbhai in Surat and said, “There is deficiency in your resolute faith in God, hence you have been made to take birth. Therefore, consolidate your faith and follow the commands so that you become fulfilled.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.10

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 10 · Chapter 5 · Verse 10

Pachhī Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Pragaṭ Bhagwān ne ā Mūḷ Sādhu maḷyā chhe tethī pūraṇkām mānavu ke vāsanā ṭaḷe to mānavu?” Swāmīe uttar karyo je, “Nishchay thayo eṭale vāsanā ṭaḷī chūkī, māṭe pūraṇkām mānavu. Ne āgnā pāḷavānī ruchi rākhavī ne asat desh-kāḷe āgnā lopāy to paṇ tene vighna nathī.”

Then Harishankarbhai asked, “Should we feel fulfilled because we have attained manifest God and this true Sadhu, or only when our material desires are overcome?” Swami replied, “Because conviction has developed, worldly desires will surely be overcome. Therefore, believe oneself to be fulfilled now and harbour a desire to follow the commands of God. And if the commands are transgressed due to adverse place, time, etc. still one faces no obstacles (on the path of moksha).”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.11

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 11 · Chapter 5 · Verse 11

“Keṭlāk vāt em kare chhe je, devlok vageremā jāvu nathī ne alp viṣhaymā to levāy jāy chhe tenu shu kāraṇ? Ne te Akṣhardhāmmā jāshe ke nahi?” E prashnano Swāmīe uttar karyo je, “Agnān chhe tethī viṣhaymā levāy chhe paṇ pragaṭ Bhagwān tathā ā Sādhuno draḍh āsharo chhe to te Akṣhardhāmmā ja jāshe ne e pramāṇe āsharo nathī ne te upar pramāṇe vāt to kare chhe to paṇ te Akṣhardhāmmā nahi jāy ne jenī sāthe prīti chhe tenā dhāmmā jāshe.” Tyā draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, Gāyakvāḍno chhokaro mūḷā sāru rue paṇ rāj tene ja maḷashe.

“Some aspirants say that they do not want to go to Devlok, etc. But what is the reason that they are tempted by insignificant objects of pleasure? And will they go to Akshardham or not?” Swami replied, “Because of ignorance, one is tempted by worldly pleasures, but because one has firm refuge in manifest God and this Sadhu, one will certainly go to Akshardham. And one who does not have such firm refuge and yet talks as mentioned above will still not go to Akshardham. And whichever deity one has affection for, one will go to his abode.” Then Swami gave the example of the son of the Gaekwad (ruler of Vadodara) – that he may cry for a radish but only he will inherit the kingdom.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.12

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 12 · Chapter 5 · Verse 12

Gām Bagaḍmā em vāt karī je, “Antar pakaḍe tene Bhagwān kahīe.” Tyāre Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Antar pakaḍyu te shu samajavu?” Tyāre uttar karyo je, “Potānī mūrtimā jīvne khenchī le ne teno doṣh varatīne tenā upar vāt karīne doṣh ṭāḷe, te antar pakaḍyu kahevāy.”

In the village of Bagad, Swami said, “One who can capture the thoughts of others is known as God.” Then, Harishankarbhai asked, “What is the meaning of ‘capturing the thoughts of others’?” Then Swami replied, “One who draws the jiva into his murti and knowing its faults talks about them and removes them – that is known as having captured the thoughts of others.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.13

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 13 · Chapter 5 · Verse 13

Bhagwān āpaṇī bāyḍī baḷātkāre laī jāy tathā chhokaro laī jāy ne doṣh na levāy to swarūpnu gnān thayu jāṇavu ne evāno mokṣha thaī chūkyo.

If God forcefully takes our wife away or takes our child away and we do not fault God, then we have acquired the knowledge of God’s form. And one who has understood this way has been liberated.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.14

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 14 · Chapter 5 · Verse 14

Shukmunie Suratmā vāt karelī je, “Guṇātītānand Swāmī vātu kare chhe tethī Mahārājnī vāt jeṭalo samās thāy chhe.”

In Surat, Shuk Muni had said, “From Gunatitanand Swami’s talks one gets the same satisfaction as with the talks of Maharaj.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.15

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 15 · Chapter 5 · Verse 15

Bhogāvāne kānṭhe ḍhūnḍhiyo tāpmā tap karato hoy te narkamā jāy ne āsharāvāḷāne chhokarā hoy to paṇ teno kuṭumbe sahit mokṣha thāy e vāt sarvene samajyāmā na āve.

An ascetic who performs penance on the banks of Bhogava River in scorching heat will go to narak; and one who has the refuge (of the manifest form of God) will be liberated along with his family, even though he has children and a wife.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.16

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 16 · Chapter 5 · Verse 16

Zāzā shabda sāmbhaḷe to ang tūṭī jāy ne buddhimā bhram thāy, māṭe bahu shabda sāmbhaḷvā nahi.

If one hears too many words [from various people with various principles], then the inclination [that holds them in Satsang] breaks and confusion arises. Therefore, one should not listen to too many words [from various people].

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.17

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 17 · Chapter 5 · Verse 17

Nāmī vinā kām saratu nathī. Nām te fūl chhe ne nāmī te faḷ chhe.

Without the source (i.e. the manifest form of God), mere chanting of names do not result in any achievement. The name is the flower and the source is the fruit.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.18

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 18 · Chapter 5 · Verse 18

Chokī beṭhī hoy tyā koī āvī shake nahi. E draṣhṭāntnu siddhānt e chhe je, Moṭā Sādhu sangāthe māhātmya jāṇīne jīv joḍyo hoy to tenāthī tenī marajī uparānt chheṭe jāy paṇ viṣhay bhogavāy nahi ne viṣhay ene lopī shake nahi.

Where a security post is established, nobody can enter. The message of this example is that if one has attached the jiva with the great Sadhu, knowing his glory, then even if one unwillingly has to separate from him, still one does not enjoy material pleasures and is not tempted by them.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.19

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 19 · Chapter 5 · Verse 19

Moṭā Sādhunā samāgamthī viṣhay ṭaḷī gayā chhe to paṇ nathī ṭaḷyā jevu jaṇāy chhe tenu kāraṇ e chhe je taravāryamā mariyā lāgyā hoy to sarāṇe chaḍāvyethī maṭī jāy paṇ bahu kāṭ lāgīne māhī sār paḍī gayā hoy to maṭe nahi. Te kyāre maṭe? To tene gāḷīne farī taravārya kare tyāre maṭe. Tem ā jīvmā viṣhaynā sār paḍī gayā chhe te deh mūkīne brahmarūp thāshe eṭale ṭaḷī jāshe.

Material pleasures have been overcome through the company of the great Sadhu. However, we feel as if they have not been overcome. The reasons: deep grooves on the edge of a sword due to wear and tear can be removed by sharpening with a whetstone, but deep grooves made by rust cannot be removed like that. But they can be removed when the sword is melted and remoulded. Similarly, the grooves of material pleasures made on the jiva will be resolved only when one leaves the body and becomes brahmarup.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.20

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 20 · Chapter 5 · Verse 20

Ā Sādhu to Bhagwānnī hajūrnā rahenārā chhe, paḷmātra chheṭe rahe tevā nathī ne e rahyā chhe te koī jīvnā kalyāṇne arthe rahyā chhe. Ne ā same ek vāt thāy chhe tevī vāt bījā Sādhu janmārāmā paṇ karī shake nahi ne karatā āvaḍe paṇ nahi ne janmāro abhyās kare to paṇ evī vāto shikhāy nahi.

This sadhu constantly remains in the presence of God. He is not likely to remain distant for even a moment. But he has stayed here, away from God, for the liberation of the jivas. At present, people say that such talks cannot be given by another sadhu in his lifetime, since he would not even know how to do it. And even if he studies for an entire lifetime, such talks cannot be learnt.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.21

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 21 · Chapter 5 · Verse 21

Bhagwānnu tathā ā Sādhunu jene gnān thayu chhe tene kāī karavu rahyu nathī. Te to āhī chhe to paṇ Akṣhardhāmmā ja beṭho chhe. Māṭe pānch māḷā vadhu ochhī farashe tenī chintā nathī, te to sāmarthī pramāṇe vartavu, paṇ Bhagwān ne ā Sādhu bene ja jīvmā rākhavā. Ne āpaṇe sādhanne baḷe moṭāī nathī paṇ upāsanānā baḷthī moṭāī chhe.

He who has attained the knowledge of the real importance and worth of God and this Sadhu has nothing left to achieve. He is here, yet is already seated in Akshardham. Therefore, there is no worry whether five rosaries more or less are turned; that should be done according to one’s capacity. But keep only God and this Sadhu in the jiva. And, for us, greatness is not due to endeavours but due to upāsanā.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.22

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 22 · Chapter 5 · Verse 22

Bhagwānnī āgnāthī pravṛuttimā joḍāy to paṇ bandhāy to kharo. Paṇ āgnā pāḷyethī prasannatā thāy. Tyā draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, rājānī āgnāthī sipāī kūvāmā sāt vār ūtaryo ne palaḷīne āvyo to paṇ gām āpyu.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. “Potānu vachan koṇ adhdhar zīle chhe?” E parīkṣhā khātar rājāe ḍhanḍhero pīṭāvyo ke, “Je kūvāmā paḍī koro bahār āve tene ek gām āpavu.” Koī taiyār na thayā. Ek sipāīe vichāryu, “Rājā buddhishāḷī chhe, mūrkh nathī. Emanā kahevā pāchhaḷ kaīk hetu hashe.” Sipāī kūvāmā sāt vār paḍyo ne bhīno bahār nīkaḷyo, chhatā ā sipāīe potānī āgnā adhdhar zīlī tethī rājāe prasanna thaī tene gām āpyu.

Even if by the wish of God, one were to engage in worldly activities, one may still become attached. But by obeying commands, blessings are attained. An example was given of the soldier who, on the command of the king, fell into the well seven times and emerged wet each time, and still the king gave him a village.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. The king of a kingdom proclaimed a challenge, “Anyone who dives into this well and emerges dry will be rewarded with a village.” All laughed at the task. However, one soldier thought, “The king is wise and so there must be some meaning behind his challenge.” So, the soldier jumped into the well seven times and emerged wet each time. But the king was pleased that the soldier had followed his orders and, although he did not remain dry, rewarded him with a village.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.23

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 23 · Chapter 5 · Verse 23

Nivṛuttimā rahe to indriyonī shuddhi thāy chhe ne jīvnī paṇ shuddhi thāy chhe tevī pravṛutti mārgmā thātī nathī māṭe vividh bhogmāthī sankoch karavo.

By being inactive, i.e. abstaining from sense pleasures, both the senses and jiva are purified. Such purity is not attained through the path of activity. Therefore, retreat from the various material pleasures.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.24

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 24 · Chapter 5 · Verse 24

Pragaṭ Bhagwānno sambandh thayāthī ne nirdoṣh samajyāthī mokṣha thaī rahyo chhe, ne doṣh rahyā to ṭāḷavāno abhyās kare to ṭaḷe, nahi to deh rahe tyā sudhī dukhī rahe. Ne deh mūkīne Bhagwānno nishchay chhe to Bhagwānnā dhāmne pāme chhe. Te upar Chhellā Prakaraṇnu Chotrīsmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvyu.

By attaining the company of manifest God and understanding him to be free of all faults, moksha is attained. And if faults remain (in us), then by making an effort to remove them, they are overcome. Otherwise, as long as the body remains, misery will persist. But because one has conviction (in the manifest form) of God, one attains the abode of God. On this, Swami had Vachanamrut Gadhada III-34 read.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.25

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 25 · Chapter 5 · Verse 25

Swāmīe vāt karī je, mākhīmāthī sūrya karavo eṭalo dākhaḍo Bhagwān jevā hoy tenāthī thāy, bījāthī thāy nahi.

Swami said that the effort to turn a fly (an insignificant person) into the sun (a powerful person)1 can be done by one who is like God, but not by others. Footnotes: 1. 1. To transform a worldly jiva into a divine one which is in rapport with God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.26

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 26 · Chapter 5 · Verse 26

Satsange karīne Bhagwān vash thāy tevā bījā koī sādhane thātā nathī. Te satsangno artha e chhe je, Bhagwān ne Sant tene viṣhe jeṭalo sadbhāv teṭalo satsang chhe, te thavo durlabh chhe.

God is not pleased as much by other endeavours as he is by satsang. Satsang is the extent of one’s goodwill towards God and his Sadhu. To attain it is rare.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.27

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 27 · Chapter 5 · Verse 27

Niṣhkuḷānand Swāmīne Mahārāje pūchhyu je, “Santdāsjī moṭā ke Muktānand Swāmī moṭā?” Tyāre Niṣhkuḷānand Swāmīe kahyu je, “Santdāsjī siddhadashāne pāmyā chhe te moṭā.” Pachhī Mahārāje kahyu je, “Santdāsjīne moṭyap āvavī bandha thaī ne Muktānand Swāmīnī moṭyap vadhatī jāy chhe, māṭe te moṭā.” Tyā draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, “Havelīmā bahu kharcha kare to be lākh rūpiyā kharcha thāy uparānt na thāy ne kheḍānā kāmpmā1 das lākh rūpiyānu kharcha thayu chhe ne das lākhnā pāyā nānkhyā chhe ne kimmat vadhatī jāy chhe, tem Santdāsjī havelī jevā ne Muktānand Swāmī kheḍānā kāmp jevā, em moṭap samajvī.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Chhāvaṇī (camp). Angrejoe Bhāratmā jude jude sthaḷe potānī senā ane rāj-kartāo māṭe raheṭhāṇ kempa bāndhelā. Kheḍānā kempmā e vakhate jangī karch thayelu!

Maharaj asked Nishkulanand Swami, “Is Santdasji greater or Muktanand Swami greater?” Nishkulanand Swami replied, “Santdasji has achieved an elevated state, so he is greater.” Maharaj said, “Santdasji has ceased progressing, whereas Muktanand Swami increasingly progresses; therefore, Muktanand Swami is greater.” Swami gave an analogy, “If one spends a large sum of money in building a mansion, they may spend 200,000 rupees but not more. However, in the camp of Kheda, [the British] spent one million rupees and another one million rupees were spent in the foundation; therefore, its value continues to appreciate. Santdasji is like the mansion and Muktanand Swami is like the camp of Kheda. Understand greatness in this way.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.28

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 28 · Chapter 5 · Verse 28

Gopāḷānand Swāmīnī kahelī vāt karī je, mārā gnānne be jaṇ pāmyā; Bālmukundānand Swāmī tathā Sarvanivāsānand Swāmī, ne māro satsang to Gaḍhaḍā pāsenī vonkaḷī1 jevo chhe. Uparvās varsādnu baḷ hoy tyā sudhī baḷ rahe, tem āpaṇe satsangnā samāgamnu baḷ hoy tyā sudhī sāru rahe nīkar kusange karīne ṭhā rahe nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. Nāno vaheḷo, nāḷu.

Swami mentioned what Gopalanand Swami had once said, “Only two realized my knowledge: Balmukund Swami and Sarvanivasanand Swami. And my satsang is like a small stream near Gadhada. The river’s mouth will produce a strong current as long as it has the strength of the rain. Similarly, as long as we have the association of satsang, we will remain good. Otherwise, because of kusang, we will not remain good.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.29

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 29 · Chapter 5 · Verse 29

Satsang karatā pratham vivek āve tethī satya-asatya samajāy. Tyār pachhī vimok1 āve tethī strī ādiknī ichchhā ṭaḷī jāy. Pachhī kriyā āvaḍe ke’tā satsangnī rīt pramāṇe sarvane maḷatī kriyā āvaḍe. Tyār pachhī sarvathī par evu potānu swarūp brahmarūp manāy. Tyār pachhī Bhagwān vare. Tyār pachhī jem jīv dehnī rakṣhā kare chhe, strī Swāmīnī rakṣhā kare chhe, tem Bhagwān sarva prakāre rakṣhā kare chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Strī-puruṣhne paraspar kāmnī āsaktithī rahit rahevāpaṇu. (Vedras: Pṛu. 15)

While practicing satsang, first one gains vivek – by which one understands right and wrong. Then vimok1 is gained – by which desires for women, etc. are overcome. Then we learn how to do things according to the traditions of Satsang and which are in accordance with all. When one believes one’s form to be brahmarup, above all else, then God accepts him. Thereafter, just as the jiva protects the body and the wife protects the husband, similarly, God protects satsangis in all ways. Footnotes: 1. 1. Becomes above lustful desires.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.30

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 30 · Chapter 5 · Verse 30

Jeno samāgam maḷavānī prārthanā kare chhe teno samāgam Bhagwāne āpaṇne hāthohāth āpyo chhe.

The one whose association we have been praying for, his association God has given to us hand-to-hand.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.31

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 31 · Chapter 5 · Verse 31

Panch mahāpāpno karanāro hoy tenu prāyashchitta shāstramā kahyu nathī to paṇ ā sabhānā darshan kare to tenā pāp ṭaḷī jāy; kem je, ā sabhāmā Bhagwān chhe, Sādhu chhe, sarve chhe.

The scriptures do not prescribe atonement for one who commits the five grave sins. Still, if he has darshan of this assembly his sins are washed away, since in this assembly are God, Sadhu and everyone.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.32

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 32 · Chapter 5 · Verse 32

Puruṣhottam bheḷā Akṣhar mūrtimān āvyā chhe paṇ oḷakhātā nathī. Ne ā sabhāmā kahīe to manāy nahi. Māṭe moḍhe kahevānī rīt nathī ne tenā bhaktanā kahevāthī nishchay thāy chhe.

With Purushottam, Akshar himself has come, but he has not been recognized. And in this assembly, if I declare who this (Akshar) is, it will not be believed. Therefore, to say openly is not the proper method. And when his (Akshar’s) devotees state that he is Akshar then one is convinced.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.33

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 33 · Chapter 5 · Verse 33

Samvat 1921nā Jeṭh Sud 11 Bhīm Agiyārasne Somvāre bapor namate koṭhārmā Harishankarbhāīne vāt karī je, “Āj savārnī sabhāmā bahu sārī vārtā thaī. Te shāthī je, Bhagwān āvyā hatā, ne hamaṇā koīne samajātu nahi hoy to āgaḷ samajāshe. Ne ītaḍī ānchaḷe rahe chhe to paṇ lohī pāme chhe ne vāchhaḍu chheṭu rahe chhe to paṇ dūdh pāme chhe. Yogeshvardāsjī tathā Mahāpuruṣhdāsjī moṭā sādhu chhe ne sānkhyagnānmā kushaḷ chhe ne mārā jevo sādhu nathī em samaje chhe, haribhakta tamāmne mārā swarūpno nishchay chhe, sādhumā koīne nahi samajātu hoy.” Shukmuni tathā Haridāsjī vagere sādhunī vāt karī.

Monday afternoon of Jeth sud 11 of Samvat 1921 (the day of Bhim Ekadashi), Swami said to Harishankarbhai in the storage quarter, “The talks in the morning discourse were really great. Why is that? Because God came. And if someone does not understand today, they will understand in the future. A tick lives on the cow’s udders, yet it only tastes the blood; whereas, a calf is not so close, yet it gets the cow’s tasty milk.1 Yogeshwardasji and Mahapurushdasji are both great sadhus and they are complete in their understanding of sānkhya-gnān. Also, they believe there is no other sadhu equal to me. All of the devotees have conviction of my form, while some sadhus may not.” Then, Swami spoke about Shukmuni, Haridasji, and other sadhus. Footnotes: 1. 1. Example: a tick lives on the cow’s udders but it can only taste the blood of the cow. A calf, on the other hand, does not remain so close, yet it drinks the cow’s milk. Moral: even if some remain close to the Satpurush physically, if they do not understand his form thoroughly, they do not experience the bliss that those who understand his form completely experience, despite not being close physically.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.34

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 34 · Chapter 5 · Verse 34

“Māre to jīvne Bhagwān vinā bīje joḍavā nathī ne tamane pravṛuttimāthī chhoḍāvīne sukhe bhajan karāvīsh,” e vagere ghaṇī tarehnī vāto karī. Ā to dishmātra lakhī chhe. Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Tame to antarjāmī chho tethī tamārī āgaḷ prārthanā karavī ghaṭatī nathī.” Tyāre Swāmīe uttar karyo je, “Antarjāmī āgaḷ paṇ pūchhavānu hoy te pūchhavu ne kahyu ke tamāre āhī paṇ Bhagwānnā dhāmnā jevu sukh mānavu ne tamāre pūrvano sanskār baḷiyo chhe māṭe bhajan karyā karavu ne Vartālmā badhā māṇas mārāmā taṇāī gayā ne keṭlāke dhotiyā oḍhāḍyā ne hu to Mahārājnī mūrti sāmu joī rahyo,” em potānā sāmarthyanī vāt karī.

“I want to attach the jivas to God only and nowhere else. And I want to free all of you from pravrutti so you can worship God happily.” Swami spoke many such similar words, of which only few words have been captured here. Then, Harishankarbhai asked, “You are omniscient, therefore it is not necessary to pray to you.” Swami replied, “One should ask what they need to even to one who is omniscient.” Then, Swami continued, “You should believe that happiness here is equal to the happiness of Akshardham. You have great merits of your past births, so continue worshiping God. In Vartal, many people were drawn toward me. Many offered me dhotiyās, but I simply remained fixed on Maharaj’s murti.” Swami spoke about his power in this way.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.35

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 35 · Chapter 5 · Verse 35

Ā jīv badhāy sārā chhe, paṇ akhanḍ chintavan nathī thātu tenu kāraṇ e chhe je, abhyās karyo nathī, paṇ abhyāse thāy.

All jivas are good, but continuous focus on God does not remain because it has not been practiced. But with practice it is possible.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.36

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 36 · Chapter 5 · Verse 36

Antaryāmī āgaḷ manne chore te mūrakh kahevāy. Satpuruṣhne sevavā teno arth karyo je, hāth joḍavā ne anuvṛutti ne mahimā samajvo tene kāī kasar rahe nahi.

One who tries to hide his thoughts from the (omniscient) indweller is a fool. Swami explained what is meant by serving the Satpurush, “No deficiencies remain (in one) who folds his hands and understands his inner wishes and glory.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.37

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 37 · Chapter 5 · Verse 37

Gonḍalmā Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu teno uttar karyo je, tamāre Gopāḷānand Swāmī, Kṛupānand Swāmī tathā hāl je Moṭā Sādhu chhe tenī sāthe het chhe; māṭe bhajan karyā karavu. Prashna pūchhavānī jarūr nathī.

In Gondal, in response to Harishankarbhai’s question, Swami said, “You have love toward Gopaland Swami, Krupanand Swami, and the Great Sadhu present today (referring to himself). Therefore, continue worshiping God. There is no need to ask questions.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.38

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 38 · Chapter 5 · Verse 38

Sarve rūḍā guṇ abhyāsthī tathā sangthī āve chhe paṇ Bhagwānnī tathā Sādhunī niṣhṭhā te to pūrva sanskārthī tathā Moṭānā anugrahthī thāy chhe ne jeṭalu Moṭānā samāgammā rahevāy teṭalo tene sanskār tathā anugrah samajavo ne jeṇe jeṭalī niṣhṭhā pravartāvī teṭalī tenī moṭāī samajavī.

All good virtues are attained through practice and the company of good people. However, faith in God and his Sadhu is attained due to the favourable impressions of past births and the consequent grace of the great. So, the time for which one is able to stay in the company of the great should be understood as due to one’s past meritorious deeds and his grace. And a person’s greatness should be understood according to the faith in God he has propagated.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.39

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 39 · Chapter 5 · Verse 39

Pūrvano sanskār hoy paṇ ūtarto sang maḷe to sanskār ṭaḷī jāy ne so janme sāro thavāno hoy tene rūḍo sang maḷe to tarat sāro thaī jāy.

If one has performed good deeds in past births, but encounters bad company, then the good impressions are destroyed. And one destined to become good only after a hundred births immediately becomes good, if he attains the good company of a Satpurush.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.40

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 40 · Chapter 5 · Verse 40

Moṭāe harek tarehthī sukh āpyu hoy, āgaḷ Bhagwāne āpyu hoy ne bahu mahimā samajāṇo hoy to paṇ jene tene kahetā faravu nahi ne koīne kahevu hoy to soḷ āne ek āno kahevu.

If the great (sadhus) have given happiness in all respects, and if God has given in the past and one has truly understood the glory of God, still one should not go around telling everyone. And if one wants to tell anyone, then say only a little.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.41

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 41 · Chapter 5 · Verse 41

Shukjīe Parīkṣhitne kahyu je, "Hu rājā chhu ne mune brāhmaṇno shrāp thayo chhe ne mane sarapḍans thāshe, evī je pashubuddhi teno tyāg karīne tārī garbhamā rakṣhā karī chhe te Bhagwānne sambhār." Sarva Bhāgwatno sār āṭalī vāt chhe.

Shukji said to Parikshit, “Believing that ‘I’m a king and have been cursed by a brāhmin and will be bit by a snake,’ is the intellect of an animal. Discard this understanding and remember the God that protected you in the womb.” The essence of the Bhagwat is this one principle.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.42

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 42 · Chapter 5 · Verse 42

Bhagwānnā ek vār darshan thāy chhe tenā puṇyano pār nathī. Ne Bhagwān vinā bījī vāt sāmbhaḷvī nahi ne Bhagwānno jog bhāre thayo chhe. Bhagavānnī mūrtimā sarva jīv taṇāī jāy ne gnānīne prīti rahe ne agnānīne ṭaḷī jāy.

The merits earned by the darshan of God even once are limitless. And do not listen to talks other than those of God. We have this great opportunity to associate with God. All jivas are attracted towards the murti of God. For one who is knowledgeable, affection for God remains, while for the ignorant, it is lost.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.43

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 43 · Chapter 5 · Verse 43

Ā lok chhe te joḍe chhāṇ chonṭyā jevo chhe ne kākarānī jamīnmā hīnḍavā mānḍyu chhe to thoḍā vakhatmā ghasāī jāshe.

This world is like cow-dung stuck to a shoe. So, once one starts walking on pebbly ground, it will be rubbed off in a short time.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.44

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 44 · Chapter 5 · Verse 44

Guru maḷyā pachhī shiṣhyane garbhavās vagere dukhno trās maṭyo nathī to te guru ja nathī.

After a guru is attained, if the miseries of rebirth, etc. are not removed, then he is not a true guru.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.45

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 45 · Chapter 5 · Verse 45

Manne dhārye bhajan-bhakti vagere kare chhe temā antare shānti nahi, paṇ Bhagwān ne Sādhunā kahyā pramāṇe kare to shānti thāy chhe.

Offering devotion, etc. as per the whims of one’s mind does not bring peace within, but if one does as per the guidance of God and his Sadhu, one attains peace.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.46

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 46 · Chapter 5 · Verse 46

Hāl Bhagwānno anugrah ghaṇo chhe. Te shu je, parāṇe bhajan karāve chhe, vartamān paḷāve chhe ne vātu sambhaḷāve chhe, evā Sādhu maḷyā chhe. Dehmāthī ne lokmāthī ām ne ām samāgam karatā Bhagwānmā het thāy ke gnān thāy tyāre ūkhaḍāy.

At present, God has showered much grace. What is that? That we have met the true Sadhu who compels us to offer devotion, observe our duties and listen to spiritual discourses. By associating with him in this way and overcoming affection for the body and world, one develops affection for God. Then, when spiritual knowledge is attained one becomes detached.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.47

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 47 · Chapter 5 · Verse 47

Sparshādik uttam viṣhay pratham sārā lāge chhe ne pachhī dukh thāy chhe. Gnānī sukhī chhe kā bījānu kahelu māne te sukhī chhe. Adharmano sarg jītavā pahochāy tyā sudhī dākhaḍo karavo ne nahi pahonchāy tyāre Bhagwān madad karashe.

Either the spiritually wise is happy or one who believes what the Sadhu says is happy. One should persist until the path of immorality is conquered. And when it cannot be defeated, (pray and) God will help.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.48

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 48 · Chapter 5 · Verse 48

Ghaṇā jīvne mokṣhane mārge chaḍhāvavā chhe tethī niyam-dharmanī vāt ghaṇī thāy ne māhātmyanī vāt thāy nahi. Mahārāje māhātmyanī vātu ghaṇī karī eṭale kupātra jīve dharma mūkī dīdhā. Tethī Mahārāje potāne hāthe māhātmyanī vātu upar līṭā mūkyā. Māhātmya jāṇyethī shānti chhe paṇ jīv pātra nahi tethī māhātmyanī vāt thātī nathī.

In order to draw many jivas on the path of liberation, talks of observing niyam-dharma take place, while talks of the mahimā (greatness of God and the Sant) do not take place. Maharaj talked a great deal about mahimā, so the unworthy jivas lapsed in observing dharma. Then, Maharaj crossed off the talks of mahimā with his own hand (i.e. stopped talking about mahimā). Peace is achieved by understanding the mahimā of God, but the jivas are not worthy, therefore, talks of mahimā do not take place.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.49

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 49 · Chapter 5 · Verse 49

Deh, indriyu māyik chhe ne padārth paṇ māyik chhe, tethī sajātipaṇu thayu; te temā chonṭe, pūrvano sanskār hoy te na chonṭe.

The body and senses are material (i.e. evolved from māyā), like the material objects of this world. As they belong to the same category, they attract each other. One who has good impressions from previous births is not attached to material objects.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.50

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 50 · Chapter 5 · Verse 50

Kalau kīrtanāt eno arth karyo je, Kaḷi Yugmā tamoguṇ-rajoguṇ ghaṇo, eṭale kīrtan gāvavā tathā bhajan karavu eṭale tamoguṇ pese nahi. Ne bhajan em karavu je, jem be hajār ghoḍāno vāj1 jāto hoy te sosaro2 koī nīkaḷī shake ja nahi, tem utāvaḷe bhajan karavu eṭale sankalp pesī shake nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ghoḍānī vegvāḷī chāl. 2. Ārpār.

‘Kalau kirtanāt.’ The meaning of this is that, in Kali-yug there is a predominance of tamogun and rajogun, therefore, sing devotional songs and offer worship so that tamogun does not enter within. And sing devotional songs in such a way that worldly desires are unable to enter. Just as, when a troop of two thousand horses is marching by, no one can cross through their line; similarly, offer worship rapidly so that (worldly) desires are not able to enter.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.51

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 51 · Chapter 5 · Verse 51

Man, indriyune vagar prayojane chāḷā chūnthavāno swabhāv chhe, māṭe tene jāṇīne judā paḍavu.

The mind and senses have a habit of provoking (desires) without any reason, so know this and remain separate from them.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.52

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 52 · Chapter 5 · Verse 52

Sparshamā ne jihvāmā to jīv chonṭelā ja chhe, māṭe tene jāṇavu ke koī nahi chonṭatā hoy tene pūrveno sanskār chhe ne ā mārg to nevānu pāṇī mobhe chaḍāvyā1 jevo chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ashakya kāryane shakya karavu. Ā kahevat chhe. Makānne ḍhānkavā ḍhaḷatā be chhāparā karī banne bāju ḍhaḷatā naḷiyā mūke chhe. Varsādnu pāṇī ḍhāḷmā nīche dadūḍe chhe. E pāṇīne mobhāre - ūnche be chhāparā bhegā thāy chhe tyā chaḍhāvavu kaṭhaṇ chhe.

The jiva is certainly attached to touch and taste. Therefore, for someone who is not attached to them, it is because of favourable past impressions. And this path is as difficult as raising water draining from the roof back to the ridge of the roof.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.53

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 53 · Chapter 5 · Verse 53

Rājāne āshare jāy tenā gunā māf kare tem Bhagwān jīvnā gunā māf kare chhe, paṇ jīvnī rīt avaḷī chhe te potāne saras mānīne Bhagwānne āshare jāy nahi ne doḍh pahor1 divas chaḍhatā sudhī Bhagwān jīvnā gunā māf karyā kare chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Prahar (traṇ kalāk).

One who seeks refuge of the king is forgiven for his crimes. Similarly, God forgives the jiva for its mistakes. But the way of the jiva is improper since it believes itself to be good and does not seek refuge in God. But, God continues to forgive the jiva for its mistakes up to a certain limit when it takes refuge in him.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.54

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 54 · Chapter 5 · Verse 54

Āṭhe pahor evu bhajan karavu je, ‘Ā deh hu nahi.’ Ne sānkhye sahit yog thāshe athavā gnānpralay thāshe tyāre kāraṇ dehno nāsh thāshe ne pūro mukta thāshe; māṭe gnānpralayno abhyās karavo.

All day long believe that ‘I am not this body.’ And when Sānkhya and Yoga are attained or gnān-pralay is attained then the causal body is destroyed and one will become a complete mukta. Therefore, study the ultimate spiritual wisdom.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.55

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 55 · Chapter 5 · Verse 55

Nijātmānam brahmarūpam e shlok lakhyo chhe te pramāṇe Mahārāj āpaṇne karāvashe. Ne puṣhpnā hār chhe te sarp chhe ne strī chhe te rākṣhasī chhe, e raste have chālyā chhīe te Mahārāj karāvashe.

Maharaj will make us understand according to the shloka ‘Nijātmānam brahmarupam’. A flower garland is like a serpent and a woman is like a demoness1 - Maharaj will make us understand this way since we have walked on this path. Footnotes: 1. 1. This is based on a Satsangijivan verses 1/36/70 and 1/36/74. Gunatitanand Swami is not denouncing women in this talk. He is rather denouncing the nature of lust. In the same way, a man is like a demon for a woman.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.56

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 56 · Chapter 5 · Verse 56

“Traṇ dehthī potānu swarūp judu mānavu, Mahārājne Bhagwān jāṇavā, Puruṣhottam jāṇavā, sarvenā niyantā jāṇavā, Parabrahma jāṇavā, kartum-akartum ne anyathā-kartum jāṇavā. Ne evī upamā bījāne devāy nahi, e to Mahārāj ekane ja devāy, ne bījā sarve puruṣh chhe ne Mahārāj Puruṣhottam chhe. Ne anek koṭi puruṣh chhe ne anek koṭi īshvar ne anek koṭi Akṣhar1 chhe.” Tyāre Vāghe Khāchare pūchhyu je, “Akṣhar ek kahevāy chhe ne anek koṭi kem kaho chho?” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Dhāmrūp Akṣhar ek ja chhe ne bījā anant koṭi Akṣhar chhe.” Pachhī Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Dhāmrūp Akṣhar mūrtimān chhe te shī rīte chhe?” Tyāre Swāmīe kahyu je, “Mūrtimān āpaṇā jevā ja chhe ne Bhagwān jevā ja kahevāy ne Bhagwānthī kām thāy teṭalu temanāthī thāy chhe. Puruṣh, Prakṛuti, Akṣhar sarvenā e Bhagwān chhe ne ek Puruṣhottamnā ja dās chhe.” Farī pūchhyu je, “Puruṣhottam āhī avatār dharīne āvyā chhe te bheḷā Dhāmrūp Akṣhar āhī āvyā chhe ke nahi?” Tyāre Swāmīe uttar karyo je, “Puruṣhottam bheḷā āhī āvyā chhe ne Puruṣhottamnī āgnāe karīne anek jīvnā kalyāṇne arthe āhī ja rahyā chhe.” Farī pūchhyu je, “Dhāmrūp Akṣhar bījā Akṣharkoṭine līn kare te shī rīt chhe?” Teno uttar karyo je, “Līn karavāne e samarth chhe, te līn karavā hoy to kare.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Akṣharnā sādharmyane pāmelā anant koṭi Akṣharmukto chhe.

“Believe one’s true form to be separate from the three bodies. Know Maharaj as God, Purushottam, the controller of all, Parabrahman, the doer, the non-doer and the doer of even that which is not destined to happen. Such powers cannot be attributed to anyone else, but only to Maharaj himself. Everyone else is a Purush, while Maharaj is Purushottam. And there are countless millions of Purushes and countless millions of ishwars and countless millions of akshars.”1 Then Vāghā Khāchar asked, “Akshar is said to be one and why do you say countless millions?” Then Swami said, “Akshar, in the form of God’s abode is only one, while there are countless millions of akshar muktas.” Then Harishankarbhai asked, “How does Akshar, the abode of God, have a manifest form?” Then Swami explained, “He has a form just like us and it can also be said to be like God. And the work that can be done by God can be done by him. He is the master of Purush, Prakruti and all akshar muktas and is subservient only to Purushottam.” Again, Harishankarbhai asked, “Purushottam has incarnated here, so, has Akshar, the abode, come here with him or not?” Then Swami replied, “He has come here with Purushottam and by the wish of Purushottam has stayed here to liberate countless jivas.” Again, Harishankarbhai asked, “How does Akshar, the abode, absorb the other akshar muktas?” To this, Swami replied, “He is capable of absorbing them and can absorb them if he wills.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Refers to akshar muktas, who have attained the state of aksharrup (brahmarup).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.57

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 57 · Chapter 5 · Verse 57

Shivjīnā gaḷāmā rahīne sāpe Garuḍnī sāme fufāḍā māravā mānḍyā, tyāre Garuḍe kahyu je, “E tāru baḷ nathī paṇ Shivjīnu baḷ chhe, tethī māru jor chālatu nathī.” Tem āpaṇe dukh āve tyāre Bhagwān tathā Sādhune bāzī paḍavu eṭale kāḷ, karma ne māyā koīnu baḷ chāle nahi.

From its position around the neck of Shivji, the cobra hissed at the eagle. Then the eagle said, “This is not your strength, but that of Shivji. That is why my strength does not work.” Similarly, when one faces difficulties, cling to God and his Sadhu so that the influence of kāl, karma and māyā does not prevail.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.58

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 58 · Chapter 5 · Verse 58

Indriyādik kṣhetra thakī koī ūgare em nathī. Māṭe Vachanāmṛutmā kahyu chhe tem niyamrūpī beḍīmā rahe to ūgare. Ne Brahmādik kāī aṇsamaju ke agnānī nahotā paṇ ene Moṭā Sādhu vinā bījā koī jitāvī shake ja nahi. Ne Moṭā Sādhu chhe te kaḷ batāve, chhaḷ batāve ane jukti batāvīne indriyune jitāḍe ne mokṣha paṇ kare. Māṭe potānu baḷ mūkīne Moṭā Sādhune bāzī paḍavu ne antahkaraṇ, indriyunu to mānavu ja nahi. Ne potāne baḷe jītavā jāy to sāmu bandhan thāy. Tyā rājānī rāṇīe chha dīkarāne vairāg chaḍhāvīne tyāgī karyā tenī vāt1 karī. Ne bīju draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, upādhyāyne2 so vār ūne pāṇīe dhūe ne chandan chopaḍe ne dhūp de to paṇ vāchhūṭ thāy tyāre evī ne evī ja gandhāī āve; tem sarva indriyo, antahkaraṇ evā malin chhe te shuddha thāy tevā nathī. Māṭe enu mānavu ja nahi ne potāne Nijātmānam brahmarūpam mānavu eṭale sarve jītī ja chūkyo. Footnotes: 1. 1. Vishvāvasu Gandharvanī kuvarī ne Hrutudhvaj Rājānī rāṇī Madālasāe dīkarā - Vikrānt, Subāhu ane Shatrumardanne bāḷpaṇmā hālarḍā gātī veḷā ātmagnān karāvelu. Moṭā thaī traṇee sanyās līdho. Chotho putra Alark tenā pitā pāse rahevāthī māno samāgam karī na shakyo. Chhevaṭe moṭā putra Vikrāntne rāṇīe bolāvyo ne kahyu, “Tāro ek bhāī bākī rahī jāy chhe. Tu tārā pitāne kahe ke rājgādīno vāras hu chhu. Eṭale Alarkne chhūṭo karashe.” Ām karavāthī Alarkne rājāe enī mā pāse javā dīdho. Madālasāe tene vairāgya chaḍhāvyo ne vanmā mokalī dīdho. Tenā gayā pachhī moṭo paṇ chālyo gayo... (Ām, Purāṇmā chha nahī paṇ chār dīkarānī vātā āve chhe.) 2. Gudā, maḷdvārne.

“No one can save themselves from the indriyas. So, as mentioned in the Vachanamrut, if one remains bound by their respective niyams, they can be saved. Brahmā and others were not ignorant. But no one other than the Great Sadhu can help them be victorious. The Great Sadhu can show tricks and schemes to defeat the indriyas and liberate people. Therefore, one should forsake their own strength and cling to the Great Sadhu. Moreover, one should not abide by their own antahkaran and indriyas.” Then, Swami gave the example of a queen that inspired her six sons to renounce.1 He gave another example, “If one washes their anus with hot water and applies chandan, it still smells the same. Similarly, the indriyas and antahkaran are impure and will never become pure. Therefore, one should not believe them. If one believes ‘Nijātmānam brahmarupam’ (identifies one’s ātmā with Aksharbrahman), then one has conquered everything.” Footnotes: 1. 1. The daughter of Vishwāvasu and the wife of Ritudhwaj, queen Madālshā inspired vairāgya and ātma-nishthā while singing lullabies to her newborn sons. Her older three sons - Vikrānt, Subāhu, and Shatrumardan - were deeply ingrained by these words and immediately renounced the comforts of their kingdom. Ritudhwaj did not like this. He asked Madālshā not to impart any gnān to their fourth son, Alark. Therefore, Madālshā preached dharma of varna and āshram to Alark and handed over the kingdom to him. Madālshā and Ritudhwaj left for the forest. When they were leaving, Madālshā gave Alark a ring with small writing: “Whenever you are troubled, read this and follow it.” Alark became a great king and started indulging in the comforts of the kingdom. When his brother Subāhu found out, he got help from the king of Kāshi to subdue Alark. Alark was now troubled. He was surrounded by the king of Kāshi and his wealth was depleted. He remembered the message on his ring. He handed over his kingdom to the king of Kāshi and left to find a sadhu who would secure his liberation. He gained knowledge from Dattātreya, developed vairāgya and renounced. In this recollection, Gunatitanand Swami mentions six sons as heard by mouth from generations; but Madālshā had four sons according to the scriptures.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.59

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 59 · Chapter 5 · Verse 59

Jene Bhagwān bhajavā hoy tenāthī badhāynī marajī rākhī shakāy nahī, tenāthī to Bhagwānnī marajī sachavāy.

One who wants to worship God cannot please everybody. He can only fulfill the wishes of God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.60

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 60 · Chapter 5 · Verse 60

Bhagwānnā Ekāntik Sādhu jene gher bhikṣhā māgavā jaīne ūbhā rahe tenu ghar tīrthrūp thaī rahyu ne sarve tīrth gayānu ene faḷ thāy chhe ne tevā samāmā teno deh paḍe to Bhagwānnā dhāmne pāme evu māhātmya chhe. Te Bhagwānne āpaṇe pāmyā tethī āpaṇe panḍe ja tīrthrūp thayā chhīe. Ne hālmā jeṭalu haribhaktamā tathā sādhumā sāmarthya chhe teṭalu bījā avatār thayā temā sāmarthya nathī. Te upar gām Ghāṇlānī ḍoshīnī vāt karī je, ḍoshīe enā dhaṇīne kahyu je, men Bhagwānnā pag chāmpyā chhe eṭale mārā hāth parsādīnā thayā chhe, tethī mārā goḷānu pāṇī jeṇe pīdhu tathā mārā hāthnā roṭalā jeṇe khādhā tenu kalyāṇ thāshe, to tārā kalyāṇmā sho sandeh chhe?

“Whosoever’s house the enlightened Sadhu of God goes to for begging alms, that house becomes a place of pilgrimage. Also, the giver of alms earns the merits of having been to every pilgrim place. And if in that time he were to die, he would attain the abode of God. Such is the glory of the God-realized Sadhu. That God we have attained, so we ourselves have become places of pilgrimage. And, the power which the devotees and sadhus have today is not found in the other past avatārs.” On this, Swami narrated the story of the old woman of Ghānlā: “The old woman told her husband, ‘I have massaged the legs of God, so my hands have been sanctified. So, anyone who has drank water from my pot or has eaten food made by me will be liberated. So, is there any doubt about your liberation?’”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.61

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 61 · Chapter 5 · Verse 61

Sādhuno droh em samajavo je, sarvathī moṭā Sādhu hoy tene bījā jevā kahevā tathā tenāthī ūtartā kahevā eṇe karīne Sādhuno droh thāy chhe. Ne āj jevī vātu samajāy chhe tevī koī divas samajāṇī nathī. Ne hāl Bhagwān chhe, Sādhu chhe, sarve āhī chhe, tenā swarūpno parbhāv samajāto nathī e ja ene moṭu pāp chhe. Ne hāl Bhagwān Akṣhardhām sotā āhī chhe; māṭe Jādav jevā na thāvu, Odhavjī jevā bhakta thāvu. Ne āvā ne āvā Akṣhardhāmmāthī āvyā chhe evo parbhāv akhanḍ jaṇāy to “Aho! aho!” sarakhu rahe. Em vāt karīne kahyu je, jevā Sādhu chhe tevā oḷakhāṇā nahi. Em marmanī vātu ghaṇī karī.

To understand the God-realized Sadhu, who is greater than all, as equal or inferior to other ordinary sadhus is an insult to him. Consider it to be a sin. Currently, God is present, the Sadhu is present, and all others are here. That the power and strength of his form is not understood is a grave sin. And, at present, God is here along with his Akshardham. Therefore, do not be like the Yadavs (who did not understand Shri Krishna’s glory) but be a devotee like Uddhavji. God has come here from Akshardham exactly as he is there and if this understanding remains forever then one will experience great elation and excitement. After saying this, Swami said, “The Sadhu has not been truly recognized as he is.” In this way, he narrated many talks of great meaning.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.62

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 62 · Chapter 5 · Verse 62

Manjībhāīe vāḍī madhye pūchhyu je, “Upāsanānī bahu vāt thāy chhe paṇ kem samajātu nathī?” Tyāre uttar karyo je, “Upāsanā thāy chhe, dharma paḷe chhe, kasar ṭaḷe chhe paṇ āpaṇne khabar paḍatī nathī ne sarve thatā jāy chhe. Ne jenā māvtar samarth hoy tenā chhokarāne shī fakar hoy, ne jenā sheṭh samarth hoy tenā gumāstāne baḷ hoy.” Tyā draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, “Bāṭlīvāḷe ek gumāstāne pātrīs hajār rūpiyā mojnā āpyā1 ne Karsanjī Desāīne pānch hajār rūpiyā mojnā āpyā.” Footnotes: 1. 1. ‘Bāṭalīboy’ nāmnī kampanīnā mālike tenā kārbhārīne kampanīnā utpādan vadhārī āpavā badal moṭī rakamnī bheṭ āpelī. Moṭānī moj moṭī hoy.

In the farm, Manjibhai asked Swami, “Many talks on upāsanā have been delivered, but why are they not understood?” Then Swami replied, “Upāsanā is attained, dharma is observed, deficiencies are overcome, but we do not realize that all this is happening. And what do those children whose parents are powerful have to fear? An employee whose employer is powerful has strength.” Then he gave an example, “The Batliboi company gave one of their employees 35,000 rupees as a gift and Karsanji Desai was given 5,000 rupees.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.63

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 63 · Chapter 5 · Verse 63

Ek kīrtanmā kahyu chhe je, Bhagwānno āsharo thayo tene kāī sādhan karavu bākī rahyu nathī. Ne bījā avatār to pānch sher, das sherno chamak chhe. Āj to chamakno parvat āvyo chhe, te sarve jīvne khenchī le chhe. Gnānīne mate ā lokno ve’vār chhe te chhokarānī ramat jevo chhe; jem chhokarā dhūḍyanā lāḍu karīne nātya jamāḍe chhe tem ā sarve tevu ja chhe.

In one kirtan it is said that one who has sought refuge in God has nothing left to do. And other avatārs are like magnets of five pounds or ten pounds. But, today, a mountain of magnet has come and is pulling all jivas towards it. In the view of the spiritually wise, the activities of this world are like child’s play – just as children make lādoos out of sand daily and feed everyone, all this is just like that.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.64

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 64 · Chapter 5 · Verse 64

Koṭi kalp sudhī Bhagwān bhajyā vinā sukh nahi thāy. Ne pragaṭ Bhagwān chhe, pragaṭ vātu chhe ne bījā to chitrāmaṇnā sūraj jevā chhe. Ne Swāminārāyaṇne Bhagwān jāṇyā chhe tene mākhaṇmāthī movāḷo khenchīne kāḍhe em dehthī judo pāḍī deshe. Ne ā to soḷ divasnu shrāddh chhe.

Even after tens of millions of years there is no happiness, except by worshipping God. And at this time God is present, and the talks are of the present manifest form of God, while others are like a painted sun. And those who have known Swaminarayan as God will be separated from their body at the time of death as easily as a hair is pulled and removed from butter. And this world is a sixteen-day shrāddh (i.e. it offers happiness for a very short period and for the rest of the time it is full of misery).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.65

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 65 · Chapter 5 · Verse 65

Jīvno mokṣha karavā manuṣhya jevā thayā chhīe. Ne tamāre prārabdh to bhogavavu paḍashe ne sang evo rang lāgashe.

We have assumed the human body to liberate the jivas. However, you all will have to live out your prārabdha [fate]. And you will acquire qualities as according to your company.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.66

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 66 · Chapter 5 · Verse 66

Bhagwān Akṣhardhāmmā chhe tevā ne tevā ja āvyā chhe, temā bāḷ, joban ne vṛuddhapaṇu evā manuṣhyabhāv nathī ne tirodhān1 nathī, ne manuṣhyabhāv dekhāy chhe te naṭnī māyānī2 peṭhe chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Adrashya, parokṣh, ākhathī aḷagā. 2. Khel karanār bajāṇiyānī māyājāḷ. Ā naṭ gāmnu māṇas jue te rīte ākāshmā laṭaktu doraḍu zīlī devatā sāthe laḍavā jāy. Laḍāīmā naṭnā hāth, pag ne chhevaṭe dhaḍ badhu ṭukaḍā thaī nīche paḍe. Tene vīṇī laī naṭnī patnī chitā par chaḍhīne baḷī mare. Badhe shok vyāpī jāy. Thoḍī ja vārmā pelo naṭ nīche ūtare ne rājānī pāse potānī patnīnī māngaṇī kare. Rājā kahe, “E to baḷī gaī.” Pachhī naṭ tenī patnīnī būm pāḍe, te rājānā sinhāsan nīchethī nīkaḷe! Ām, naṭ ākāshmā gayo na hoy, patnī baḷī na hoy - paṇ tādrashya dekhāy. Ā naṭnī māyā koīnā kaḷyāmā na āve. (Vachanāmṛut Panchāḷā 7)

God has come here (on earth) with the same form that he has in Akshardham, where he resides permanently. He does not pass through the human stages of childhood, youth and old age. He does not disappear forever.1 And the human traits that are seen in him are like the magic of a magician.2 Footnotes: 1. 1. Does not become invisible to the eyes i.e. remains manifest through the God-realized Sadhu. 2. Vachanamrut Panchala-7.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.67

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 67 · Chapter 5 · Verse 67

Amārī to āvardā bāvīs varasthī thaī rahī chhe ne deh paḍavāno to ghāṭ ja nathī, kāraṇ ke āvardāthī deh paḍavāno hoy teno avadhi hoy; paṇ hu to chiranjīvī chhu ne tamārā badhānā deh pānch-das varasmā paḍī jāshe.

My lifespan ran out 22 years ago. And there is no wish for the body to die. Since, the body dies due to age – there is a limit. But I will live forever and all of you will die in five to ten years.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.68

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 68 · Chapter 5 · Verse 68

Nathu Paṭele vāḍīmā pūchhyu je, “Badhethī āsthā tūṭīne ek ṭhekāṇe kem thāy?” Tyāre Swāmīe uttar karyo je, “Tenā jāṇīne badhāne mānavā ne je āpaṇne maḷyā chhe tenī sāthe pativratānī ṭek rākhavī. Āpaṇe e badhānu shu kām chhe? Āpaṇe to deh chhatā jenā bhegā rahyā chhīe te ja teḍavā āvashe, bījā nahi āve ne marīne tenā bhegu rahevu chhe.” Farī pūchhyu je, “Aho! Aho! kem thātu nathī?” Tyāre Swāmīe uttar karyo je, “Chāmaḍānī mashak1 palaḷtī jāy tem pāṇī samātu jāy, tem dhīre dhīre thātu jāy chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Pāṇī bharavānī kothaḷī.

On the farm, Nathu Patel asked, “How can one give up one’s faith from everywhere else and apply it to one place?” Then Swami replied, “Believe every deity to be his form. And be faithful to the one we have attained. What need do we have of the others? For us, the one who we stay with while alive will come to take us (to Akshardham); others will not come. And after death we want to stay with him.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.69

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 69 · Chapter 5 · Verse 69

Jeṭh Vad Navmīne Shanivārnī ardhī rātre Manjībhāīe pūchhyu je, “Satsangmā moṭāī konī samajavī?” Tyāre Swāmīe uttar karyo je, “Āpaṇā satsangmā upāsanā jene vahelī, sulabh, prayās vinā samajāy ne ghaṇāne upāsanā karāve tenī moṭāī chhe.” Te upar vāt karī je, “Parvatbhāīne Rāmānand Swāmī chhatā Mahārājnā darshanthī ja sarvoparī nishchay thaī gayo ne bījāne upāsanānu ṭhekāṇu nahotu; te keṭlāk Bhagwānnī mūrtimā māyā samajatā hatā, ne keṭlāk Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa ne bījā avatār sarakhā samajatā hatā, ne keṭlāk Shrī Kṛuṣhṇane sarvoparī samajatā hatā ne Mahārājnī vāt to thātī ja nahi, tethī barābar samajatā nahi. Shuk, Nāradnā avatār jevā samajatā hatā. Gopāḷānand Swāmīne Mahārājnā darshanthī ja sarvoparī nishchay thayo. Pachhī Māngaroḷmā Swarūpānand Swāmīne Shrī Kṛuṣhṇarūp dekhāṇā ne pachhī Akshardhāmnī samādhi karāvī, tethī Puruṣhottampaṇāno nishchay temane thayo. Ne Muktānand Swāmīne aṭhyāvīs varase Mahārāje bahu vātu karīne nishchay karāvyo.” Ne Mahārājnī karelī vāt karī je, “Muktānand Swāmī ne Gopāḷānand Swāmī sādhu-lakṣhaṇe sarva prakāre moṭā chhe, ne Nityānand Swāmī tathā Brahmānand Swāmī vyavahārik moṭā chhe. Ne koīnī moṭāī kahevī hoy to be-chār jaṇnī bhegī moṭāī kahevī paṇ ekalī kahevī nahi. Nīkar e vātmāthī tamane dukh āvashe.” Muktānand Swāmīnī kahelī vāt karī je, “Muktānand Swāmīne deh mūkavāne āḍo ek mahino rahyo. Tyāre kahyu je, ‘Have māre ātmāmā akhanḍ mūrti dekhāy chhe ne Mahārājne sarvoparī jāṇyā te pahelā āṭalu samajāṇu nahotu.’” Pachhī potānī vāt karī je, “Amane Mahārāje ghaṇī vātu karī chhe te kahevāy em nathī ne kahīe to Prāgjī tathā Shāmjī kahetā fare. Amane Gopāḷānand Swāmīe Puruṣhottampaṇānī vāt karī nathī, ame to Vachanāmṛutmāthī amārī meḷe samajyā chhīe. Te hu tathā Gnānānand Swāmī tathā Vishuddhātmānand Swāmī tathā Bāḷamukundānand Swāmī e chār maḷīne ekānte vātu karatā. Ne bhūt nahi vaḷagyāmā Mahārāje ek potāne gaṇyā ne Muktānand Swāmī tathā Gopāḷānand Swāmī e bene gaṇyā ne bījāne to gaṇyā nahi, paṇ Kṛupānand Swāmī bahu moṭā hatā.” Pachhī vāt karī je, “Chhāvaṇīmā Raghuvīrjī Mahārājne Puruṣhottampaṇānī vāt samajāvī, pachhī Bhāī Swāmīne samajāvī, Munibāvāne samajāvī, Karuṇāshankarne samajāvī,” e vagere ghaṇāknī vātu karī. “Māṭe tame vātu karo te dhīre dhīre Vachanāmṛutnī sākhya lāvīne vāt karajo ne nishchaynī vāt kāḷju tūṭyā jevī chhe, māṭe dhīre dhīre karavī;” e vagere ghaṇīk vātu karī. Tyār pachhī ūbhā thaīne kahe je, “Tamo sarve ā ame kahyu tem samajajo ne tem ja karajo.” Em vārtā karī ane em samajavu je, jene upāsanā tarat samajāī gaī ne ghaṇāne samajāvī e sarvathī moṭā chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Āso Samvat 1864, Ḍabhāṇ. Āṇand jillānā Nabhoī gāmmā Mahārājnā paramahansa Sarveshvarānandjīnī pāse Khushāl Bhaṭṭa (Gopāḷānand Swāmī) vartamān laī Shrījī Mahārājnā āshrit thayā. Sau-pratham Ḍabhāṇmā Mahārājnā darshanthī pūrvanu gnān pragaṭ thayu ane Bhagwānno nishchay te ja kṣhaṇe thaī gayo. [Bhagwān Swāminārāyaṇ: 2/478] 2. Āso Samvat, 1881, Kamiyāḷā. Shrījī Mahārāje Muktānand Swāmīne Rāmānand Swāmīnu swarūp dhāraṇ karī Kālwāṇīmā potānā swarūpnī vāt karī hatī. Te vāt sāmbhaḷī teone shānti to thaī chhatā paṇ koīk vār ashānti rahetī. Tethī Gaḍhpurmā Shrījī Mahārāje temane potānā charitronī vāt be-traṇ divas karī te sāmbhaḷvāthī temane shānti thaī. Temane lāgyu ke Mahārāj ja sākṣhāt Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa chhe. Te bhāvnā kīrtan ‘Māro mat kahu te sāmbhaḷo Vrajvāsī re...’ temaṇe banāvyā. Mahārājne antarmā Swāmī pratye bhāv hato ke Bhagwān meḷavavā temaṇe keṭalo parishram karyo! Parantu jo mārā sarvoparī swarūpnī niṣhṭhā nahī thāy to temano parishram adhūro rahī jashe. Prāptimā fer paḍī jashe. Tethī Gāmaḍī gāmmā Mahārāje potānā swarūpnī vāto karī hatī. Dharamapur jatā paṇ rastāmā vāto karī hatī. Chhatā Swāmīnā antarmā Mahārājnā sarvoparī swarūpnī vāt besatī na hatī. Chhelle Āso Samvat 1881mā jyāre Mahārāje Vartālmā potānī mūrti Harikṛuṣhṇa Mahārājrūpe padharāvī tyāre Swāmīne nishchay thayo ke je swayan Puruṣhottam Nārāyaṇ hoy te ja devne judā rākhīne potānī shuddha upāsanā pravartāvavā potānī mūrtinu sthāpan karī shake. Mahārājnā ā kāryathī temanā antarmā atyant ānand thayo ne mukhmāthī shabdo sarī paḍyā: ‘Māī, me to Puruṣhottam var pāyo...’ [Bhagwān Swāminārāyaṇ: 5/54] 3. Ahī bhūt eṭale indriyo-antahkaraṇ vagere 51 bhūtnu ṭoḷu, jeno ullekh Mahārāje Vachanāmṛut Gaḍhaḍā Madhya 45mā karyo chhe. 4. Chhāvaṇī eṭale ek sthāne bhegā thaī kathā-vārtā karavī; shibir. Āso Samvat 1911, Vartāl, Chaitrī pūnamnā samaiyā pachhī Āchārya Raghuvīrjī Mahārāje Swāmīne Vartāl rahī chha-sāt mās jeṭalī Satsangijīvan granth upar kathā thāy tevī ichchhā darshāvī. Swāmī rājī thaī samaiyā pachhī sāt-āṭh divasmā ja punah Vartāl padhāryā ane ā chhāvaṇī darmyān Guṇātītānand Swāmīe Raghuvīrjī Mahārāj tem ja anya santo-bhaktone uddeshīne Puruṣhottampaṇānī ghaṇī vāto karelī.

One Saturday night (Jeth vad 9), Manajibhai asked, “Who should be considered great in Satsang?” Swami answered, “In our Satsang, whoever understands upāsanā quickly, easily, without effort, and is able to explain it just as well to others is considered great.” On this Swami elaborated, “Parvatbhai understood Maharaj as sarvopari while Ramanand Swami was still present; on the other hand, others had no clue about upāsanā. Some believed God’s murti was characterized with māyā, some understood Maharaj to be equal to Krishna or other avatārs, and some understood Krishna to be supreme and avoided talking about Maharaj. Some even understood Maharaj as an avatār of Shuk or Narad (i.e. bhakta rather than Bhagwan). Gopalanand Swami understood Maharaj to be supreme after having his darshan.1 In Māngarol, Swarupanand Swami saw Maharaj as Krishna and then Maharaj granted him samādhi and he then understood Maharaj as Purushottam (supreme). And Muktanand Swami understood after 28 years (after first meeting Maharaj) only after much explanation2... in this manner, whoever understands upāsanā quickly and is able to explain to others is great.” Then, Swami narrated what Maharaj once said, “Muktanand Swami and Gopalanand Swami are great for possessing saintly characteristics. And Nityanand Swami and Brahmanand Swami are great in a worldly perspective. When describing the greatness of someone, one should speak the greatness of two or four others at the same time, but one should not speak the greatness solely of just one person. Otherwise, one will face misery.” Then, Swami narrated what Muktanand Swami once said, “When only one month was left before Muktanand Swami left his mortal body, he said, ‘Now, I can continuously see the murti in my ātmā. Before I understood Maharaj to be supreme, I never understood this much.’” Then, Swami spoke of himself, “Maharaj has told me a lot, but I cannot reveal all of that. If I do, then Pragji and Shamji would spread it to everyone. Gopalanand Swami did not speak to me about Maharaj’s supremacy. I understood it myself from the Vachanamrut. Gnananand Swami, Vishuddhatmanand Swami, Balmukund Swami, and I would get together and discuss this privately. And Maharaj said only he would not be possessed by ghosts. Then, he said Gopalanand Swami and Muktanand Swami would not be possessed by a ghost,3 but he did not count anyone else. Krupanand Swami was really great.” Then, Swami said, “During the chhāvani,4 [I] explained the supremacy of Maharaj to Raghuvirji Maharaj. Then, I explained it to Bhai Swami (Atmanand Swami), to Muni Bawa, and Karunashankar.” Swami talked a great deal regarding this. Then, he said, “Therefore, when you speak, speak based on the words of the Vachanamrut. And the talks of nishchay (conviction of Maharaj’s supremacy) is like breaking one’s heart (difficult to digest). So, explain it gradually.” Then, Swami got up and said, “All of you, understand as I have said and do as I said.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Aso Samvat 1864, Dabhan. Khushal Bhatt (Gopalanand Swami) took vartamān from Shriji Maharaj’s paramhansa Sarveshwaranand Swami (from Nabhoi village in Anand district) and entered into Satsang. Gopalanand Swami had the first darshan of Maharaj in the yagna of Dabhan and he realized Maharaj was supreme. [Bhagwan Swaminarayan: 2/478] 2. Aso Samvat 1881, Kamiyala. Shriji Maharaj assumed the form of Ramanand Swami in Kalwani and talked to Muktanand Swami, revealing his form. Muktanand Swami felt some peace, but sometimes he felt some turmoil (due to doubts about Shriji Maharaj’s true form). Therefore, Maharaj spoke to Muktanand Swami in Gadhada about his divine actions and incidents for two to three days. Muktanand Swami felt peace again and realized that Maharaj is the manifest form of Krishna Bhagwan. Therefore, he wrote kirtans proclaiming Maharaj to be Krishna, such as ‘Māro mat kahu te sāmbhalo Vrajvāsi re...’ Maharaj had affection for Muktanand Swami because he had endeavored and sacrificed much to attain God. However, if he did not understand Maharaj to be supreme, his efforts would be in vain. Therefore, in Gamadi village, Maharaj spoke to Muktanand Swami again about his supremacy. On the way to Dharampur, he spoke to Muktanand Swami again. Nevertheless, Muktanand Swami’s heart did not accept Maharaj as supreme. Ultimately, in 1881, Maharaj installed his own murti as Harikrishna Maharaj in Vartal. Muktanand Swami understood that only a supreme entity would install his own murti that is different from the murtis of other deities. Finally, Swami felt bliss and wrote: ‘Māi, me to Purushottam var pāyo...’ [Bhagwan Swaminarayan: 5/54] 3. Here, ‘ghosts’ refers to the indriyas, antahkaran, etc. equaling 51 elements as mentioned by Maharaj in Vachanamrut Gadhada II-45. 4. ‘Chhāvani’ is a shibir where spiritual discourses are held. This particular chhāvani refers to the time when, after the samaiyo of Chaitra Punam in Aso Samvat 1881, Raghuvirji Maharaj requested Gunatitanand Swami to stay in Vartal and discourse on the Satsangijivan for six to seven months. Swami happily complied and spoke on the supremacy of Shriji Maharaj. One such talk is recorded in Swamini Vat 3/19.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.70

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 70 · Chapter 5 · Verse 70

Jeṭh Vad Dashamne divase savārmā sabhāmā vāt karī je, “Āpaṇī upāsanāthī moṭāī chhe ne dharmamāthī laḍthaḍe ke bījā sādhanmāthī laḍthaḍe paṇ upāsanā draḍh hoy to jīv laḍthaḍe nahi.” Te upar vāt karī je, “Indrane chār brahmahatyā thaī hatī paṇ Nāradjīnā kahyāthī pragaṭ Vāmanjīnī upāsanānā baḷthī ṭaḷī gaī. Bījī vāt karī je, Pānḍav chhānā rahetā hatā ne Virāṭ Rājānī sāthe Kaurav yuddha karavā āvyā te yuddhamā Arjune bāṇ mūkī badhā lashkarne chānllā karyā, tethī Arjunne oḷakhyā. Tem āhī paṇ em oḷakhavu je, jenāthī ghaṇā māṇasne upāsanānī draḍhatā thaī ane pancha-viṣhayno abhāv thayo tene moṭā samajavā.”

In the assembly on the morning of Jeth vad 10, Swami said, “Our greatness is due to upāsanā. And even if one falters in observing dharma or other spiritual endeavors, if upāsanā is firm, the jiva will not flounder.” On this he said, “Indra incurred the sin of four Brahmicides, but, on instruction from Naradji, the strength of his upāsanā towards the manifest form of Vamanji helped him to become free of that sin.” Then he said, “The Pandavs were in hiding and the Kauravs came to fight with King Virat. In the fight, Arjun shot very powerful arrows and decimated the whole army. Thus, Arjun was identified. Similarly, here also, understand that one by whom many have developed a firm conviction in upāsanā and a dislike for the sense pleasures is great.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.71

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 71 · Chapter 5 · Verse 71

Rātre vāt karī je, “Gopāḷ Swāmī bahu vātu karatā, tethī māre het hatu.”

At night, Swami said, “Gopal Swami discoursed quite a lot, therefore, I had affection for him.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.72

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 72 · Chapter 5 · Verse 72

“Vāsanā chhe te jaṭharāgnithī baḷatī nathī, bāhya agnithī baḷatī nathī, pralaykāḷnā agnithī baḷatī nathī, jem pṛuthvīmā bīj chhe te agni lāge chhe to paṇ baḷatā nathī, pāchhā ūge chhe. Ne te bījne tāvaḍīmā shekīe to ūge nahi. Tem vāsanā bījā agnithī baḷatī nathī, paṇ gnānrūp agnithī baḷe chhe, te gnānrūp agni te shu je, Bhagwānnī upāsanā ne Bhagwānnī āgnā tethī vāsanāling kāraṇ dehno nāsh thāy chhe, bījā koī sādhanthī nāsh thato nathī.” Ne keṭalī vāsanā baḷī chhe ne keṭalī bākī chhe te uparthī Shukmuninī kahelī vāt karī je, “Āgnā paḷe chhe eṭalī vāsanā baḷe chhe. Ne āgnāmā to niyam āvyā paṇ Shikṣhāpatrīmā āgnā karī chhe te pramāṇe pāḷyāthī vāsanā baḷe, te āgnā kaī? To Nijātmānam brahmarūpam e āgnā paḷe to kāraṇ dehno nāsh thāy chhe; paṇ ‘Shikṣhāpatrī’ barābar paḷatī nathī teṭalī khoṭya chhe ne teṭalu dukh chhe.”

“The digestive fire does not burn desires. They are neither burnt by external fire nor by the fire at the time of dissolution. Seeds in the earth are not affected by fire and so sprout again, but if these seeds are roasted in a pan, then they will not grow; similarly, desires are not burnt by any type of fire but are burnt by fire in the form of spiritual knowledge. And what is this fire in the form of spiritual knowledge? It is that, by the upāsanā of God and by obeying his commands, the desire-dependent causal body is destroyed, but it is not destroyed by any other endeavour.” On the topic of how many desires have been destroyed and how many remain, Swami narrated what Shukmuni had said, “The extent to which commands are followed is the extent to which desires are destroyed. And commands include codes of conduct, but by following the instruction in the Shikshapatri, desires are destroyed. Which instruction? That of ‘Nijātmānam brahmarupam’1 – if this instruction is followed, the causal body is destroyed. But the Shikshapatri is not observed properly – that is the extent of deficiency and misery.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Shikshapatri 116: Identifying one’s self with Brahman, separate from the three bodies (gross, subtle and causal), one should offer devotion to God. (chp 29, vat 17, footnote 3, p. 182.)

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.73

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 73 · Chapter 5 · Verse 73

“Dharmaniyammā fer paḍe to teno danḍ thāy ne upāsanāmā fer paḍe to prāptimā fer paḍe. Jem koīne dharmamā fer paḍe chhe to prāyashchitta karāve chhe ne vaṭalī jāy chhe to nātyabārya kāḍhe chhe, tem upāsanānu chhe. Upāsanāmā kasar hoy to bījā sukhnī to prāpti thāy paṇ garbhavāsnu dukh ṭaḷe nahi, ne upāsanāthī ne ātmaniṣhṭhāthī garbhavās ṭaḷī jāy chhe. Māṭe upāsanā, ātmaniṣhṭhā, vairāgya, dharma ne sang sarve ange bhakti karavī.” Pachhī Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Ā sarvamāthī adhik kayu sādhan chhe?” Tyāre Swāmīe kahyu je, “Sang sarvathī adhik chhe, ne sang to badhāyno kahevāy paṇ jem loḍhu, bhegvāḷu1 sonu ne shodhelu2 shuddha sonu e sarve dhātu kahevāy paṇ fer ghaṇo chhe, tem sangmā fer ghaṇo chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Bheḷseḷvāḷu. 2. Shuddha karelu.

“If there is a lapse in observing the spiritual and moral codes of conduct, one is punished. If there is a lapse in upāsanā, one’s final moksha is affected. Just as, if one lapses in dharma, atonement is enforced; and if someone falters in observing the rules of his community, he is made an outcast – the same is true of upāsanā. If there is deficiency in upāsanā, then other worldly pleasures are attained but the misery of rebirth is not overcome. By upāsanā and ātmā-realization, rebirth is banished. Therefore, offer devotion along with upāsanā, ātmā-realization, detachment, dharma and close association with a true guru.” Then Harishankarbhai asked, “Which of all these endeavours is the greatest?” Then Swami replied, “Close association with the God-realized Sadhu is the best of all. And true association can be said to be of importance for everyone. But just as there is a difference between metal, impure gold and pure gold, even though all are metals, similarly, there is much difference in association with different sadhus.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.74

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 74 · Chapter 5 · Verse 74

Bhogāvāne kāṭhe taḍake besīne ḍhūnḍhiyo tap karato hoy te narke jāy ne haribhakta gṛuhasthāshrammā hoy teno mokṣha thāy.

A naked ascetic who performs penance on the banks of Bhogāvā river will go to narak; whereas, a haribhakta, who may be a householder, will be liberated (because he has the refuge of God).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.75

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 75 · Chapter 5 · Verse 75

Gāndhārī1 ānkhye pāṭā bāndhī rākhatī to paṇ te satī na kahevāṇī ne Kuntājīne kuvārā putra thayo hato ne Draupadīne pānch puruṣh hatā to paṇ satiyu kahevāṇiyu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Dhṛutrāṣhṭranī patnī, so Kauravonī mātā. Dhṛutrāṣhṭra andh hoī te paṇ ākhe pāṭā bāndhī rākhatī.

Gāndhārī kept her eyes blindfolded; yet she was not identified as a sati (chaste wife). On the other hand, Kuntāji had a son while she was not married and Draupadi had five husbands and they were still identified as satis (because they had the refuge and faith in Krishna).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.76

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 76 · Chapter 5 · Verse 76

Vālīne bhāīnī strī rākhyā bābat māryo ne vaḷī bhakta kahevāṇo tethī teno mokṣh karyo.

Vāli kept his brother’s wife; therefore he was killed (by Ram). However, he was still a devotee, so God liberated him.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.77

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 77 · Chapter 5 · Verse 77

Vyāvahārik māṇasnī ne satsangīnī kriyā sarakhī chhe, paṇ satsangī Bhagwānnā kahevāṇā tethī mokṣha thāy chhe.

The activities of a worldly man and a satsangi are the same. But satsangis are said to belong to God, so they attain moksha.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.78

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 78 · Chapter 5 · Verse 78

Pachās hajār rūpiyā maḷe to Bhagwān bhajavāno swapnamā paṇ ghāṭ thāy nahi, ne rūpiyā maḷe to te maḍadu fūlyā1 jevu chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Mithyā ghamanḍmā rāchavu, fogaṭnu.

If one gets fifty thousand rupees, one would not, even in one’s dreams, think of worshipping God. The acquisition of money is like an inflated corpse (it implies deceptive growth).1 Footnotes: 1. 1. To become bloated with false ego.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.79

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 79 · Chapter 5 · Verse 79

Āpaṇā satsangnī rīt samajavī je, satsangmā Rāmānand Swāmī, Muktānand Swāmī, Nityānand Swāmī, Brahmānand Swāmī, Gopāḷānand Swāmī ādi keṭlāk sādhu ne keṭlāk haribhakta moṭerā thaī gayā, temane laīne amārī moṭāī kahevī, ne te vinā kahesho to amārī apkīrti karāvasho, ne e sarve moṭā hatā, manuṣhya jevā na kahevāy ne e na hot to āpaṇne satsang paṇ kyāthī thāt? E sarve moṭā chhe, māṭe emane laīne amārī moṭāī kahevī tathā Bhagwān jevā kahevā.

We should understand the ways of our satsang. In our satsang, Ramanand Swami, Muktanand Swami, Nityanand Swami, Brahmanand Swami, Gopalanand Swami, and many others were great. When speaking of our (my) greatness, do so based on the support of their greatness. If you only speak of my greatness, then that will lead to disrepute. They were all great and cannot be called ordinary men. If they were not present, how would we have come into satsang? So, my greatness should be spoken based on the support of their greatness and they should be spoken of as having qualities similar to God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.80

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 80 · Chapter 5 · Verse 80

Dhyānī, premī e sarvathī gnānī shreṣhṭh, premī keṭlāk jātā rahyā, tyāgī jātā rahyā, dhyānī jātā rahyā, evā keṭlāk angvāḷā jātā rahyā ne jeṇe Moṭā sādhu sāthe jīv bāndhelā te ṭakyā.

Among one who meditates and one who has immense affection, the best is one who has gnān. Many with affection left. Many with firm renunciation left. Many who meditated left. Such devotees possessing various types of inclinations left, but those who attached their jiva to a Mota Sadhu remained.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.81

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 81 · Chapter 5 · Verse 81

Desh-kāḷ joīne vichārīne vāt karavī, premne raste chālavu nahi. Te upar potānī vāt karī je, mārāmā bahu prem hato tethī Prāgjīnī peṭhe vāt karyā vinā rahevāy nahi. Te uparthī Kṛupānand Swāmī kahetā je, “Tamane to guru karashu.” Tyāre me kahyu je, “Māro sho vānk chhe?” Tyāre Kṛupānand Swāmīe kahyu je, “Tamārā lakṣhaṇ guru thāo tevā chhe, āṭalī vātu kare, āṭalī sevā kare, āṭalu bhajan kare te guru thayā vinā kem rahe?” Pachhī keṭlek divase Mahārāje mune bolāvīne sarvenī āgaḷ Muktānand Swāmīnā khoḷāmā besārīne kahyu je, “Āpaṇe jīvunā kalyāṇ arthe āvyā chhīe, māṭe manḍaḷ bāndhī vātu karo ne sādhu to pānch rākhīe.” Pachhī me kahyu je, “Mahārāj, mārāthī manḍaḷ kem chāle?” Tyāre Mahārāj kahe je, “Sādhu to das rākhīe, pachchīs rākhīe,” em kahyu; tyāre hu to bolato rahī gayo paṇ Mahārāje gaṇatā gaṇatā chhevaṭe traṇase sādhu sudhī rākhavānī vāt karī; ne mane je āgnā kare temā vichāru ne Ātmānand Swāmī, Kṛupānand Swāmī, Gopāḷānand Swāmī tatkāḷ mānī le ne temane vachannā adhdhar zīlnārā kahyā chhe. E vagere ghaṇīk vāt karī ne te upar Madhya Prakaraṇnu Aḍatāḷīshmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne kahyu je, deh dharīne sādhunā bheḷu rahevu.

First think about the place and time and then talk. Do not walk the path of affection. Then Swami talked about himself, “I had a lot of affection, so I could not stay without talking just like Pragji.” On hearing this, Krupanand Swami used to say, “We will make you a guru.” So, I said, “What is my fault?” Then Krupanand Swami said, “Your qualities are such that you will become a guru. How can one who gives so many discourses, does so much service, and offers so much devotion remain without becoming a guru?” Then after a few days, Maharaj called me, made me sit in Muktanand Swami’s lap and said, “We have come to redeem the jivas, so form a group of five sadhus and deliver discourses.” Then I said, “Maharaj, how can I run a group.” Then Maharaj said, “Keep ten sadhus, keep twenty-five.” At that time I did not say anything but Maharaj continued counting and eventually talked about keeping three hundred sadhus. And whatever commands I was given, I thought about them and then did, but, Atmanand Swami, Krupanand Swami, Gopalanand Swami would instantly obey his commands.” So they are known for their instantaneous obedience. This and many other talks were delivered. Based on this, Vachanamrut Gadhada II-48 was read and then Swami said, “After taking birth it is better to live among sadhus.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.82

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 82 · Chapter 5 · Verse 82

Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Vachan pāḷavu temā sarve sarakhā vachan samajavā ke tāratmyapaṇu1 samajavu?” Tyāre Swāmīe kahyu je, “Tāratmyapaṇu chhe. Vichār karīne āgnā pāḷavī.” Te upar draṣhṭānt dīdhā je, “Pratham Mahārāje em āgnā karī hatī je gaugrās,2 shvānbhāg3 vagere kāḍhyā vinā jamavu nahi, te uparthī keṭlāk sādhu babe, chār-chār lāḍavā haribhaktanā bagāḍvā mānḍyā ne keṭlāke e pramāṇe na karyu tethī Rāmdāsjībhāī vagere rājī thayā.” Bīju draṣhṭānt, “Pratham Mahārāje evī āgnā karelī je, laghushankā karīne koī āve to sarvene ūbhā thāvu. Te Jetalpurmā ame hatā tyā ek sādhu laghushankā karīne āvyā ne amārāthī ūbhā na thavāṇu tethī amāro tiraskār karyo, temāthī te sādhu gānḍā thaīne jātā rahyā.” Trīju draṣhṭānt, “Mahārāje ghoḍīne pāvānu miṣh4 laīne sarve sādhunu charaṇāmṛut karī mangāvyu paṇ Nityānand Swāmīe charaṇāmṛut na karī āpyu ne bījāe karī āpyu, te Mahārāj pī gayā tethī badhāyne āgnā vichār vinā pāḷavāthī pastāvo thayo ne Nityānand Swāmīne na thayo, em āgnāmā tāratmyapaṇu chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Nyūn-adhikpaṇu, vivek. 2. Jamavāmāthī gāy māṭe amuk bhāg rākhavo. 3. Kūtarā māṭeno bhāg. 4. Nimitta.

Harishankarbhai asked, “In following the commands of God, should all commands be equally followed or should there be judgement of distinction among the commands?” Swami answered, “There is some distinction. One should use judgement when following commands.” On that, Swami explained, “In the beginning, Maharaj gave a command to save a portion of meals for cows and dogs before eating. Some sadhus wasted two to four lāddus made by devotees to follow that command. Some wise sadhus did not follow this command strictly; therefore, Ramdasjibhai and other devotees were pleased.” Swami gave another example, “Maharaj had also commanded that, if someone came back after discharging their bowels, one should stand up. We were in Jetalpur once, where a sadhu came after discharging his bowels and we did not get up. That sadhu developed an aversion toward us and became mad as a result and left.” Swami gave a third example, “Maharaj asked the sadhus to wash their feet and save the charanāmrut (water drained after washing the feet) and give it to him on the pretext of giving it to his horse to drink. Everyone gave the charanāmrut except Nityanand Swami. Maharaj himself drank the charanāmrut of the sadhus instead of giving it to his horse; therefore, the sadhus regretted giving it to Maharaj, whereas Nityanand Swami had no regret. Thus, one should use judgement in following commands.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.83

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 83 · Chapter 5 · Verse 83

Satsang, ekāntikpaṇu ne Bhagwānnī mūrti e traṇ vānā durlabh chhe, te āpaṇne maḷyā chhe, māṭe garīb thaīne bījāne mān āpīne sāchavī rākhavā.

Satsang, the God-realized state and the murti of God – all three are rare. But we have attained them. Therefore, be humble, honour others and preserve them.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.84

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 84 · Chapter 5 · Verse 84

Garīb thavānī rīt batāvī je, ek gāmmā be vāṇiyā be bhāī hatā. Te bannenī pāse chintāmaṇiyu be hatī. Te rājāne khabar paḍavāthī rājāe lashkar mokalī vāṇiyāne jītīne chintāmaṇi ek bhāī pāsethī laī līdhī, pachhī bījo bhāī hato te garīb thaī fāṭelā chīntharā paherī bheṭmā chintāmaṇi rākhī māgī khāto, garīb thaīne nīkaḷī gayo to chintāmaṇi rahī. Tem āpaṇe garīb thaīne chintāmaṇi sāchavī rākhavī.

We should become humble to preserve what we have. In a village, there lived two Vania brothers. Both of them had a chintāmani each. When the king found out he sent his army, which defeated one of the brothers and took away his chintāmani. The other brother was clever. He wore torn clothes like a pauper, begged for his food and hid the chintāmani. Thus, he pretended to be poor and left the kingdom, keeping the chintāmani. Similarly, we should become meek and preserve the chintāmani in the form of God and his holy Sadhu.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.85

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 85 · Chapter 5 · Verse 85

Satsangthī Bhagwān vash thāy chhe tevā koī sādhanthī thatā nathī. Te satsang shu je, pragaṭ Bhagwān ne pragaṭ ā Sādhuno āsharo karyāthī kalyāṇ thāy chhe. Ne parokṣh kathā-kīrtan, vārtā ne archāthī kalyāṇ thāy em lakhyu chhe te to jīvne ālamban dīdhu chhe.

The way God is won over by satsang, he is not won by any other means. What is that satsang? It is the refuge of the manifest form of God and this manifest Sadhu - from that one is liberated. And it is written that one is liberated by listening to discourses, singing kirtans, annointing God, and other means that are related to the non-manifest form of God, but that is to give consolation to the jiva.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.86

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 86 · Chapter 5 · Verse 86

“Ekane antarno kajiyo thāy chhe ne ekane nathī thato tenu kem samajavu?” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Gharmā sāp hoy te undar khāvā maḷatā hoy tyā sudhī khīje nahi; ne undarne kāḍhī mūkīe to gharnā bījā sarvene karaḍī khāy. Tem man tathā indriyunā kahyā pramāṇe chāle to kajiyo na thāy ne tene maraḍīne chāle to kajiyo thāy chhe.”

One is troubled by internal agitation and another is not – how should this be understood? Then Swami answered, “If there is a snake in the house, then as long as it gets mice to eat, it does not harm others. But if the mice are driven away, then it will bite everyone else in the house. Similarly, if one allows oneself to be dictated by the mind and senses i.e. one indulges in sense pleasures, then there is no problem, but if they are denied their wishes, then there is agitation since the mind and senses are denied worldly pleasures.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.87

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 87 · Chapter 5 · Verse 87

Mahuvānā haribhakte pūchhyu je, “Pūro satsang thayo kem samajavo?” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Akṣharrūp thavāy tyāre pūro satsang thayo samajavo.” Vaḷī, farī pūchhyu je, “Akṣharrūp thayu kem jaṇāy?” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Gṛuhasthne agiyār niyam ne tyāgīne traṇ granth eṭalu pāḷe te Akṣharrūp thayā jāṇavā.”

“How can one know that qualities like those of Akshar have been attained?” Then Swami replied, “If householders observe the eleven codes of conduct1 and renunciants observe the three scriptures,2 then one is known as having qualities like that of Akshar.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Eleven codes of conduct for householders: (1) Non-violence (2) Not to commit adultery (3) Not to eat meat (4) Not to drink alcohol (5) Not to touch widows (6) Not to commit suicide (7) Not to steal (8) Not to level false charges (9) Not to speak ill of or abuse any deities (10) Not to eat onions, garlic and other inedibles (11) Not to listen to even religious discourses from people who oppose God and God-realized Sadhus 2. Shikshapatri, Nishkam Shuddhi, and Dharmamrut

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.88

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 88 · Chapter 5 · Verse 88

Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Pravṛutti mārgmā deh dharyo chhe ne pravṛuttithī akaḷāmaṇ āve chhe te kem pār paḍashe?” Tyāre Swāmīe kahyu je, “Have shu pār paḍavu bākī rahyu chhe? Pār paḍī chūkyu chhe ne pravṛutti ṭaḷī gaī chhe ne aradhu to pār paḍyu chhe ne pravṛutti chhe te sārī chhe, nīkar kyāīnu kyāī jātu rahevāt ne pūrvano sanskār bhāre chhe ne pravṛuttimā keṭluk ṭhīk chhe.” Vaḷī farī pūchhyu je, “Pūrvano sanskār chhe tyāre hamaṇā kem satsang thayo?” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Jog thāy tyāre bīj ūge ne pāṇīno jog thayā vinā bīj saras hoy paṇ ūge nahi.”

Harishankarbhai asked, “We have taken birth on the path of pravrutti, yet pravrutti causes perplexity. How can we make it through?” Swami answered, “Now what do we have to make it through? We have already made it through and there is no pravrutti for us. We have made it through half way and the pravrutti that remains is good. Otherwise, we would leave and go elsewhere. Since we have great sanskār from previous births, we are stable in our pravrutti.” Swami was asked in turn, “If we have great sanskārs from previous birth, why did we gain satsang now?” Swami answered, “When there is association (of water), the seed sprouts. Without water, even if the seed is great, it will not grow.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.89

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 89 · Chapter 5 · Verse 89

Vartālnu Pahelu Vachanāmṛut ne Madhyanu Chaudmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne vāt karī je, “Ā pramāṇe samaje to gṛuhasth tathā tyāgīne barobar gati chhe, te tyāgīnu bahu shobhe ne Parvatbhāī jevā gṛuhasthne sāt chhokarā hoy tenu shobhe nahi, paṇ te to Mahārājne shikhāmaṇ detā evā hatā.”

After reading Vachanamrut Vartal-1 and Vachanamrut Gadhada II-14, Swami said, “If one understands like this, then a householder and a renunciant attain the same (Akshardham). And a renunciant may stand out while a householder, like Parvatbhai, may not stand out. But he was such that he could advise Maharaj.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.90

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 90 · Chapter 5 · Verse 90

Kāriyāṇīnu Āṭhmu Vachanāmṛut ne Madhyanu Sattarmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvī vāt karī je, “Ā pramāṇe samajavānu chhe te rahī gayu ne īṭo, patharā, lākaḍā, rūpiyā ne māṇas tene bhāme1 chaḍī javāṇu chhe. Ne ame to ā havelī ūkheḷī temā bahu akaḷātā ke kyāre pūrī thāshe ne vātu karashu? Ne deh paḍī jāshe to vātu karavī rahī jāshe. Ne māre to em thāy chhe je, kūbāmā2 besīne dāṇā bhegā karīne badhī pṛuthvīnā māṇasne vātu karu, ne Trikamdās chhatya jaḍāve chhe ne rang chaḍāve chhe ne Badrikāshramvāḷā tathā Shvetdvīpvāḷā tathā Akṣhardhāmvāḷā tathā Govardhanbhāī kāī gānḍā chhe te vīs hajār korī bagāḍī nākhī! Ne Muktānand Swāmīe Mahārājne kahyu je, ‘Govardhanbhāīnu bahu bhūnḍu thayu.’ Tyāre Mahārāj kahe je, ‘Samaloṣhṭāshmakānchanah3 thayu te bahu bhūnḍu thayu?’ Tyāre Muktānand Swāmī samajyā.” Em vāt karīne kahyu je, “Ā be Vachanāmṛut pramāṇe samaje to paṇ āhī beṭhā Akṣhardhām dekhe nahi, paṇ Akṣhardhāmnā pati dekhāṇā eṭale Akṣhardhām to bhegu ja āvī gayu ne! Ā mūrti maḷī chhe tenā sāmu joī rahevu ne dhroḍī dhroḍīne gher javāy chhe te to abhyās paḍī gayo chhe, jem afīṇnu bandhāṇ paḍe tem.” Em vāt karīne ‘Rāje Gaḍhapur Mahārāj’ kīrtan gavarāvyu ne Uddhavjī tathā Gopiyunī vāt karī ne pragaṭ swarūpnā gnānīne adhik kahyo ne Prathamnā Ekotarnā Vachanāmṛutnī vāt karī je, “Pragaṭ vāt karyā vinā em samajāy chhe je, Badrikāshrammā, Shvetdvīpmā tathā Golokmā Bhagwān chhe ne thoḍāk āhī chhe paṇ sarvoparī Bhagwān āhī samajātā nathī. Māṭe pragaṭ vāt karīe chhīe ne āvo samāgam maḷyo ne aho aho thātu nathī tathā gānḍā thavātu nathī te to Bhagwāne jīvnā kalyāṇne arthe em rākhyu chhe. Nīkar gānḍā thaī javāy. “Matya dīdhe māne nahi, kumatye man koḷāya; Āvel avaḷe akṣhare, te savaḷe kem sohāya.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhagwānnā sambandh vagarnī anya pravṛuttinā chakarāve. 2. Ghumaṭvāḷā ghāsnā zūpaḍāmā. 3. Artha: sukh-dukhne samān samaje chhe, māṭī, paththar tathā sonu jene samān chhe tathā priya ane apriyamā, nindā ane stutimā, mān ane apamānmā je samchittasthir rahe chhe te Guṇātīt kahevāy chhe. (Gītā: 14/24)

After asking someone to read Vachanamruts Kariyani-8 and Gadhada II-17, Swami said, “That one has to understand like this has been forgotten. We have become trapped in the cycle of bricks, stones, wood, money and men (i.e. building activities, etc.). I was disappointed when the building of this mansion was started and thought about when it will finish and when I will be able to deliver talks? Since, if this body perishes, the talks will remain undelivered. I feel that I should sit in a hut, collect some grains and talk to all the people of the world. But Trikamdas is having a ceiling built and painted; and are those liberated souls of Badrikashram, Shvetdwip and Akshardham, and Govardhanbhai so foolish as to waste twenty thousand koris? Muktanand Swami said to Maharaj, “It’s bad about what happened to Govardhanbhai.” Then Maharaj said, “He has attained the state of Sama-loshtāshma-kānchanah.1 Is that very bad?” Then Muktanand Swami understood. After narrating this, he said, “Even if one understands as per these two Vachanamruts, then still one cannot see Akshardham while seated here. But that is not a deficiency, since, seeing the Lord of Akshardham means that Akshardham has certainly been included (in that vision). So, keep looking at this murti that has been attained. But one repeatedly goes back home because it has become a habit, just as one becomes addicted to opium.” After talking in this way, Swami had the kirtan ‘Rāje Gadhpur Mahārāj’ sung. Swami talked about Uddhavji and the Gopis, and that one knowledgeable about the present manifest form is described as the best of all. Maharaj has said in Vachanamrut Gadhada I-71 that without talking about the manifest form, people think that God exists only in Badrikashram, Shvetdwip and Golok and not here. But the supreme God manifest here is not understood. Therefore, we talk about manifest God. That such association has been attained (with the supreme God in human form) and yet one does not feel intense joy and does not go mad has been kept that way by God for the redemption of the jiva. Otherwise one would go mad. Matya didhe māne nahi, kumatye man kolāy; Āvel avle akshare, te savle kem sohāy.2 Footnotes: 1. 1. Gordhanbhai, a resident of Mangrol (district: Junagadh, Saurashtra), was a spiritually enlightened devotee of Bhagwan Swaminarayan. He was a businessman, and when someone took anything from his shop on credit, he noted it by writing, for example, “10 kg sugar – On the account of Swaminarayan.” In this way, he incurred a loss of 20,000 koris (18th century currency). When Muktanand Swami found out about this carefree approach, he told Maharaj. Then, Maharaj quoted this shlok to describe Gordhanbhai’s elevated spiritual state. “Sama loshtāshma-kānchanah...” – He who regards a lump of earth, a stone and (a piece of) gold as equal is said to be gunātit. - Bhagwad Gita 14/24 2. There are many wretched people who do not accept helpful advice, since their mind is clouded with evil. Such people are born with perverted thoughts, so how can they have good thoughts?

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.91

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 91 · Chapter 5 · Verse 91

Gonḍalmā garāsiyā Haṭhībhāīe Muktānand Swāmīnī vātu bār divas sāmbhaḷī te shalya pesī gayā paṇ rājā ne javān tethī satsang thayo nahi; pachhī bār varase satsang potānī meḷe karyo.

In Gondal, the landowner Hathibhai listened to Mukantand Swami’s talks for twelve days; therefore, the thorns (in the form of Swami’s words) pricked him. However, he was young and a king, so he did not practice satsang right away. But after twelve years, he himself started to practice satsang on his own.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.92

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 92 · Chapter 5 · Verse 92

Avidyāne badhī tarehthī Mahārāje dābī te ḍoshiyunu rūp laīne Gaḍhaḍāmā āvīyu, te Devānand Swāmī sanyāsīe dīṭhī. Te Mahārāj Gaḍhaḍāmā rahyā tyā sudhī kajiyā maṭyā nahi.

Maharaj suppressed avidyā (māyā) in every way, so it came to Gadhada in the form of women. Devanand Swami observed this. As long as Maharaj stayed in Gadhada, quarrels never ended.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.93

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 93 · Chapter 5 · Verse 93

“Bhagwānnu swarūp na oḷakhāy e ja māyā chhe.” Pachhī Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Koīne kāne shabda paḍe tethī nishchay thāy chhe tenu shu kāraṇ?” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Sanskār chhe. Nīkar bhegā rahe chhe to paṇ nathī oḷakhātā ne ā Sādhu Bhagwānnu ang chhe, vibhūti chhe to paṇ Jūnāgaḍhmā māṇase māṇase bhikṣhā māge chhe ne darshan dye chhe, nathī oḷakhātā te Jādav jevā abhāgiyā chhe.”

Not being able to recognize the manifest human form of God is itself māyā. Then Harishankarbhai asked, “For some, just by listening to some discourses, conviction develops. What is the reason for this?” Then Swami replied, “That is due to the meritorious impressions of his past births. Otherwise, some stay together and still do not recognize him. And this Sadhu is a part and parcel of God, is great, yet he begs for alms from every house in Junagadh and gives darshan. Those who do not recognize him are unfortunate like the Yadavs (who never recognized the divinity of Bhagwan Shri Krishna).”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.94

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 94 · Chapter 5 · Verse 94

Koīk manuṣhyamā shāntpaṇu hoy ne koīkmā na hoy, koīkne vinay karatā āvaḍe ne koīkne na āvaḍe. E sarve dehnā bhāv samajavā, ne moṭāī to pragaṭ Bhagwānnā nishchay vaḍe chhe ne kāgaḷmā lakhe chhe eṭalā sarve guṇ to Bhagwānmā ja hoy, bījāmā na hoy.

Some people have a quiet nature and some do not; some know how to show respect and some do not. All these should be understood as characteristics of the body. Greatness is due to firm faith in the manifest form of God and all the qualities described in the scriptures are found only in God, not anyone else.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.95

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 95 · Chapter 5 · Verse 95

“Gnānīne ātmā kahyo chhe, māṭe Bhagwānne jīv arpaṇ karī devo. Jem kahe tem ja karavu.” Pachhī Manjībhāīe pūchhyu je, “Jīv arpaṇ karyā pachhī vāsanā ṭāḷavī rahe chhe ke nahi?” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Vāsanā ṭāḷavī paḍe; ne em uttar na karīe to Bhagwānmā bādh āve je, ekanī vāsanā ṭāḷe ne ekanī na ṭāḷe, māṭe em kahevāy nahi, ne ātmaniṣhṭhā tathā māhātmye karīne vāsanā ṭaḷe chhe.”

“The gnāni is referred to the ātmā of God. Therefore, one should offer their jiva to God and do as God says.” Then, Manjibhai asked, “After offering one’s jiva to God, does one need to destroy their vāsanā?” Swami answered, “Vāsanā has to be eradicated. If that is not how we answer, then one would fault God for destroying one’s vāsanā and not another’s. But that is not the case. Vāsanā can be eradicated by ātma-nishthā and understanding God’s greatness.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.96

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 96 · Chapter 5 · Verse 96

Manjībhāīe pūchhyu je, “Gnānī hoy to paṇ kāī vāsanā rahetī hashe?” Swāmī kahe, “Shukjī ūḍyā ne Janakthī ūḍāṇu nahi,1 ne bek2 pravṛuttino jog rahe tyā sudhī jaṇāy kharī; jem ame tyāgī thayā tevā samāmā gām, nadī badhu dekhātu māṭe e kāī vāsanā hatī? E to joge karīne dekhātu. Ne vīs varas thayā pachhī chheṭu paḍyu eṭale dekhāṇu nahi. Tem pravṛuttimā gnān vṛuddhi pāme, antahkaraṇ shuddha thāy paṇ joge karīne indriyonī shuddhi thātī nathī.” Pachhī Nathu Paṭele pūchhyu je,:Prāptimā fer chhe ke nahi?” Swāmī kahe, “Prāptimā fer nathī, barābar chhe. Ne nivṛuttivāḷāne eṭalo adhik na kahīe to tame māno paṇ bījā māne nahi; māṭe em uttar karavo paḍe, paṇ Bhagwān to chāy tem kare, teno koī dhaṇī chhe? Ne uttar to thāto hoy tem thāy.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Swāmī Shukjī ne Janaknā draṣhṭāntthī nivṛuttimārg ne pravṛuttimārg vachcheno bhed darshāve chhe. Mahābhārat kahe chhe ke Shukjī sadehe lokonā dekhtā ākāshmārge sūrya lokmā praveshyā hatā. Janakne māṭe ā ashakya hatu. 2. Bahudhā.

Manjibhai asked, “If one is a gnāni, does he still have vāsanā remain?” Swami said, “Shukji flew in the air but Janak could not.1 As long as one is involved with a lot of pravrutti, it may seem vāsanā remains. When I first renounced, I could still see the village, river, etc. Was that all vāsanā? All of that appeared because of involvement in that activity. After twenty years, all of that is in the distant past and does not appear now. So, gnān becomes consolidated in pravrutti and the mind becomes pure, but because of the connection with pravrutti, the indriyas do not become pure.” Then, Nathu Patel asked, “Is there a difference in attainment or not?” Swami answered, “There is no difference in attainment; it is equal. And if we do not say one who has chosen the path of nivrutti is that much greater, then you will believe me but others would not.” Footnotes: 1. 1. In this example of Shukji and King Janak, Swami is explaining the difference between the paths of nivrutti and pravrutti. In the Mahabharat, it is mentioned that everyone witnessed Shukji physically fly to Surya-lok. This was not possible for King Janak.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.97

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 97 · Chapter 5 · Verse 97

Gṛuhasthāshrammā rahīne kathā-vārtā kare chhe ne sāmbhaḷe chhe tenā to trividh tāp ṭaḷī gayā chhe, ne tap sarve thaī rahyā chhe ne Bhagwānnā sharaṇne pāmī rahyo chhe. Gṛuhasthāshrammā bahu kām ne bahu vighna, māṭe tene adhik kahyo chhe; ne gṛuhasthāshramīne Bhagwānnī mūrtine dharī rahyā evā Sādhuno āsharo chhe te to gharmā beṭhā sarva tīrthane sevī rahyo chhe.

One who lives as a householder, and delivers and listens to spiritual discourses is relieved of the three miseries, has completed all austerities and has attained the feet of God. In life as a householder there is much work and many obstacles, therefore it is described as superior. And a householder who has the refuge of a sadhu who beholds the murti of God is serving at all the places of pilgrimage, even while sitting at home.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.98

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 98 · Chapter 5 · Verse 98

Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Lokmā to āpaṇne em kahe chhe je, ‘E to nindā bahu kare chhe ne jūṭhu bole chhe, māṭe akalyāṇ thāshe,’ tenu kem samajavu?” Tyāre Swāmīe kahyu je, “Jūṭhu bole to sāmu kalyāṇ thāy chhe ne e to Bhagwānnī jukti chhe.” Te upar vāt karī je, “Rāmānand Swāmīe sanyāsīne pūchhyu je, ‘Ved keṭalā?’ Tyāre snnyāsī kahe, ‘Chār.’ Pachhī Rāmānand Swāmī kahe, ‘Brahmagnane1 pānchamo Ved kahyo chhe, te hu chhu,’ em sāchī vāt karī tethī sanyāsī jātā rahyā ane Mahārāje jukti karī to badhī pṛuthvīmā satsang thayo. Ne Rāmānand Swāmī gayā pachhī Vyāpkānand Swāmī vagerene juktithī potānu swarūp oḷakhāvī satsangmā rākhyā.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Brahmane jāṇnārne.

Harishankarbhai asked, “The people say about us, ‘They are slanderous and are lying; therefore, they will not be liberated.’ How should we understand that?” Swami answered, “One who lies and yet he is liberated - that is God’s tactic.” On that, Swami said, “Ramanand Swami asked the sannyāsis, ‘How many Vedas are there?’ Sannyāsis said, ‘Four.’ Ramanand Swami said, ‘One who knows Brahman is said to be the fifth Veda. I am the fifth Veda.’ He spoke the truth in this manner, so the sannyāsis left Satsang. However, Maharaj used a ploy and all of them sustained in Satsang.1 After Ramanand Swami reverted back to dhām, Maharaj tactically explained his swarup to Vyapkanand Swami and others and kept them in Satsang.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Here, Swami is explaining that Shriji Maharaj did not immediately reveal himself as supreme. Initially, he engaged in charitable works and conducted himself as a benevolent person, drawing everyone to himself. Then, he said he was equal to the other avatārs - something that was palatable by others. Then, he started granting samādhi and revealed himself as supreme. Then, he started talking about his supremacy. Using this tactic, many became satsangis and also realized the supremacy of Shriji Maharaj.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.99

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 99 · Chapter 5 · Verse 99

Gāmne gaḍh hoy tem āpaṇe pancha-vartamānrūpī gaḍh chhe ne temā thāṇāne1 ṭhekāṇe niyam chhe, ne jem thāṇu gaḍhne sāchave tem niyam vartamānne sāchave chhe māṭe jeṭalā niyam moḷā paḍe eṭalā fānkā paḍyā jāṇavā. Footnotes: 1. 1. Chokīnu sthān.

A village has a fort, similarly, we have a fort in the form of the five basic codes of conduct; also the codes represent security guards. So, just as guards protect the fort, codes facilitate observance. Therefore, however many lapses there are in observing codes, that many holes (in the wall of observance) exist.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.100

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 100 · Chapter 5 · Verse 100

Divyabhāv ne manuṣhyabhāv ek thaī jāy tyāre Bhagwān bhajavānu sukh āve.

When the divine and human characteristics of God and his Sadhu are considered as equally divine, then true bliss in worshipping God is attained.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.101

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 101 · Chapter 5 · Verse 101

Samādhimā swarūp dekhāy chhe te kārya chhe, ne pragaṭ manuṣhyarūp chhe te kāraṇ chhe.

The form of God seen in samādhi is the effect and the manifest human form (of God as Bhagwan Swaminarayan) is the cause of it.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.102

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 102 · Chapter 5 · Verse 102

Ātmaniṣhṭhā je hu dehthī nokho chhu ne dehnī kriyā māre viṣhe nathī tathā Bhagwānnu māhātmya tathā sang e traṇe karīne vāsanā nirmūḷ thāy chhe.

By these three things desires are eradicated: ātmā-realization, that I am different from the body and the actions of the body do not affect me; the greatness of God; and his company.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.103

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 103 · Chapter 5 · Verse 103

Bhajan, bhakti ne kathā-vārtānī sahāyne arthe gauṇpaṇe mandirnī kriyā karavāno Mahārājno hārd chhe ne kriyā pradhān thaī gaī chhe. Te Mahārājnā maḷel nahi hoy tyāre rājā dvāre, āchārya dvāre ne mūrtiyu dvāre rakṣhā karashe.

Maharaj’s principle is to get involved in the activities of the mandir secondarily in order to support one’s bhakti and kathā-vārtā, which is the primary purpose. However, activities have become predominant instead. When one who has oneness with Maharaj is not present, then he will protect us through a king, āchārya, and murtis.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.104

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 104 · Chapter 5 · Verse 104

Upāsanā, niyam tathā bhaktimā kasar raheshe eṭalī khoṭya naḍashe ne koī dravya denār maḷe, dīkaro denār maḷe ke dehe manḍavāḍ maṭāḍnār maḷe tethī upāsanāmā fer paḍe chhe. Te upar tumbaḍiyānu draṣhṭānt dīdhu.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Vaḍodarāmā ek tumbaḍiyo bāvo āvelo. Potānī mithyā siddhāī batāvavā khātar teṇe potānī pāse je mūḍī hatī te judā judā sthaḷe dāṭī. Pachhī je koī paisānī ichchhāe tenī pāse āve tene amuk jagyā batāvīne khodavānu kahe. Em karatā poṇā bhāgnī mūḍī jatī rahī. Pachhī teṇe vichāryu ke ām to badhu jashe. Eṭale je kaī bachyu te laīne tyāthī e bīje jato rahyo.

The extent of deficiencies in upāsanā, observing God’s commands and devotion is the extent to which problems will be encountered. And if someone who gives wealth and children, and cures body illness is met, then upāsanā is [adversely] affected. On this he cited the example of the mendicant.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. In Vadodara, a mendicant buried his money in different places. Then, when someone desiring wealth came to him, he directed them to one of the spots. In this way, he led people to falsely believe that he had such miraculous powers to unearth wealth. Soon, however, he realized that much of his wealth had gone. So he dug up whatever was left and departed.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.105

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 105 · Chapter 5 · Verse 105

Jagatmā dān, puṇya, sadāvrat ghaṇā kare chhe paṇ Draupadīnī chīntharī tathā Vidurnī bhājī tathā Sudāmānā tāndul eṭalu lakhāṇu. Bhagwān to adham odhāraṇ chhe, patitpāvan chhe ne asharaṇsharaṇ chhe. Paṇ Bhagwānno āsharo kare to. Te upar Ajāmeḷ tathā Veshyānī niyam pāḷyānī vāt karī. Māṭe ādhār vinā draḍhatā rahe nahi, ādhār te shu je, kūvāmā būḍatā hoīe ne mūḷiyu hāthmā āve to nahi buḍāy evī draḍhatā rahe chhe. Tem pragaṭ mūrtinā ādhārthī mokṣhanī draḍhatā rahe chhe. Te upar Indranī vāt karī je, Nāradjīnā vachanthī potānā bhāī Vāmanjīne Bhagwān jāṇīne tenu dhyān karyu tethī chār brahmahatyā ṭaḷī. Pragaṭ sūryathī ajavāḷu thāy, pragaṭ jaḷathī maḷ dhovāy ne pragaṭ chintāmaṇithī dravyanī bhūkh jāy tem ja pragaṭ Bhagwānthī mokṣha thāy.

Many people donate money, engage in pious activities, and give alms. However, only Draupadi’s sari, Vidur’s bhāji, and Sudama’s rice are mentioned (in the scriptures).1 God is the uplifter of the sinful, liberator of the wicked, and the refuge of those who have no refuge; but only if one seeks his refuge. Regarding this, Swami spoke about Ajamil and the prostitute who took niyams. If one is drowning in a well and one grasps a branch, one has faith that one will not drown. Similarly, with the support of the manifest God or God-realized Sadhu, there is conviction that one will be liberated. On this, he talked about Indra, who, on the advice of Naradji talked to his brother, Vamanji, and accepting him as a deity, meditated on him and so was pardoned of the sin of four Brahmicides. The presence of the real sun brings light, while with real water dirt can be removed and with a real chintāmani desire for wealth is satisfied. Similarly, with the real, manifest God liberation is attained. Footnotes: 1. 1. Krishna Bhagwan killed Shishupal with his Sudarshan disc. The disc cut his finger in the process. Draupadi saw Krishna’s finger bleed and tore off a part of her sari to bandage the wound. Krishna repaid her by miraculously granting her 999 saris when Duhsashan was trying to unclothe her when the Pandavas lost her in the game of dice. When Krishna came to Hastinapur to speak with Duryodhan about not resorting to war, Duryodhan offered Krishna delicious meals in his palace. However, Krishna declined and ate simple bhāji at Vidur’s home because he was a devotee of Krishna who recognized Krishna as God. Sudama lived in poverty. Realizing Krishna to be the king of Dwarika, he went to Dwarika with rice as a gift to Krishna in hopes of receiving assistance. In return for the rice, Krishna rid his poverty. With these examples, all three are mentioned in the scriptures because of their association with the manifest form of God. No one else has been mentioned.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.106

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 106 · Chapter 5 · Verse 106

Mahārājne jyāre dekhīe tyāre vāto ja karatā hoy. Ne gnānī, prītivāḷo ne dāspaṇu e traṇ ang chhe. Temā gnānī adhik. Te upar Stuti-Nindānu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvyu, ne kahyu je, pragaṭ mūrti vinā bīju ālamban chhe te himmat devā sāru chhe. Te upar Bhāgwatno shlok tathā sākhī keṭalīk bolyā ne Lakṣhmīnārāyaṇ padharāvyā tyāre teno prakāsh Mahārāj āgaḷ kevo jaṇāṇo to sūryanī āgaḷ dīvānā prakāsh jeṭalo jaṇāṇo; ne chār ang chhe te to angīnī sahāyne arthe chhe ne angī je pragaṭ mūrti te ghīne ṭhekāṇe chhe ne ang to chhāshne ṭhekāṇe chhe. Ne Sachchidānand Swāmī Gopāḷānand Swāmīne em kahetā je, e to ātmagnānī chhe ne ātmānī vāt kare chhe; ne pragaṭ mūrtino jene āsharo thayo chhe tene hāth sarve muddo āvyo chhe, tene kāī karavu rahyu nathī ne kāḷ, karma, māyāthī rahit thayo chhe. Te upar vāt karī je, bakarāne vāghnī sahāy hatī tethī koīthī nām daī shakāy nahi. Tyā shlok bolyā je, Nīchāshrayo na kartavyah kartavyo mahadāshrayah; Ajā sinhaprasāden ārūḍhā gajamastake.1 Tem pragaṭ Bhagwān ne pragaṭ Sādhunī sahāytāthī kāḷ, karma, māyā koī nām daī shake nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. Artha: nichalāno āshray na karavo, āshray to shreṣhṭhano karavo. Bakarī (sinhanā pagalāno āshray karī) sinhanī kṛupāthī hāthīnā mastak par ārūḍh thaī hatī.

When we saw Maharaj, he was always talking about spiritual matters. And spiritual knowledge, affection and servitude are three inclinations. Of them, spiritual knowledge is the best. On this, he had the Vachanamrut titled 'Reverence and Condemnation' (Vachanamrut Loya-17) read. One who has taken refuge in the manifest form of God or God-realized Sadhu has attained all principles, has nothing more left to do and is beyond the influence of kāl, karma and māyā. On this, Swami narrated the story of the goat who had the support of the tiger and so nobody could harass him. Then he quoted the shlok: Nichāshraya na kartavyah kartavyo mahadāshrayah; Ajā sinhaprasādena ārudhā gaja-mastake.1 Similarly, with the help of manifest God and the manifest Sadhu, kāl, karma and māyā, cannot cause harassment. Footnotes: 1. 1. Do not take refuge at the feet of the lowly, but only of the great; The goat (by sitting at the footprints of the lion), earned the grace of the lion and was seated on the head of an elephant. A goat sat next to a footprints of a lion. Whenever any predator came to kill it, the goat would point to the footprints saying that it was under the protection of the lion. Thus, the predator would go away for fear of reprisal. When the lion came and saw the goat’s faith in his footprints, it was pleased and as a reward for its faith, honoured the goat by seating it on an elephant.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.107

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 107 · Chapter 5 · Verse 107

Mahārāj chhatā rūpiyānā nāmā nīkaḷyā hatā. Hāl badhā āhī chokhī rīte varato chho te konā pratāpthī? Ne pachhavāḍethī āvu ne āvu raheshe to paṇ fer paḍashe kharo.

Even while Maharaj was present, some (sadhus) were exposed as keeping accounts. Here, all of you are behaving purely. By whose grace? However, in the future, if this continues, then there will certainly be a lapse (in observance of religious vows).1 Footnotes: 1. 1. In this talk, Swami is explaining that sadhus lapsed in the observance of their religious vow of refraining from wealth, even while Maharaj was present. However, the sadhus in Junagadh who had the company of Gunatitanand Swami did not lapse because he himself vigilantly observed the religious vows and did not let others falter. He also says that in the future, even in the presence of the Sant, if one does not keep his company, they will certainly lapse.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.108

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 108 · Chapter 5 · Verse 108

Khambhāḷānī ḍoshīne enā gharno āndhaḷo māṇas hato te vartamān pāḷavā na deto tethī Mahārāje Jetalpurnā moholmā potāne hāthe kapāḷmā āndhaḷāne traṇ ḍām dīdhā.

The blind husband of a woman in Khambālā did not let her observe the religious vows. Therefore, Maharaj punished him with a branding iron three times on his body at the palace of Jetalpur.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.109

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 109 · Chapter 5 · Verse 109

Māvābhāīe Mahārājne māyānu bandhan na thāy evu pūchhyu paṇ ve’vārnu na pūchhyu. Tethī Mahārāje prasanna thaī kahyu je, tamane māyānu bandhan nahi thāy ne Jhīṇābhāīe paṇ sevā māgī.

Mavabhai asked how māyā could not bind him, but he did not ask about his social duties. Therefore, Maharaj was pleased and said you will not be bound by māyā. Jhinabhai also asked for sevā.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.110

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 110 · Chapter 5 · Verse 110

Pashu, manuṣhya, zāḍ sarvemā kāmno viṣhay chhe. Bīje nathī. E koīthī mukāto nathī. E hṛudaygranthi chhe. Māṭe Nijātmānam brahmarūpam e potānu rūp mānavu. E desh judo paḍyo. Jem Bhīmnāthnī pelī pār khode to pāṇī āve paṇ paththar āve nahi ne āṇī kor pahele ghāe paththar āve tem brahmarūpmā koī bādh aḍato nathī, em Mahārājno mat chhe.

Animals, humans, and plants all have the object of lust, but no one else. No one can relieve themselves of it. Therefore, believe one’s self to be brahmarup as mentioned in the shlok Nijātmānam brahmarūpam. This belief is of a different territory. If someone were to dig on the other side of Bhimnath, then they will find water but not rocks. If they dig on this side, then they will strike a rock on the first stroke. Similarly, one cannot find any faults in one who is brahmarup. This is Maharaj’s principle.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.111

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 111 · Chapter 5 · Verse 111

Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Māvābhāīnī peṭhe shī rīte Bhagwān prasanna thāy?” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Āj to Bhagwān prasanna thayā chhe, māṭe āgnā pāḷavī. Bīju kāī sādhan karavānu nathī, pānch vartamān draḍh pāḷavā.”

Harishankarbhai asked, “How can God be pleased as he was pleased with Mavabhai?” Swami replied, “Today, Maharaj is pleased. Therefore, obey his commands. There is no other endeavor that needs to be done. Observe the five religious vows firmly.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.112

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 112 · Chapter 5 · Verse 112

Chhellā Prakaraṇnu Bīju Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne Swāmīe vāt karī je, “Mahārāj vinā bījāmā māl māne chhe ne bīju jovāne ichchhe chhe te to sūryanī āgaḷ dīvo kare tevo chhe ne satsangī ja kyā chhe? Ne ā vāt samajāshe tyāre gānḍā thaī javāshe ne gānḍā nathī thavātu te to Bhagwānnī ichchhā chhe. Ne ekāntikno sang maḷavo durlabh chhe ne Bhagwānthī kām thāy teṭalu ekāntikthī thāy chhe, kāraṇ ke badhāne Bhagwānno jog rahe nahi tethī ekāntiknā lakṣhaṇ samajavā.” Te upar - Tīn tāpkī zāḷ jaryo prānī koī āve, Tāku shītal karat turat dildāh miṭāve. Kahi kahi sundar ben ren agnān nikāse, Pragaṭ hot pahichān gnān ur bhānu prakāshe. Vairāg tyāg rājat vimaḷ bhav dukh kāṭat jantko, Kahe Brahmamuni ā jaktamā sang anupam santko. E savaiyo bolyā ne kahyu je, “Hamaṇā to jog chhe tyā sudhī jaṇātu nathī paṇ jog nahi hoy tyāre kāḷ paḍe ne dukh thāy teṭalu jīvne dukh thāshe ne ānkhyamāthī āsu paḍashe.” Vasudev-Devkīnu draṣhṭānt dīdhu. “Ne āvo jog maḷyo chhe te pūrvanā puṇya chhe.” Pachhī Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Vedrasno granth vānchavānī Mahārāje shā sāru nā pāḍī chhe?” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Vedrasno granth vānchavāvī Mahārāje nā pāḍī nathī, e to kaṭhaṇ paḍavāthī koī vānchatā nathī. Bhagwatprasādjī Mahārājnā kāgaḷmā lakhāvyu je, je kām karo tenā dhaṇī thāsho nahi, Bhagwānne māthe nākhajo ne Bhagwānno vishvās rākhajo.”

After having Vachanamrut Gadhada III-2 read, Swami said, “One who sees worth in anything else except Maharaj and desires to see something else is like one who lights a small lamp before the sun. And is he a satsangi? When this talk is understood, one will become mad. And that one does not become mad after understanding God’s glory is due to God’s will. “To attain the company of the God-realized Sadhu is rare. All the work that God can do can be done by him. And not all have the company of God. Therefore, understand the qualities of the God-realized Sadhu.” “Tin tāpki jhāl jaryo prāni koi āve; Tāku shital karat turat dildāha bujhāve. Kahi kahi sundar ben ren agnān nikāse; Pragat hot pahichān gnān ur bhānu prakāshe. Vairāg tyāg rājat vimal bhav dukh kātat jant ko; Kahe Brahmamuni ā jagatme sang anopam sant ko.”1 Swami recited these verses and then said, “At present you have the association of this Sadhu and so you do not realize the pain of separation. But when there is no association and famine-like difficulties arise, the jiva will be pained so much that tears will flow from the eyes (Swami described the pain suffered by Vasudev and Devki). And that we have attained this association is due to the merits earned in the past.” Footnotes: 1. 1. If one who is suffering from the three miseries comes to the Sadhu, one feels peace and one’s heartaches are removed. The Sadhu gives great spiritual guidance and removes the darkness of ignorance; one recognizes the manifest form of God and the sun of knowledge shines in one’s heart. Such a Sadhu, who is pure and radiates with detachment, removes the worldly miseries of people; Brahmamuni says that the best company in the world is that of the Sadhu.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.113

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 113 · Chapter 5 · Verse 113

Bhagwānnā bhakta thayā chhe ne panch-vartamān pāḷe chhe te to Prakṛuti-Puruṣhthī par jaīne beṭhā chhe.

Those who have become devotees of God and observe the five basic codes of conduct are already seated above Prakruti-Purush (i.e. in Akshardham).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.114

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 114 · Chapter 5 · Verse 114

Pragaṭ Bhagwānne jāṇīne je ek praṇām kare chhe te ātyantik mokṣha je Akṣhardhām tene pāme chhe ne te vinā to bījā badhāy dhāmne kāḷ khāī jāy chhe. Gāyakvāḍne gher janma thayā pachhī mūḷā sāru ke mogarī sāru rue paṇ gādīno dhaṇī thaī chūkyo chhe. Zāzī vāt kahevāy nahi.

Knowing the manifest God, those who offer even one prostration attain ultimate moksha, that is, Akshardham. And apart from it, all other abodes are destroyed by kāl. After taking birth in the Gaekwād1 family, a child may cry for a radish or mogri but he is going to inherit the throne. Similarly, one who surrenders to the manifest form of God attains Akshardham. Footnotes: 1. 1. The Maharaja of Vadodara.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.115

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 115 · Chapter 5 · Verse 115

Chhellā Prakaraṇnu Pāntrīsmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne vāt karī je, “Bhagwānmā manuṣhyabhāv rahī jāy to kalyāṇ na thāy. Māṭe Mahārāje vāramvār divyabhāv ne manuṣhyabhāv ek samajvānī vāto karī chhe ne hālamā rātmā Gaḍhaḍāvāḷā Nāraṇpradhān vānche chhe temā bahu sārī vātu āve chhe; te sāmbhaḷshe tene ghaṇo samās thāshe ne bījāne khoṭya raheshe.”

After having Vachanamrut Gadhada III-35 read, Swami said, “If one continues to perceive human traits in God, then final moksha is not attained. Therefore, Maharaj has repeatedly talked about understanding divine traits and human traits in God as one. And at present, there are many good talks in what Nāranpradhān of Gadhadā reads at night. Those who listen to them will gain much satisfaction and others will suffer a great loss.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.116

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 116 · Chapter 5 · Verse 116

Sattvaguṇmā em vichār karavo je, ā Sādhuthī ja māro mokṣha thāy tem chhe māṭe game teṭalu dukh thāy to paṇ teno sang mūkavo nahi.

When sattvagun prevails think, “My moksha is possible by this Sadhu only. So, however much misery is encountered, still I do not want to leave his company.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.117

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 117 · Chapter 5 · Verse 117

Gajā pramāṇe kare temā Bhagwān rājī thāy chhe. Rājā dān ne prajā snān.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Kahevat chhe. Rājā lākho rūpiyānu dān kare ne sāmānya māṇas fakta snān kare to te bannenu puṇya sarakhu chhe.

When one does as per one’s capacity, God is pleased. Kings donate and the public bathe (the fruits are the same).1 Footnotes: 1. 1. This is a Gujarati proverb which means that God is happy with any offering man may give. So, a large donation by a king earns the same merit as a simple holy bath by the public.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.118

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 118 · Chapter 5 · Verse 118

Jīvno ne dehno ve’vār nokho samajavo ne em na samaje to āvī bhāre prāpti thaī chhe to paṇ durbaḷatā manāy ne Bhagwānnī āgnāthī gṛuhasthāshram kare to paṇ nirbandh chhe.

Understand the affairs of the jiva as separate from the affairs of the body. If one does not understand this, then one will remain feeble despite such a great attainment. In contrast, even if one engages in gruhasthāshram due to God’s command, he will remain free from it.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.119

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 119 · Chapter 5 · Verse 119

Ek haribhaktane rog maṭāḍavā sāru Gopāḷ Swāmīe līmbaḍo pāyo tethī rog to maṭī gayo paṇ līmbaḍānu bandhāṇ thayu, te na pīe to tāv āve. Pachhī nitya pāvaḷu ochhu pīvā mānḍyāthī ṭaḷī gayu. Em ā lok vaḷagyo chhe tene em ṭāḷavo je, mandirmā āvavu ne gher jāvu ne gharnu kām chhokarāne karavā devu, evo abhyās karyāthī ṭaḷī jāy.

One devotee was given the juice of neem leaves as a cure for an illness. As a result, he was cured of the illness, but he became addicted to the juice of neem leaves; and when he did not drink it he got a fever. Then, by daily drinking smaller portions the addiction was overcome. Similarly, we are addicted to this world and it can be overcome by coming to the mandir, going home and letting the sons handle the family affairs. By such actions, it is overcome.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.120

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 120 · Chapter 5 · Verse 120

Harishankarbhāīnā pūchhavāthī Swāmīe vāt karī je, “Sarvagna to Bhagwān chhe ne bījā to alpagna chhe. Māṭe pativratānī ṭek rākhavī tathā dhyān Bhagwānnu karavu ne bahu Moṭā Sādhunu dhyān kare to Bhagwānne meḷavī de, ne jeve rūpe Bhagwān maḷyā hoy tenu dhyān kare to te Bhagwānne meḷavī de.”

On enquiry by Harishankarbhai, Swami said, “God is omniscient, and others know only a little. Therefore, faithfully offer loyal devotion and meditate on God. If one meditates on the very great Sadhu, he will connect you to God. And if you meditate on whatever form of God you have attained, then that form will lead you to God.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.121

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 121 · Chapter 5 · Verse 121

Swāmīe vāt karī je, māre kāne bahu bhāre shabda koī sambhaḷāyā tethī hṛudaymā chakkar chakkar thaī tej dekhāīne besī gayu. Pachhī jāṇyu je, Puruṣhottampaṇu āpaṇe samajāyu.

Swami said, “I heard some strong words and felt dizzy in my heart and saw light within. Then I understood the supremacy of Maharaj.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. In this talk, Swami is showing his human traits. He himself is Aksharbrahman, hence, he has an eternal oneness with Parabrahman. It is not possible for him to realize the supremacy of Maharaj through someone else’s words.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.122

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 122 · Chapter 5 · Verse 122

Moṭāne koī vāt koīne samajāvavī hoy tyāre bījā pāse mokalīne tenī pāse vāt karāvīne samajāve paṇ panḍe kahe nahi. Gopāḷ Swāmī mārī pāse vāt karāvī samajāvatā, evī Moṭānī rīt chhe; ne pote tenu pramāṇ karī āpe.

When the Mota [Purush] wants to explain some matter to someone, he will send them to someone else to explain it; but he himself will not explain it directly. Gopalanand Swami would send others to me to explain matters. That is the way of the Mota Purush. [Later], he reveals the truth by proof.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.123

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 123 · Chapter 5 · Verse 123

Ayogya ghāṭ thāy tyāre em jāṇavu je, ‘Āpaṇā dehmā bījāno pravesh thayo chhe.’ Te upar Janaknu draṣhṭānt1 dīdhu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sulabhā nāmnī sanyāsinī yogshaktithī Janaknā dehmā praveshī hatī. Janakne teno tarat khyāl āvī gayo.

When improper thoughts arise, consider that someone else has entered our body. On this, he gave the example of Janak.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Sulabha, a sannyasini, entered the body of King Janak through her yogic powers. However, Janak immediately realized this.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.124

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 124 · Chapter 5 · Verse 124

Panchāḷānu Sātmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne Swāmīe vāt karī je, “Ā pragaṭ Bhagwānne nirdoṣh samajyethī kāī karavu bākī rahetu nathī. Ne chamatkār jaṇāy to Shekhjīnī peṭhe jīravāy nahi,1 gānḍu thaī javāy. Māṭe kasar jevu rākhyu chhe. Bhagwānne nirdoṣh samajyāthī nirdoṣh thaī rahyo chhe ne doṣh jaṇāy chhe te tattvanā doṣh chhe ne nirdoṣh to ek Bhagwān ja chhe. Ne desh-kāḷ to Bhagwānne na lāge, jīvne to lāge; kāraṇ ke prārabdha karme deh chhe te khoṭā prārabdhano thar āve tyār desh-kāḷ lāge paṇ upāsya mūrtine nirdoṣh samajyāthī, e doṣhe rahit thaī rahyo chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Sindhī muslim bhakta Shekhjī Shrījī Mahārājnā satsangī hatā. Ek vār potānā Sindhmā satsang karāvavā māṭe temaṇe ichchhā karī tethī Shrījī Mahārāje temane mokalyā ane aishvarya āpatā kahyu, “Tamārī dāḍhīnu je dhyān karashe tene samādhi thashe. Parantu tamāre ā pāch vātno sampūrṇa khyāl rākhavo: 1. Strīone vāt karasho nahī. 2. Jariyān vastro dhāraṇ karasho nahī. 3. Gaḷyu-chīkaṇu jamasho nahī. 4. Sindh sivāy bīje kyāy rokāsho nahī. 5. Koīnā antarmā pravesh karasho nahī, ne karo to tenī gupta vāt koīnī pāse prakāsh karasho nahī.” Parantu aishvarya maḷyā pachhī chhakī gayelā Shekhjīe ā niyamono bhang karyo. Pachhī “Hu Bhagwān chhu” em prachār karavā lāgyā. Mahārāje temanu aishvarya pāchhu khenchī līdhu.

After having Vachanamrut Panchala-7 read, Swami said, “By understanding this manifest God (Bhagwan Swaminarayan) to be free from all blemishes, there is nothing else left to do. By understanding God as fault-free, one also becomes fault-free. The flaws that are experienced are of the material elements and only God is truly fault-free. Also, place and time do not affect God, but they do affect the jiva. Since the body is formed from the prārabdha karmas, when impure prārabdha karmas bear fruit, then place and time have an impact. But by knowing the manifest form of God as fault-free, then one is also in the process of becoming fault-free.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.125

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 125 · Chapter 5 · Verse 125

Samajyā vinā je je kare tenu faḷ āgaḷ na thāy, ne Bhagwān vate ja kalyāṇ chhe. Te bīju game eṭalu karyu hoy paṇ upāsanāmā ṭhīk na hoy to teno mokṣha na thāy. Ne bīju to dharma, arth, kām upar chhe.

Whatever is done without proper understanding does not gain any rewards. And moksha is attained only through God. Whatever else one may have done, if upāsanā is not understood properly, then moksha is not attained. Other things lead only to the attainment of dharma, wealth and desires.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.126

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 126 · Chapter 5 · Verse 126

Bhagwānno tathā santno māhātmye sahit nishchay hoy tene oro1 rahevā de nahi, ne kāḷ, karma, māyā te to jaḍ chhe. Māṭe kartā-hartā Bhagwānne jāṇavā ne roṭalā khāīne bhajan karavu. Dukh mānavu nahi ne ati santoṣh kalyāṇnā mārgmā vighna chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Māyānī ā bāju - evo arth.

Those who have firm faith and knowledge of the full glory of God and his Sadhu do not remain under the influence of māyā. And kāl, karma, and māyā are non-sentient. Therefore, believe God to be the creator and destroyer, eat simple food and offer worship, but do not be engulfed by misery. So, extreme satisfaction on the path of final liberation is an obstacle.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.127

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 127 · Chapter 5 · Verse 127

Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Vachanāmṛutmā batāvyā chhe te Sādhu oḷakhāṇā nahi tenu kem karavu?” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “E vāt kahevāy nahi. Kahīe to mār paḍe ne avaguṇ āve. Māṭe samajo chho tem samajavu, ne faḷiyāmā ghoḍo feravī levo. Te shu je, yagna karanārā dase dishāyumā ghoḍo feravīne jīt karīne yagnanī pūrṇāhuti kare chhe. Tem jeṇe das indriyurūp das dishāyu jītī chhe, kahetā jenī vṛutti koī viṣhaymā levātī nathī tevā Santmā joḍāya tyāre teno gnānyagna pūro thaī rahyo, te faḷiyāmā ghoḍo feravīne yagna karyā jevu chhe.”

Harishankarbhāi asked, “What should we do if we haven’t recognized a Sadhu shown in the Vachanamrut?” Swami answered, “That cannot be said. If we do, we would be beaten and you may perceive a flaw. Therefore, understand as you do and walk the horse around your courtyard. Meaning, those who perform an [Ashwamedh] yagna send a horse in ten directions and must become victorious [in all battles] in order to complete the yagna. Similarly, one who has attached oneself to a Sant who has won over the ten directions in the form of the ten indriyas, i.e. who never becomes attached to the sensual pleasures, is said to have completed the gnān-yagna. That is analogous to completing the [Ashwamedh] yagna by merely walking the horse around one’s courtyard.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.128

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 128 · Chapter 5 · Verse 128

Mahāpūjāmā besatī vakhate bolyā je, “Ā beṭhā tenā hāthmā sarve chhe ne badhuy emā chhe.”

While sitting down for mahāpujā, Swami said, “Everything is in the hands of the one (referring to Himself) sitting here and everything is in Him.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.129

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 129 · Chapter 5 · Verse 129

Brāhmaṇno dīkaro brāhmaṇ kahevāy, vāṇiyāno dīkaro vāṇiyo kahevāy tem āpaṇe Puruṣhottamnī upāsanāno deh bandhāṇo te Akṣharrūp thayā chhīe māṭe potānu swarūp Akṣhar mānavu.

A brāhmin’s son is called a brāhmin and a merchant’s son is called a merchant [due to their bloodline]. Similarly, our spiritual body has been forged by upāsanā of Purushottam; hence, we have become aksharrup, so we should believe our form to be Akshar.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.130

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 130 · Chapter 5 · Verse 130

Jevā shabda sāmbhaḷe tevo jīv thāy chhe. Raj, tam ne sattva e dehnā bhāv chhe. Te to hoy. Bhūkh lāge, taras lāge, dukh-sukh thāy e dehnā bhāv chhe. Ne man to nīl vāndarā jevu chhe, te lab-labāṭ karyā kare ne āpaṇe to ethī par kṣhetragna chhīe. Māṭe e deh, indriyu, antahkaraṇnā bhāv āpaṇe viṣhe mānavā nahi. Āpaṇe to ethī judā chhīe. Māṭe enāthī hāravu nahi, yuddha karyā karavu.

The jiva becomes (stronger or weaker) as per the words it hears. Rajogun, tamogun and sattvagun are attributes of the body and they are expected. One feels hungry and thirsty, and experiences misery and happiness – these are traits of the body. Also, the mind is like a mischievous monkey; it keeps on flitting. And our true form is the soul, which is above the mind. Therefore, do not believe the characteristics of the body, senses and inner faculties to be our own; we are (the ātmā) separate from them. Therefore, do not let them defeat you; continue to fight against them.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.131

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 131 · Chapter 5 · Verse 131

Chhellā Prakaraṇnu Bīju Vachanāmṛut tathā Vartālnu Pānchamu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne vāt karī je, “Aṣhṭāng yog, vrat, dān, tap e sarve karyā paṇ jīvmā baḍvāḷ1 rahyo. Pachhī Sādhurūp Bhagwān thaīne jīvne shuddha karyā. Ne potāne viṣhe to māyāno sarg hoy paṇ upāsya mūrtine viṣhe māyā na samaje to teno mokṣha thaī rahyo chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Malintā.

After having Vachanamruts Gadhada III-2 and Vartal-5 read, Swami said, “Despite practising ashtāng-yoga, spiritual observances, making donations and performing austerities, spiritual impurity remains within the jiva. Then God in the form of a Sadhu purifies the jiva. And māyā may take birth in oneself, but by understanding that there is no māyā in one’s chosen form of God, then one is in the process of attaining moksha.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.132

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 132 · Chapter 5 · Verse 132

Yagnamā Swarūpānand Swāmīne Mahārāje kahyu je, “Māṇas ghaṇā thayā te āpaṇī lāj jāshe, sīdhu pahochashe nahi.” Tyāre kahyu je, “Brahmanī lāj jāy nahi, Lakṣhmīnī lāj jāshe.”

During the yagna, Maharaj said to Swarupanand Swami, “We will lose our reputation. There are many people here and there is not enough food to feed everyone.” Swami replied, “Brahman will not lose his reputation. Lakshmi will lose her reputation.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. In Aso Samvat 1866, Maharaj performed a grand yagna in Dabhan. The brāhmins took control of the kitchen and wasted food to disgrace Maharaj out of spite. They were afraid that if Maharaj succeeds in the yagna and his fame spreads, then their sect will lose followers and support. This is the setting where Maharaj said to Swarupanand Swami, “We will lose our reputation.” And Swarupanand Swami replied, “Lakshmiji will lose her reputation.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.133

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 133 · Chapter 5 · Verse 133

Mahārāje Swarūpānand Swāmīne kahyu je, “Parachā bahu āpo chho.” Tyāre temaṇe kahyu je, “Isme kyā?” Mahārāje farī kahyu je, “Tamane Golokmā mokalīe?” Tyāre kahyu je, “E khaḍu me to paḍe ja hai.” Swarūpānand Swāmīne mandavāḍmā kahyu je, “Tamane dukh thayu.” Tyāre kahe je, “Ṭaṭṭu dūbaḷā thayā chhe asavār to tājā chhe.”

Maharaj said to Swarupanand Swami, “You show many miracles.” Swami replied, “What is so great about that?” Maharaj then said, “Shall I send you to Golok?” Swami replied, “I am already in Golok.” Maharaj said to Swarupanand Swami during his grave illness, “You are suffering.” Swami replied, “The horse is feeble (my physical body) but the rider (my ātmā) is healthy.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. The story of Swarupanand Swami’s illness can be found here: History of Gadhada II-35

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.134

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 134 · Chapter 5 · Verse 134

Mahārāj ne ā Sādhu sarvethī par chhe ne samarth chhe to paṇ Vednī tantīmā1 rahe chhe paṇ bījā avatār jevā charitra karatā nathī, te bījāne guṇ āvavā sāru ne ghaṇā jīvnā kalyāṇne sāru chhe paṇ potāne kāī bādh aḍato nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Paramparāmā, maryādāmā.

Maharaj and this Sadhu are above all and are powerful, yet they still live by the rules of the Vedas, and do not perform actions contrary to the Vedas. All this is to inspire good virtues in others and for the moksha of many jivas, but they (Maharaj and Swami) are not tainted in any way.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.135

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 135 · Chapter 5 · Verse 135

Upāsanāthī mokṣha chhe. Dharma, vairāgya ne ātmaniṣhṭhā kāī mokṣha kare tem nathī, ne āvā Sādhu koī jagyāe nathī ne āvo jog mahādurlabh chhe, māṭe samajaṇ na hoy to pūjavānā rahī jāy ne bījā pūjāy. Ne Bhagwānnu mūḷ pratimā ne tīrth chhe ne gṛuhasthnu mūḷ chhokarā chhe.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Aṣhṭ prakārnī pratimā ne tīrth (sthāvar ane jangam) e Bhagwānmā āsthā ṭakāvī rākhe chhe. Āstik paramparā jaḷavāī rahe chhe. Eṭale e Bhagwānnu mūḷ chhe. Ne putra hoy to gṛuhasthāshramnī vansh-paramparā jaḷavāī rahe chhe; eṭale gṛuhasthnu mūḷ chhokarā chhe.

Moksha is attained through upāsanā. Dharma, detachment and ātmā-realization cannot earn moksha. And such a Sadhu (pointing at himself) cannot be found anywhere and such company is extremely rare. So, the one that deserves to be worshipped is left out and others (ordinary sadhus) are worshipped. And the roots of God are his murti and places of pilgrimage1; and the roots of a householder are his sons. Footnotes: 1. 1. The eight types of murtis and innumerable places of pilgrimage sustain people’s faith in God. They help in maintaining the theistic tradition. They are the very foundation of belief in God. For a householder, his sons continue his lineage and so are called the foundation of householder’s lineage.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.136

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 136 · Chapter 5 · Verse 136

Moṭāī to Mahārājne Puruṣhottam jāṇe ne āgnā pāḷe tenī chhe. Pragaṭ hoy tyāre sarve āgnā pāḷe paṇ chheṭe gayā pachhī pachhavāḍethī āgnā barābar pāḷe te kharā.

Greatness lies in knowing Maharaj as Purushottam and observing his commands. When God is manifest everyone follows his will, but when he is at a distance and one still follows his commands properly, then one is a true devotee.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.137

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 137 · Chapter 5 · Verse 137

Lākh maṇ loḍhānī loḍhī dhagāvī hoy te upar so ghaḍā pāṇī reḍye ṭāḍhī paḍe nahi. E to Gangānā dharāmā nākhe to ṭāḍhī thāy. Tem ā samāgam dharā jevo chhe ne hālamā kalyāṇ thāy chhe te jem chār mahināno varsād varasyo hoy temā loḍhī dhagelī rahe nahi tevu kalyāṇ thāy chhe.

If a hundred thousand kilo iron pan is heated until it is red hot, then it cannot be cooled by pouring only a hundred pots of water. It is cooled if it is placed in the flowing Ganga. Similarly this association with the Sadhu is like the forceful flow of water. And the moksha attained at present is like when it rains continually for four months the pan does not stay hot – such moksha is attained at present.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.138

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 138 · Chapter 5 · Verse 138

Abhinivesh thāy tene Ved kahe, guru kahe to paṇ māne nahi ne panch-viṣhayno abhinivesh1 to gururūp Govind pragaṭ sākṣhātkār maḷyethī ja ṭaḷī jāy chhe; had mūkīne vihad je Akṣhardhām tene pāmī rahyā chhe; māṭe ā avasarmā kasar raheshe tene pastāvo thāshe ne pachhī sāmbhaḷnār hashe to kahenār nahi maḷe, māṭe ḍhol-bhūngaḷā vagāḍīne narake jāvu nahi. Footnotes: 1. 1. Tanmaytā, mānyatā angeno draḍh nishchay.

When an idea is firmly established in one’s mind, then even if the Vedas instruct or the guru orders, one does not accept. And the firm beliefs about enjoying the five sense pleasures can be removed only by the realization of the manifest form of God in the form of the guru; then the material boundary is crossed and the unlimited Akshardham is attained. So, if deficiencies remain on this occasion, then one will regret. And if there are listeners afterwards, there will be nobody to speak. Therefore, do not go to hell to the accompaniment of beating drums and blaring trumpets.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.139

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 139 · Chapter 5 · Verse 139

Gnān karatā karatā chhakī jāvu nahi ne glāni paṇ pāmavī nahi. Samajo chho em samajavu paṇ bāraṇe moṭāī kahevī nahi. Kahye moṭāī thatī nathī ne chhe te jātī rahevānī nathī. Ne Mahārājne Bhagwān kahetā tenā upar rīs karatā ne dhīre dhīre Vachanāmṛutmā potānī moṭāī lakhī dīdhī tem karavu paṇ chhakī jāvu nahi. Ne vachan mānavu te chaḍatī vāt hoy te mānavī paṇ ūtartu vachan mānavu nahi. Te upar Nityānand Swāmīe Mahārājnī sāthe sāt divas sudhī ṭakkar līdhī te vāt karī. Māṭe Mahārājnā feravyā paṇ na faryā. Evo nishchay karavo. Ne āpaṇī vāt sāchī chhe paṇ āpaṇī utkṛuṣhṭatā khamī shake nahi tethī upādhi kare. Māṭe bārya vāt karasho nahi ne tame samajo chho tem samajajo paṇ chhakī jāsho to din ūṭhashe ne dukh āvashe; ne ame em vartyā je, koīnā kaḷyāmā āvyā nahi. Māṭe tamāre em vartavu ne kartā Bhagwānne jāṇavā.

“Do not get carried away while attaining spiritual wisdom and also do not be disappointed. Understand as you do but do not reveal (your) greatness outside. Greatness is not attained by merely describing it. And that which exists does not go away by not describing it. In fact, when someone described Maharaj as God, he would become upset with them. And he had his greatness written in the Vachanamrut only gradually. Do it this way, but do not get carried away. If you’re going to believe any words, believe positive talks but not negative talks.” On this, he described the story of Nityanand Swami who stood firm against Maharaj for seven days and did not give in despite Maharaj’s efforts.1 Such conviction should be developed. Our talks are correct, but others cannot tolerate our superiority and so cause trouble. Therefore, do not talk outside. Understand as you do but do not get carried away; otherwise every day you will encounter difficulties. We have behaved in a way that nobody could understand us. So, all of you behave as we have and know Maharaj as the all-doer. Footnotes: 1. 1. When the Satsangijivan scripture was being written, the senior paramhansas discussed how to portray the glory of Shriji Maharaj. Some said that he should be described as being like Dattatrey, Kapil, etc. Some said he should be described as being like Ram, Krishna, etc. However, Nityanand Swami stood firm and said that Shriji Maharaj should be described as Supreme God. Everyone, including Shriji Maharaj, disagreed. Shriji Maharaj excommunicated him. So, Nityanand Swami left. For a week the discussions continued while Nityanand Swami was shunned by all. Then Shriji Maharaj called Nityanand Swami to the assembly and garlanded him for his resolute conviction in his supreme form. Shriji Maharaj thus told everyone that Nityanand Swami’s understanding was correct and even in the face of hardships should be perfected.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.140

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 140 · Chapter 5 · Verse 140

Bhagwān bhajatā loknu dukh āve ne desh-kāḷnu dukh āve paṇ pāchhu paḍavu nahī, dhīraj rākhavī, dhīre dhīre badhā ṭaḷī jāy paṇ pāchho pag bharavo nahī. Tyān draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, Pradyumna yuddhamāthī pāchhā haṭhyā nahī. Pachhī Bhagwāne shankh vagāḍyo tethī sarve nāsh pāmī gayā.1 Tem shankhne ṭhekāṇe ā Sādhunī vātu chhe tethī sarve nāsh pāmashe māṭe dhīraj rākhavī, pāchhu paḍavu nahī. Te upar satsangīne satsang karatā ghaṇīk upādhī āvelī tenī vāto karī tathā mūrkhanī samajaṇ je rājāne chākare sabhāmā bāṭiyu āpī tenī vāt karī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Rājasūy Yagna vakhate Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa Bhagwāne Shishupālno vadh karyo tenu ver vāḷavā Sālve moṭī senā sāthe Dvārkā par chaḍhāī karī. Yuddhanī vikarāḷtā joī Yādav-senā gabharāī gaī. Pradyumna senāpati hato. Saune ādesh āpyo ke koī pāchhu haṭhe nahī. Ne sau zazūmyā. Pachhī Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa Bhagwāne shankhanād karyo tethī shatru sainyamā bhangāṇ paḍyu ne Pradyumnanī jīt thaī.

While worshipping God, miseries of the world, and of unfavourable place and time are encountered, but do not be discouraged. Remain patient. Gradually, all difficulties will be resolved, but do not step backwards. Swami gave the example of Pradyumna,1 who did not retreat from the battle, so God (Shri Krishna) blew the conch shell and everyone was destroyed. Similarly, the conch shell represents the talks of this Sadhu and by them everything will be destroyed. So, be patient and do not give up. Then Swami talked about satsangis who faced many difficulties while practicing satsang. Footnotes: 1. 1. While the Rajsuya Yagna was being performed, Salya attacked Shri Krishna to avenge the killing of his friend, Shishupal. Seeing the ferocity of the battle, the Yadav soldiers, led by Pradyumna, were terrified. But he instructed them not to retreat. So, all fought. Then Shri Krishna sounded the conch shell, which caused divisions in the enemy ranks, and eventually Pradyumna won.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.141

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 141 · Chapter 5 · Verse 141

Vachanāmṛutno Parathāro vanchāvī vāt karī je, chār varṣh sudhī Mahārāje kāī jaṇāvyu nahī ne vāto karī tethī badhā deshmāthī ghaṇā māṇas mūrtimā taṇāī gayā. Tene joīne sarve lokonā man sanshayvat thaī gayā. Pachhī aishvarya jaṇāvyānī prārthanā karavāthī Jūnāgaḍhmā ghaṇā māṇasne samādhi karāvī tethī gānḍā thaī gayā ne saune potpotānā īṣhṭadevnā darshan Mahārāje karāvyā ne ājanā sādhu bījā avatār jevā chhe māṭe bījā sādhu ne ā Sādhu tathā bījā guru ne ā gurunī rīt tapāsvī.

Swami had the Vachanamrut Paratharo read and said, “For four years, Maharaj did not show any signs (of his supremacy) but only discoursed. Therefore, everyone was drawn toward him. The others, however, became doubtful.1 Then, they prayed to him to show his powers, so Maharaj granted many people in Junagadh the experience of samādhi and they became mad. He gave them the darshan of their own ishtadev. The sadhus today are like the avatārs of the past.2 Therefore, one should scrutinize other sadhus and this Sadhu, other gurus and this Guru.” Footnotes: 1. 1. These words can be understood in two ways. First, Maharaj did not clarify his true swarup for four years, but simply discoursed. Therefore, everyone became drawn to him through love and became attached to him. Seeing so many people become attached to him, others formed doubts of whether he could be God or not. Second, seeing Maharaj draw people from other sampradāyas, other gurus formed doubts that if everyone joins the Swaminarayan Sampraday, what will happen to our sampradāy? 2. The purport of these words is: the sadhus of Shriji Maharaj and Aksharbrahma Gunatitanand Swami have powers similar to the previous avatārs.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.142

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 142 · Chapter 5 · Verse 142

Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Vaḍvānaḷ agni jevā sādhu kem samajavā?” Tyāre Swāmīe kahyu je, “Satsangijīvanmā tenā lakṣhaṇ1 kahyā chhe je, Puṣhpahārāy sarpāy...2 evu varte, tathā Bhagwānnī mūrtine akhanḍ dhāre tathā satsang shabdano arath karyo chhe tevā lakṣhaṇ hoy, tathā ghaṇāk jīvne Bhagwān bhajāve ne pote shuddha rahe, lagār āgnā lope nahī evā hoy. Ne koī to ghaṇāne Bhagwān bhajāve evā Bhagwānnā baḷthī thayā hoy ne pote jātā rahe evā hoy, te Gopāḷ Swāmīne satsang karāvyo te guru paṇ jātā rahyā; māṭe em moṭāī samajvī nahī. E to vahevārik moṭāī chhe. Paṇ Vachanāmṛutmā moṭāī kahī chhe je, Bhagwānno nishchay hoy ne āgnā pāḷe e moṭā chhe; ne vaḍvānaḷ agni jevā na hoy to āṭalā badhā māṇasne satsang karāve ne pote nirlep kem rahe? Māṭe āpaṇe manāy e kāī moṭā nahī. Mahārājnī āgnā pramāṇe moṭāī samajavī. Te chār prakārnā prashnamā bījāe dhyānnu kahyu ne Mahārāje vātu karavānu kahyu.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Santnā 64 lakṣhaṇ: 1. Dayāḷu, 2. Kṣhamāvāḷā, 3. Sarvajīvnu hit ichchhanārā, 4. Ṭāḍh, taḍako ādik sahan karanārā, 5. Koīnā paṇ guṇmā doṣh nahī jonārā, 6. Shānt, 7. Jeno shatru nathī thayo evā, 8. Adekhāī tathā vairthī rahit, 9. Mān tathā matsarthī rahit, 10. Bījāne mān āpanārā, 11. Priya ane satya bolnārā, 12. Kām, krodh, lobh tathā madthī rahit, 13. Aham-mamatva-rahit, 14. Svadharmamā draḍh rahenārā, 15. Dambha-rahit, 16. Andar ane bahār pavitra rahenārā, 17. Deh tathā indriyone damnārā, 18. Saraḷ swabhāvavāḷā, 19. Ghaṭit bolnārā, 20. Jitendriya tathā pramād-rahit, 21. Sukh-dukhādi-dvandva-rahit, 22. Dhīrajvāḷā, 23. Karmendriyo tathā gnānendriyonī chapaḷtāthī rahit, 24. Padārthnā sangrah-rahit, 25. Bodh karavāmā nipuṇ, 26. Ātmaniṣhṭhāvāḷā, 27. Sarvane upakār karavāvāḷā, 28. Koī paṇ prakārnā bhay rahit, 29. Koī paṇ prakārnī āshārahit, 30. Vyasan-rahit, 31. Shraddhāvāḷā, 32. Udār, 33. Tapasvī, 34. Pāparahit, 35. Grāmyakathā ne vārtā nahī sāmbhaḷnārā, 36. Satshāstranā nirantar abhyāsvāḷā, 37. Māyik panchaviṣhay-rahit, 38. Āstik buddhivāḷā, 39. Sat-asatnā vivekvāḷā, 40. Madya-mānsādiknā sansarge rahit, 41. Draḍh-vratvāḷā, 42. Koīnī chāḍī-chugalī nahī karanārā, 43. Kapaṭ-rahit, 44. Koīnī chhānī vātne prakaṭ nahī karanārā, 45. Nidrājit, 46. āhārjit, 47. Santoṣhvāḷā, 48. Sthir buddhivāḷā, 49. Hinsārahit vṛuttivāḷā, 50. Tṛuṣhṇārahit, 51. Sukh-dukhmā sambhāvavāḷā, 52. Akārya karavāmā lājvāḷā, 53. Potānā vakhāṇ nahī karanārā, 54. Bījānī nindā nahī karanārā, 55. Yathārth brahmacharya pāḷnārā, 56. Yam tathā niyamvāḷā, 57. Āsanjit, 58. Prāṇajit, 59. Bhagwānnā draḍh āshrayvāḷā, 60. Bhagwadbhakti-parāyaṇ, 61. Bhagwān arthe ja sarva kriyā karanārā, 62. Bhagwānnī mūrtimā dhyān-parāyaṇ rahenārā, 63. Bhagwānnī līlākathānu shravaṇ-kīrtan karanārā, 64. Bhagwānnī bhakti vinā ek paṇ kṣhaṇ vyartha nahī javā denārā. [Satsangijīvan (Harigītā) 1: 25-37] 1. Mūḷ shabda ‘Sarpāyante puṣhpahārā’ evo chhe. (Satsangijīvan: 1/36/70). Artha: Bhagwānnā sāchā bhakta - santne maḷayāgar chandanno lep zernā kādavnā lep jevo lāge chhe. Fūlnā hār tene sarp jevā lāge chhe. Alankāro dūṣhaṇrūp jaṇāy chhe.

Harishankarbhāi asked, “How should one understand the Sadhu who is like the vadvānal fire?” Swāmi replied, “In the Satsangijivan, the qualities of such a sādhu1 are explained: pushpahārāya sarpāya.2 Moreover, he forever beholds the murti of God, and his characteristics are according to the definition of Satsang. Furthermore, he inspires many jivas to worship God, remains completely pure, and never disobeys the commands of God. There are many who may have gained the strength from God to encourage others to worship God, yet they themselves may abandon God. The guru who instilled Satsang to Gopāl Swāmi himself left; therefore greatness should not be understood in this way. This type of greatness is worldly. In the Vachanāmrut, greatness has been defined as having firm, unflinching faith in God and following his commands; such a person is great. If he is not like the vadvānal fire, then how can he remain unaffected, despite making so many people satsangis? Consequently, who we believe to be great is not greatness. Greatness is based on following Mahārāj’s command.” Footnotes: 1. 1. The 64 qualities of a sadhu (as mentioned in the Satsangijivan/Harigita: 1/25-37) are, one who: 1. Is compassionate, 2. Is forgiving, 3. Wishes the betterment of all jivas, 4. Tolerates cold, heat, etc., 5. Does not look at the flaws in others’ virtues, 6. Is tranquil, 7. Does not have an enemy, 8. Is devoid of jealousy and animosity, 9. Is free of ego and envy, 10. Honors others, Expand all qualities 11. Speaks kindly and truthfully, 12. Is free of lust, anger, greed, and arrogance, 13. Is free of I-ness and my-ness, 14. Is firm in one’s personal dharma, 15. Is free of pretentiousness, 16. Maintains physical and mental purity, 17. Punishes his body and indriyas, 18. Possesses an agreeable nature, 19. Speaks only as necessary, 20. Has control over the indriyas and free of laziness, 21. Is free from the duality of happiness and misery, 22. Possesses patience, 23. Is free from over-activity of karma-indriyas and gnan-indriyas, 24. Does not collect material objects, 25. Is an expert in instruction, 26. Possesses ātmā-realization, 27. Benefits everyone, 28. Is free of all types of fear, 29. Is free from any expectations , 30. Is free of addictions, 31. Possesses faith, 32. Is generous, 33. Is austere, 34. Is free of sin, 35. Does not listen to gossip, 36. Constantly engages in scriptural study, 37. Is free from indulging in worldly pleasures, 38. Possesses a theist intellect, 39. Possesses discretion of truth and false, 40. Is free of alcohol and meat consumption, 41. Is firm in observances of vrats, 42. Does not gossip, 43. Is free of deceit, 44. Does not reveal other’s secrets, 45. Has conquered sleep, 46. Has conquered taste, 47. Is content, 48. Has a stable mind, 49. Is inclined toward nonviolence, 50. Has no desires, 51. Has equanimity in happiness and misery, 52. Is ashamed in doing misdeeds, 53. Does not compliment himself, 54. Does not slander others, 55. Observes celibacy perfectly, 56. Has self-control and restraint, 57. Has complete control of his body, 58. Has control of his breath (and thus internal faculties), 59. Has firm refuge of God, 60. Is inclined toward devotion of God, 61. Does all activities for God’s sake, 62. Is inclined to remain in meditation of God’s murti, 63. Listens to God’s divine incidents, 64. Does not let one second pass without devotion to God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.143

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 143 · Chapter 5 · Verse 143

Parvatbhāīnu nām granthamā kyāī lakhyu nathī paṇ e to atishe moṭā hatā.

Parvatbhai’s name is not found in any granth but he was extremely great.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. These words resolve one doubt regarding the identity of Aksharbrahman Gunatitanand Swami. Gunatitanand Swami’s name is not mentioned in the Vachanamrut. However, he was still the eternal Aksharbrahman, based on the words of those who associated with him and based on Pragji Bhakta’s life. It is generally known that Radha’s name is not found in the Shrimad Bhagwat. However, she is still considered the choicest devotee of Krishna and her murti is installed beside Krishna.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.144

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 144 · Chapter 5 · Verse 144

Sarva prakārnī vātu jenāthī samajāy tene sarvethī moṭā samajavā. Ne badhā satsangmā jīv na joḍāy paṇ be jaṇ sāthe to jīv jaḍī devo ne te vinā bījāmā māl na jāṇe te jīv jaḍyo kahevāy ne bījāno dehe karīne to sang hoy.

Knowing that there is no value in anything else except God and his holy Sadhu is described as having attached the jiva to satsang. And the company of others is kept only physically (i.e. superficially).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.145

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 145 · Chapter 5 · Verse 145

Mahārāje Vachanāmṛutmā potānu vartan kahyu te to potānā muktanu ja kahyu chhe em samajavu, ne Puruṣhottam tathā Dhāmrūp Akṣhar e bene to tethī par samajavā ne temane viṣhe to kāī samajavu nahī.

In the Vachanamrut, Maharaj has described his own human behaviour, but it should be understood as that of his liberated souls. And understand both Purushottam and his abode, Akshar, to be above that human behaviour and do not attribute any human traits to them.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.146

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 146 · Chapter 5 · Verse 146

Potānī vāt karī je, “Ame Samvat 1859nī sālmā Bhādarvā Māsmā pratham Mahārājnā darshan karyā ne Mahārāje amārā sāmu joyu ne ame Mahārājnā sāmu joyu eṭalāmā nishchay thaī gayo, paṇ koī rīte Mahārāje sanmān āpyu nathī.”

Swami spoke of himself, “In the month of Bhadarva of Samvat 1859, I first had the darshan of Maharaj. He looked at me and I looked at him. From just that, I developed conviction (of Maharaj’s supremacy). But in no way did Maharaj honor me.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.147

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 147 · Chapter 5 · Verse 147

“Dharmaswarūpānand Brahmachārīnā jīvamāthī nahī vaṭalvāno sanshay ṭaḷe ja nahī.”1 Tyāre Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Ātmaniṣhṭhā hoy to paṇ em rahetu hashe?” Swāmīe uttar karyo je, “Ātmaniṣhṭhāmā na rahe. Kasar hoy to rahe ne ātmaniṣhṭhā hoy paṇ Mayārām Bhaṭṭanī peṭhe pūrvanā hruṣhipaṇānā pāsh2 ṭaḷe nahī.” Te upar Duryodhan tathā Yudhiṣhṭhirne jīvmā pāsh hatā3 tenī vāt karī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Mahārāj kahetā ke Dharmaswarūpānand Swāmī Dharmano avatār chhe. Varṇāshramno dharma teo chustapaṇe pāḷatā. Shuddhi karī hoy to paṇ ashuddhino bhās satat rahyā karato. Eṭale Swāmī dharmapālan sāthe ātmaniṣhṭhānī mahattā darshāvavā temnu draṣhṭānt āpe chhe. 2. Varṇāshram-dharmamā chusta rahenār pavitra brāhmaṇ. Ek vār Shrījī Mahārāje ramūjmā kahyu, “Bhaṭṭajī! Ame tamārā Lāljīmā rahīne thāḷ jamyā.” Tyāre teo kahe, “Arar! Mahārāj! Mārā Lāljīne abhaḍāvyā!” Bhaṭṭajīne Bhagwānpaṇāno nishchay kharo paṇ ā lokmā kāṭhī-darabāronī sāthe emanā hāthnu Mahārāj jame tethī Mahārājne ‘vaṭalāī gayelā’ teo mānatā. Ām, sattvaguṇīne paṇ nishchaymā khāmī rahe chhe. Bhaṭṭajīne satsangnu khūb mamatva. Mahārāje sau pratham dharmādā ugharāvavā temane rākhelā. Shikṣhāpatrīmā Mahārāje temano ullekh karyo chhe. (Swāmīnī vāt 4/80nī pādṭīp) 3. Duryodhanne adharmano pāsh hato, te Shrī Kṛuṣhṇanī dharmanī vāt paṇ mānyo nahī. Yudhiṣhṭhirne dharmano pāsh hato to teo yuddhamā, “Naro vā kunjaro vā,” jeṭalu ardh-satya bolyā ne pachhī glāni pāmyā. Khud Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa Bhagwāne samajāvyā chhatā Arjun jevā nihsanshayī thayā nahī.

Swami said, “Dharmaswarupānand Brahmachāri was not able to rid thoughts of whether his food and water were prepared according to or against the methods of the scriptures.” Then, Harishankarbhai asked, “Can such doubts remain even in those with ātma-nishthā?” Swami answered, “They do not remain in one with ātma-nishthā. If they have other deficiencies, doubts will remain. If one has ātma-nishthā, but like Mayārām Bhatta, their deep impressions of being a rishi from previous birth will not be eradicated.” On that, Swami spoke of the deep impressions that were etched in Duryodhan’s and Yudhishthir’s jiva.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Duryodhan had adharma deeply impressed in his soul. He did not accept Krishna’s talks of dharma. Yudhishthir had dharma deeply impressed in his soul. He experienced despair after speaking a trivial lie - that Ashwatthāmā could be a man or an elephant. Even Krishna spoke to him about coming out of his despair but he was unable to rid his doubts like Arjun.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.148

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 148 · Chapter 5 · Verse 148

Upāsanā ne āgnā be rākhavā. Te upāsanāmā tathā dhyānmā nishchay chhe ne āgnāmā brahmarūp mānavu eṭale mūḷ agnān je kāraṇ deh teno nāsh thāy chhe. Ām samajāvīne vātu karavī te to Satyugmā paṇ koīe karyu nathī.

Preserve the two – upāsanā and observance of God’s commands. In upāsanā and meditation lies firm conviction in God’s form and in God’s commands lies the firm conviction that one is brahmarup, such that the root of ignorance – the causal body – is destroyed. Explain in this way and talk. Nobody has done this, not even in Satya-yug.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.149

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 149 · Chapter 5 · Verse 149

Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Gnāne karīne nirlep rahevāy chhe ke viṣhay na bhogave teṇe karīne nirlep rahevāy chhe?” Swāmī bolyā je, “Gnāne karīne nirlep rahevāy chhe. Paṇ man, indriyu ne deh e traṇ prakāre pativratāpaṇu jāy chhe, te be prakāre to āpaṇāthī paḷe tem nathī paṇ dehe karīne pāḷavu eṭale traṇe prakāre pāḷī chūkyā.”

Harishankarbhai asked, “Can one remain unaffected (by material objects) through spiritual wisdom? Or is it by not enjoying the material objects that one remains unaffected?” Swami said, “By spiritual wisdom one can remain unaffected, but fidelity (towards God) is lost in three ways – through the mind, senses and body. Of them the first two are difficult to observe. But observe with the body and it is like observing with all three.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.150

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 150 · Chapter 5 · Verse 150

Kāī joīe nahī tene dukh na āve. Ne joīe ne nirmānīpaṇu rahe to dukh na āve. Ne sansṛutinu tathā bhoḷapnu e be prakārnu dukh āve chhe.

One who does not need anything encounters no misery; and one who needs but remains humble does not encounter misery. Misery results from two things – worldly activities and gullibility.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.151

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 151 · Chapter 5 · Verse 151

Āgnāmā rahe ne chheṭe chhe to paṇ amārā ḍholiyānī pāse chhe ne āgnā nathī pāḷato te pāse chhe to paṇ chheṭo chhe. Te game tevo gnānī hashe, hetvāḷo hashe ne moṭero hashe paṇ āgnā lope to satsangmā na rahevāy. Tyā draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, patang uḍāḍvāthī chheṭo gayo chhe paṇ dorī hāthmā chhe to samīpmā ja chhe. Tem āgnārūpī dorī hāthmā chhe to Mahārājnī pāse ja chhe.

“One who follows the commands and lives far away is still near my seat. While, one who does not follow the commands may be near but is still far away. So, no matter how much knowledge one may have, affection one may have or great one may be, but if commands are transgressed it is not possible to stay in the Satsang for long.” Then, Swami gave an example, “The kite may appear to go far away, but as long as the string is in the hand of the flier it is nearby. Similarly, if the string in the form of the commands (of God and his holy Sadhu) is in the hand (i.e. they are observed), then one is near Maharaj.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.152

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 152 · Chapter 5 · Verse 152

Madhyanu Pāchmu Vachanāmṛut tathā Vartālnu Termu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvī vāt karī je, “Indriyu-antahkaraṇ hṛudākāshmā rākhavā eṭale Bhagwānmā vṛutti rahī, ne deh paryant dekhāy nahī paṇ sādhan khoṭu paḍe nahī. Deh mūkatā ja dekhāī āve.”

Gunātitānand Swāmi has Vachanāmruts Gadhadā II-5 and Vartāl 13 read and said, “When one’s indriyas and the antahkaran remain withdrawn in one’s heart, then one’s mind remains on God, even if one cannot see God’s form in their heart. This endeavor will not be in vain. When one is ready to leave their body, God’s form will be seen.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.153

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 153 · Chapter 5 · Verse 153

Manjībhāīe pūchhyu je, “Bhagwānne dekhavā e adhik chhe ke gnāne karīne sthiti karavī te adhik chhe?” Swāmīe kahyu je, “Dekhavā karatā gnāne karīne sthiti karavī te adhik chhe.” Te upar Parvatbhāī, Kṛupānand Swāmī, Muktānand Swāmī vagere gnānnī sthitivāḷānī vāt karī je, “Emane samādhi nahotī ne dekhatā paṇ nahī ne Parvatbhāī hāl āpaṇe samajīe chhīe tem samajatā. Māṭe potāne brahmarūp mānavu ne mārāmā Bhagwān rahyā ja chhe em mānavu. E gnānnī sthiti chhe te adhik chhe. Temā vighna nathī.” Te upar Sachchidānand Swāmī vagere samādhinī sthitivāḷā dekhatā hatā tene paṇ dukh āvyā,1 tenī vāt karī. Māṭe potānī samajaṇ Kṛupānand Swāmīnī peṭhe chhapāḍvānī vāt karī ne premī thāvu nahī em kahyu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sachchidānand Swāmīne Mahārāj viṣhe atishay prem hato. Svadhām jatī veḷā Mahārāje saune kahelu ke koī dehno pāt na kare. Paṇ Sachchidānand Swāmī to Mahārāj pahelā Akṣhardhāmmā pahonchyā. Mahārāje temane pesavā ja na dīdhā. Pāchhā dehmā mokalyā. Svāmī kahe chhe: Prem karatā paṇ gnānnī sthiti adhik chhe. Gnānīne Bhagwānnu sāmīpya akhanḍ rahe chhe.

Manjibhāi asked, “Which is greater: to see God (in one’s heart) or to achieve an elevated state with gnān?” Swami answered, “To achieve an elevate state with gnān is greater than seeing God.”1 On that, Swami gave the examples of Parvatbhāi, Krupānand Swāmi, Muktānand Swāmi, and others who achieved an elevated state of gnān and said, “They did not experience samādhi and did not see God; yet Parvatbhāi understood as we understand today. Therefore, understand your form to be brahmarup and God resides within you. That is the elevated state of gnān, which is greater. There are no obstacles in this.” On that, Swami gave examples of Sachchidānand Swāmi and others who experienced samādhi and yet encountered misery. Then he said one should hide their understanding like Krupānand Swāmi and one should not become a devotee of love.2 Footnotes: 1. 1. Here, an elevated state of gnān means understanding one’s ātmā to be brahmarup and beholding Parabrahma in the ātmā. 2. With these words, Swāmi is not forbidding attachment to God and the Sant with love. Rather, he is cautioning against love without gnān or understanding. Love without gnān does not last. Shriji Maharaj has explained this in Vachanamrut Sarangpur 1 and Sarangpur 15.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.154

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 154 · Chapter 5 · Verse 154

Āvī vātu kyāī thātī nathī. Māṭe viṣhay khoṭā thaī rahyā chhe ne vāsanā jevu jaṇāy chhe te to dehdhārīne hoy. Te upar Sadāshivnī havelī baḷyānu draṣhṭānt dīdhu ne bhāī Swāmīne niṣhṭhā samajāvī,1 te vāt karī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Rāmānand Swāmīnā shiṣhya kahevātā ā bhāī Ātmānand Swāmīne Shrījī Mahārājne viṣhe sarvoparī bhāv thato nahoto. Teo 116 varṣhnī vaynā vṛuddha thayā. Guṇātītānand Swāmī temanī pāse Aṇiyāḷī gāme padhāryā ne āṭalo lāmbo samay dehmā rākhavā badal Mahārājno hetu samajāvyo ke, “Kasar ṭāḷyā vagar Mahārāj Akṣhardhāmmā nahī laī jāy.” Vaḷī, Mahārājnā ja kahelā prasango yād karāvī samajāvyu ke, “Mahārāj badhā avatārothī shreṣhṭh avatārī chhe.” Temane sarvoparīpaṇānī niṣhṭhā thaī ne antarmā sukh sukh vartāvā lāgyu. Teo Guṇātītānand Swāmīne potānā pattarnī prasādī āpatā; paṇ mahimā samajātā temaṇe nirmānī thaī Swāmīnā pattarnī prasādī sāmethī līdhī.

Such talks do not take place anywhere. Due to these talks, worldly desires have been negated. Yet it appears that they remain – but that is natural for those with a body. On this, he gave the examples of Sadāshiv’s mansion which was burnt and Bhai Atmanand Swami1 who developed true conviction in Maharaj’s form. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sadashiv was a respected businessman from the port town of Khambhat in Gujarat. He had a beautiful haveli built. For its inauguration he went to Vadodara to invite Gopalanand Swami. Swami asked him to stay with him for 15 days and talked about the perishable nature of the world. In the meantime, a letter arrived informing that the haveli had been burnt down. Sadashiv said, “Swami! If I had not stayed here to listen to your spiritual talks, I, too, would have perished along with the haveli. That is how attached I was to it. But by listening to your talks, it has been burnt away from within.” Bhai Atmanand Swami was a sadhu of Ramanand Swami. When he was 116 years old, Gunatitanand Swami visited him at Vagad where he was living. Gunatitanand Swami explained that without understanding Shriji Maharaj as Supreme God it is not possible to go to Akshardham. Then he explained the true form of Maharaj to Bhai Atmanand Swami, who then developed faith in the supreme form of Maharaj. As a result he experienced great peace within and then left his mortal body and went to Akshardham.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.155

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 155 · Chapter 5 · Verse 155

Dharma satsangmā rākhe, ne vairāgye karīne nāshvantpaṇu dekhāy eṭale bandhāy nahī, ne gnān je ātmaniṣhṭhā teṇe karīne dehnā sukh-dukhmā na levāy paṇ mokṣha to upāsanāe karīne thāy chhe.

Dharma ensures one remains in Satsang, vairāgya ensures one does not become attached to perishable objects, and gnān and ātma-nishthā ensure one is not affected by the joy and misery of the body. However, liberation is due to upāsanā.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. On the spiritual path, dharma, gnān, vairāgya, and ātma-nishthā are certainly necessary. However, Swami is placing greater importance on upāsanā, which is like the digit ‘1’, whereas the other spiritual endeavors are like zeros. Without upāsanā, these qualities amount to nil. However, when each quality is developed alongside upāsanā, their value increases ten-fold.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.156

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 156 · Chapter 5 · Verse 156

Antahkaraṇ shekhchallīnā khoraḍā jevu na rākhavu,1 ek Bhagwānrūpī ja thāmbhalo rākhavo, paṇ ghaṇā ṭekā rākhavā nahī. Ne kalyāṇne arthe āsharo ne het be ja chhe. Ne āgnā tathā niyam pāḷe chhe te ja ātmaniṣhṭh chhe ne niyam nathī pāḷato tene ātmaniṣhṭh samajavo nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ek shekhachallī ghīno ghāḍavo māthe mūkī ek gāmthī bīje gām jato hato. Raste chālatā teṇe ‘Rūpiyo mahenatāṇu maḷashe’ e vichārmā bakarī kharīdvāthī mānḍī paraṇvā sudhīnā manasūbā karyā. Chhevaṭe pote ek sheṭh banī dukāne beṭho hashe ne khūb gharākī hashe tyāre chhokaro jamavā bolāvavā āvashe, e vakhate pote māthu dhuṇāvī nā pāḍashe. Ām, vichārmā māthu dhuṇāvyu ne ghīno ghāḍavo chhūṭī gayo ne nīche paḍī fūṭī gayo. Ām, teṇe ghāḍavāmāthī ghar (khoraḍu) sudhīnā sankalp karyā je mithyā hatā. Māṭe antahkaraṇmā āvā khoṭā vichāro - ādhāro mūkī Bhagwānne ja rākhavā.

Do not let the inner faculties become like the house of Shekchalli.1 Keep only one support in the form of God, but do not keep many supports. And for moksha, firm refuge in and profound affection for God are the only two things. Only one who follows his commands and observes the codes of conduct has ātmā-realization. So, do not understand one who does not observe the injunctions to have ātmā-realization. Footnotes: 1. 1. Once a servant named Shekhchalli was carrying a pot of ghee for his master. Shekhchalli began daydreaming about what he would do with the one rupee he would earn for this service. He thought that with the money, he will buy a goat and sell its milk. This will earn him more money and so he will expand his business. Then he’ll buy a shop and move into a big house. Then at lunchtime his children will call him and he will be so busy that he’ll shake his head and say, “Not now.” As he dreamt like this, Shekhchalli really shook his head and the pot of ghee fell off his head. The master shouted at him, “Fool, you’ve spilt my ghee.” Shekhchalli replied, “Only your pot of ghee has been broken, but, for me, all my dreams have been shattered.” The message here is that one should keep a single focus on God and not allow one’s mind to continually wander.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.157

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 157 · Chapter 5 · Verse 157

Ātmānā gnāne karīne kaivalyārthī thayo hashe to paṇ chyutbhāvne pāme. Paṇ jene em hoy je, hu pragaṭ Bhagwānno chhu ne Bhagwān mārā chhe evo draḍhāv thayo tene koīnī bīk rahetī nathī. Kāḷ, karma, māyā, dev-ṛuṇ, pitri-ṛuṇ, manuṣhya-ṛuṇ1 e sarvethī mukāīne Bhagwānne pāmī rahyo chhe. Ā loknu sukh-dukh bey mithyā chhe, te vyavahār chhe te dukh-sukh to āve paṇ roṭalā na maḷe te dā'ḍe amane pūchhavu. Jene roṭalā joītā hoy teṇe dashamo bhāg kāḍhavo. Footnotes: 1. 1. Hindu dharmashāstramā deva-ṛuṇ, ṛuṣhi-ṛuṇ ne pitṛu-ṛuṇ - traṇ mukhya gaṇāvyā chhe. Tenā peṭā ruṇmā atithi-ṛuṇ, manuṣhya-ṛuṇ ane bhūt-ṛuṇ - em traṇ gaṇāvyā chhe. Ā ṛuṇthī mukta thavā māṭe manuṣhye shāstravihit panch-yagnarūpī karma karavā paḍe chhe. Yagnthī dev, Vednā ke shāstronā abhyās-parishīlanthī ṛuṣhi, putrotpattithī pitṛu, satkār-vivekthī atithi, prem ne sadbhāvthī manuṣhya ane dayā-karuṇāthī bhūt prāṇīo santoṣhāy chhe. Bhagavān ne Santno draḍh āshray karavāthī ā badhā ṛuṇ āpoāp feḍāī jāy chhe.

One who has attained the spiritual knowledge of ātmā may still sink and decline spiritually. But, one who firmly believes, “I belong to the manifest God and God is mine,” does not fear anyone. He is freed from the influence of kāl, karma, māyā, debt to the deities, ancestors and mankind (as described in the scriptures) and is in the process of attaining God. The happiness and misery of this world are both perishable. And because one has worldly interactions, happiness and misery will be encountered. But the day you do not get food to eat, tell me. Those who want food should donate one-tenth of their income to God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.158

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 158 · Chapter 5 · Verse 158

Be varas vagar varsāde dāṇā pūrā karyā ne megh varse em nathī paṇ satsangīne arthe varsāvīe chhīe.

Two years have passed without any rains but we have provided grains. And it seems unlikely to rain. But, for the sake of satsangis, we will make it rain.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.159

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 159 · Chapter 5 · Verse 159

Ā sarvee Bhagwān bhajavā sāru ja deh dharyā chhe ne badhāy jūnā chhe; paṇ navo koī nathī eṭale āhī avāy chhe; ne Bhagwānmā ne Sādhumā vṛutti na taṇāy ne strīmā taṇāya te to Bhagwānnī māyānu baḷ chhe; bīju emā kaī nathī.

All these devotees have taken birth just to worship God. They are all veterans; none are new and so it is possible to come here. But, that one’s mind is not drawn towards God and his Sadhu and is drawn to women is due to the power of God’s māyā. There is nothing else to it.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.160

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 160 · Chapter 5 · Verse 160

‘Hu kuṭumbano nathī, lokno nathī, dehno nathī, hu to Bhagwānno chhu’ em mānavu. Ne ā samāgam karyā vinā to Golokmā javāshe paṇ Mahārāj pāse nahī javāy.

Believe that, “I do not belong to the family, the world, the body and that I belong to God. Without this association with the Sadhu, it is possible to go to Golok but not possible to go to Maharaj.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.161

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 161 · Chapter 5 · Verse 161

Bhajan karatā karatā deh sūī jāy ne indriyu virām pāmī jāy ne jāgīe tyāre bhajan thāy chhe em khabar paḍe.

While offering worship, the body goes to sleep and the senses come to a rest and when one wakes up, one realizes that devotion is being offered.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.162

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 162 · Chapter 5 · Verse 162

Lākh-karoḍya kīḍiyo nīkaḷī hoy temā nānī-moṭī jaṇātī nathī, tem māhātmyathī moṭī draṣhṭi thāy chhe tyāre sāro-naraso viṣhay draṣhṭimā āvato nathī ne dehdhārī hoy te bhogave to kharā.

When hundreds of thousands and tens of millions of ants are out, it is difficult to know which of them is small or big. Similarly, when through knowledge of the glory of God, one gains a higher insight, then neither good nor bad worldly pleasures can tempt. But because one has a body, one does use them.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.163

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 163 · Chapter 5 · Verse 163

Satya, hit ne priya evu vachan bolavu ne upekṣhārahit bolavu paṇ āgrahthī vachan kahevu nahī.

Speak truthful, beneficial and affectionate words, and speak without contempt, but do not speak with insistence.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.164

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 164 · Chapter 5 · Verse 164

Ākuti-chiti-chāpalyarahitā niṣhparigrahāhā... e chosaṭh lakṣhaṇe yukta je Sādhu1 tenī sāthe joḍāvu eṭale e ekmā chosaṭh āvī jāy. Āpaṇne zāzu samajāy nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Santnā 64 lakṣhaṇ: 1. Dayāḷu, 2. Kṣhamāvāḷā, 3. Sarvajīvnu hit ichchhanārā, 4. Ṭāḍh, taḍako ādik sahan karanārā, 5. Koīnā paṇ guṇmā doṣh nahī jonārā, 6. Shānt, 7. Jeno shatru nathī thayo evā, 8. Adekhāī tathā vairthī rahit, 9. Mān tathā matsarthī rahit, 10. Bījāne mān āpanārā, 11. Priya ane satya bolnārā, 12. Kām, krodh, lobh tathā madthī rahit, 13. Aham-mamatva-rahit, 14. Svadharmamā draḍh rahenārā, 15. Dambha-rahit, 16. Andar ane bahār pavitra rahenārā, 17. Deh tathā indriyone damnārā, 18. Saraḷ swabhāvavāḷā, 19. Ghaṭit bolnārā, 20. Jitendriya tathā pramād-rahit, 21. Sukh-dukhādi-dvandva-rahit, 22. Dhīrajvāḷā, 23. Karmendriyo tathā gnānendriyonī chapaḷtāthī rahit, 24. Padārthnā sangrah-rahit, 25. Bodh karavāmā nipuṇ, 26. Ātmaniṣhṭhāvāḷā, 27. Sarvane upakār karavāvāḷā, 28. Koī paṇ prakārnā bhay rahit, 29. Koī paṇ prakārnī āshārahit, 30. Vyasan-rahit, 31. Shraddhāvāḷā, 32. Udār, 33. Tapasvī, 34. Pāparahit, 35. Grāmyakathā ne vārtā nahī sāmbhaḷnārā, 36. Satshāstranā nirantar abhyāsvāḷā, 37. Māyik panchaviṣhay-rahit, 38. Āstik buddhivāḷā, 39. Sat-asatnā vivekvāḷā, 40. Madya-mānsādiknā sansarge rahit, 41. Draḍh-vratvāḷā, 42. Koīnī chāḍī-chugalī nahī karanārā, 43. Kapaṭ-rahit, 44. Koīnī chhānī vātne prakaṭ nahī karanārā, 45. Nidrājit, 46. āhārjit, 47. Santoṣhvāḷā, 48. Sthir buddhivāḷā, 49. Hinsārahit vṛuttivāḷā, 50. Tṛuṣhṇārahit. 51. Sukh-dukhmā sambhāvavāḷā, 52. Akārya karavāmā lājvāḷā, 53. Potānā vakhāṇ nahī karanārā, 54. Bījānī nindā nahī karanārā, 55. Yathārth brahmacharya pāḷnārā, 56. Yam tathā niyamvāḷā, 57. Āsanjit, 58. Prāṇajit, 59. Bhagwānnā draḍh āshrayvāḷā, 60. Bhagwadbhakti-parāyaṇ, 61. Bhagwān arthe ja sarva kriyā karanārā, 62. Bhagwānnī mūrtimā dhyān-parāyaṇ rahenārā, 63. Bhagwānnī līlākathānu shravaṇ-kīrtan karanārā, 64. Bhagwānnī bhakti vinā ek paṇ kṣhaṇ vyartha nahī javā denārā. [Satsangijīvan (Harigītā) 1: 25-37] (Swāmīnī vāt: 1/171nī pādṭīp)

One should attach oneself to a Sadhu possessing the 64 qualities1 mentioned in the shloka Ākuti-chiti-chāpalyarahitā niṣhparigrahāhā ||. In this, one achieves everything. We do not understand much else. Footnotes: 1. 1. The 64 qualities of a sadhu (as mentioned in the Satsangijivan/Harigita: 1/25-37) are, one who: 1. Is compassionate, 2. Is forgiving, 3. Wishes the betterment of all jivas, 4. Tolerates cold, heat, etc., 5. Does not look at the flaws in others’ virtues, 6. Is tranquil, 7. Does not have an enemy, 8. Is devoid of jealousy and animosity, 9. Is free of ego and envy, 10. Honors others, Expand all qualities 11. Speaks kindly and truthfully, 12. Is free of lust, anger, greed, and arrogance, 13. Is free of I-ness and my-ness, 14. Is firm in one’s personal dharma, 15. Is free of pretentiousness, 16. Maintains physical and mental purity, 17. Punishes his body and indriyas, 18. Possesses an agreeable nature, 19. Speaks only as necessary, 20. Has control over the indriyas and free of laziness, 21. Is free from the duality of happiness and misery, 22. Possesses patience, 23. Is free from over-activity of karma-indriyas and gnan-indriyas, 24. Does not collect material objects, 25. Is an expert in instruction, 26. Possesses ātmā-realization, 27. Benefits everyone, 28. Is free of all types of fear, 29. Is free from any expectations , 30. Is free of addictions, 31. Possesses faith, 32. Is generous, 33. Is austere, 34. Is free of sin, 35. Does not listen to gossip, 36. Constantly engages in scriptural study, 37. Is free from indulging in worldly pleasures, 38. Possesses a theist intellect, 39. Possesses discretion of truth and false, 40. Is free of alcohol and meat consumption, 41. Is firm in observances of vrats, 42. Does not gossip, 43. Is free of deceit, 44. Does not reveal other’s secrets, 45. Has conquered sleep, 46. Has conquered taste, 47. Is content, 48. Has a stable mind, 49. Is inclined toward nonviolence, 50. Has no desires, 51. Has equanimity in happiness and misery, 52. Is ashamed in doing misdeeds, 53. Does not compliment himself, 54. Does not slander others, 55. Observes celibacy perfectly, 56. Has self-control and restraint, 57. Has complete control of his body, 58. Has control of his breath (and thus internal faculties), 59. Has firm refuge of God, 60. Is inclined toward devotion of God, 61. Does all activities for God’s sake, 62. Is inclined to remain in meditation of God’s murti, 63. Listens to God’s divine incidents, 64. Does not let one second pass without devotion to God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.165

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 165 · Chapter 5 · Verse 165

Mahārāj ām besatā. Āṭhe dhām joyā paṇ āvā Sādhu kyāī nathī ne enā darshanne Bhagwān paṇ ichchhe chhe; ne ā Sādhumā to Bhagwān rahyā chhe.

Maharaj used to sit like this. He inspected (all) eight abodes but nowhere is there a Sadhu like this. Even God desires his darshan. And God resides in this Sadhu.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.166

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 166 · Chapter 5 · Verse 166

“Satsang chār prakārthī chhe. Temā pratham prakār e chhe je, Paramātmānu gnān, ātmānu gnān tathā sānkhyavichārnu gnān; e traṇ gnānno satsang to bākīnā traṇe prakārthī uttam chhe ne bījo prakār e chhe je, dhyān tathā pativratāpaṇu; ne trījo āgnā pāḷavī te, ne chotho āsharo je Sādhu sāthe joḍāvu. Ā chhellā traṇ prakār pratham prakārnā traṇ gnān tethī ūtartā chhe.” Pachhī Nathu Paṭele pūchhyu je, “Upāsanā kem samajavī?” Tyāre Swāmīe kahyu je, “Upāsanā to shāstra, potāno vichār ne Sādhu e traṇthī samajavī.”

Satsang is of four types. Of them, the first type is the knowledge of Paramatma, knowledge of ātmā and knowledge about the perishable nature of the world – this satsang of the three aspects of knowledge is superior to the other three types. The second type is that of meditation and fidelity to one’s chosen God. The third is to observe God’s commands and the fourth is to seek refuge and establish rapport with a God-realized Sadhu. These last three types of satsang are inferior to the first type consisting of the three aspects of knowledge described above. Then Nathu Patel asked, “How should upāsanā be understood?” Then Swami said, “Upāsanā should be understood from the scriptures, one’s own thoughts and the Sadhu.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.167

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 167 · Chapter 5 · Verse 167

Sang thāy tenā guṇ āve chhe; māṭe Bhagwānno tathā Sādhuno sang to karavo ne bījāno to jem Bhīmsenne Dhṛutrāṣhṭra maḷyā hatā tem karavo;1 ne svād vagere atimā dukh chhe, māṭe ati thāvā devu nahī. Ati sarvatra varjayet. Footnotes: 1. 1. Dhṛutrāṣhṭre Pānḍavonā vijay pachhī parākramnā abhinandan āpavā ane bheṭvā māṭe Bhīmne bolāvyo. Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa ā andhanu kapaṭ kaḷī gayā ne lokhanḍnu pūtaḷu pahelethī taiyār karāvī Bhīm sāthe mokalyu ne tene kahyu ke, “Kākā bheṭvānu kahe tyāre ā pūtaḷu temanī āgaḷ dharī devu.” Teo bheṭyā ne pūtaḷānā chūrechūrā karī nākhyā. Bheṭvānu nimitta jem judu hoī shake chhe, tem Bhagwān ne Sādhu sivāy bījāno sang ā rīte nirleppaṇe karavo.

A person develops qualities according to the company he keeps. Therefore, one should certainly associate with God and his Sadhu. Associate with others as Bhimsen did when he met Dhritrashtra.1 And taste, etc., in excess, cause misery. Therefore, do not let desires become intense. ‘Ati sarvatra varjayet.’2 Footnotes: 1. 1. Embrace worldly activities as Dhritrashtra embraced Bhimsen (Bhim, the second oldest Pandav) after the Mahabharat War. After their victory in the war, the Pandavas went to meet Dhritrashtra. To congratulate them, Dhritrashtra asked to embrace Bhim, who had killed his son Duryodhan. Krishna had warned them in advance that if Dhritrashtra asks to embrace, place a metallic statue of Duryodhan in front of him. So, Bhim placed the statue and Dhritrashtra embraced it so hard, he broke it into pieces. His true intention was to kill Bhim because Bhim had killed his son Duryodhan. 2. Give up extremes in all cases.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.168

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 168 · Chapter 5 · Verse 168

Kṛupānand Swāmī vagere moṭā sādhunā jeṭalu āpaṇāmā baḷ nahī, māṭe Moṭā Sādhu sāthe vād mūkī agiyār niyam pāḷavā eṭale temanā jeṭalā baḷiyā thavāshe. Ā sang evo chhe ne ā sangmā upāsanā, dharma vagere sarve chhe. Kāī bākī nathī te upar Gaḍhaḍā Madhya Prakaraṇnu Tresaṭhmu Vachanāmṛut Baḷ Pāmavānu vanchāvyu.

We do not have strength like that of Krupanand Swami and other seniors sadhus, so instead of competing with them, we should observe the eleven niyams and we will become as strong as they are. The company of this Sadhu is such that upāsanā, dharma, etc. are all included. Nothing is left. On this Vachanamrut Gadhada II-63 (Gaining Strength) was read.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.169

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 169 · Chapter 5 · Verse 169

Sādhan manne jāṇye kare chhe tyā sudhī mannu rāj ṭaḷatu nathī; māṭe Bhagwān ne Sādhu kahe tem karavu. Agiyār niyammā rahevu, emā mūḷ nāsh pāme chhe eṭale faḷ, fūl thāy nahī ne baḷe jitātu nathī paṇ kaḷe jitāy chhe; te upar Sārangpurnu Sātmu Vachanāmṛut Naimiṣhāraṇyanu vanchāvyu.

As long as one performs spiritual endeavours according to the wishes of the mind, the rule of the mind does not cease. Therefore, act according to what God and his Sadhu say. By observing the eleven codes of conduct, the root of bondage is destroyed and so there are no negative consequences. The mind cannot be won over by force but can be won by technique. On this, he had Vachanamrut Sarangpur-7 (‘Naimishāranya Kshetra’) read.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.170

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 170 · Chapter 5 · Verse 170

Ā Sādhunā sangthī sarve moṭā thāy chhe ne nirantar besīne bhajan kare evo koī hoy to teno ve’vār chalāvavo amārī koṭmā chhe. Atyāre to ṭhīk chhe, Bhagwān chhe ne Sādhu paṇ chhe.

By associating with the Sadhu all attain greatness. If someone sits continuously to offer devotion, then it is my responsibility to run his worldly affairs.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.171

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 171 · Chapter 5 · Verse 171

Bhagwān tathā Sādhunā shabdathī deh1 bandhāy chhe, te dehe karīne Bhagwān bhajāy chhe ne potānī samajaṇ mūkīne Bhagwān tathā Sādhunī samajaṇ pramāṇe chālavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Nādsṛuṣhṭino brahmamay deh.

The body is formed by the words of God and his Sadhu. And with this body, God is worshipped. So, one’s own understanding should be forsaken and one should live according to the understanding of God and his Sadhu.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.172

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 172 · Chapter 5 · Verse 172

Swarūpniṣhṭhā, gnānniṣhṭhā, ātmaniṣhṭhā ne dharmaniṣhṭhā e chār niṣhṭhāmā swarūpniṣhṭhā ek hoy to bākī traṇe tenā peṭāmā āvī jāy.

Firm faith in the manifest form of God, firm faith in spiritual knowledge, firm faith in knowledge of the ātmā and firm faith in dharma – out of these four types of faith, even if only resolute faith in God’s form is present, then the remaining three are included.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.173

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 173 · Chapter 5 · Verse 173

Akṣhardhāmnu ek machchhariyu mūtaryu chhe temā sarve lok sukhī chhe, eṭale Akṣharnu machchhariyu je Mūḷ Puruṣh tenī laghushankāmā sarve lok sukhī chhe.

One insect from Akshardhām ‘urinated’, and in that all of the worlds are enjoying that happiness; meaning, the insect of Akshar is Mul Purush and all of the worlds are happy living in his ‘urine’.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. In these direct words, Swami is comparing the bliss of Akshardham - which transcends māyā, is everlasting, and eternal - to the happiness of the rest of the worlds - which is insignificant, trivial, momentary, and ephemeral. Therefore, he refers to the happiness of the rest of the worlds as ‘urine’ of Mul Purush, who is one of the akshar-muktas of Akshardham responsible for impregnating Prakruti to create the infinite brahmānds. (Swami refers to Mul Purush as an insect because his greatness pales in comparison to the greatness of Aksharbrahman and Parabrahman. Swami also says similar words in Swamini Vat - 6/289.)

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.174

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 174 · Chapter 5 · Verse 174

Mukta, mumukṣhu, viṣhayī ne pāmar e chār prakārnā bhakta chhe temā pāmar hoy te koī padārthne arthe Bhagwānne bhaje ne viṣhayī hoy te ā loknā sukhno tyāg kare ne bījā sukhne ichchhe chhe ne mumukṣhu hoy te kaivalyārthīnā sukhne1 ichchhe ne mukta hoy te ek Bhagwānnī mūrtine ja ichchhe chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Parabrahmanī bhakti-upāsanā rahit.

Mukta, mumukshu, vishayi and pāmar are four types of devotees. Of them, a pāmar devotee worships God for some material objects; a vishayi renounces the pleasures of this world but desires other pleasures (of heaven, etc.); a mumukshu wishes for the bliss of a kaivalyārthi; and a mukta wishes only for the murti of God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.175

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 175 · Chapter 5 · Verse 175

Ajāmeḷne santno samāgam thayo ne niyam rākhavānu kahyu tyāre kahe je, “Mārāthī paḷe nahī.” To paṇ sante anugrah karīne chhokarānu nām ‘Nārāyaṇ’ dharāvīne paṇ kalyāṇ karyu. Māṭe Bhagwān maḷyā chhe tethī kāī karavu rahyu nathī.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Shīl, sadāchār ane sad‌guṇothī yukta pavitra brāhmaṇ Ajāmilnu antahkaraṇ ek veshyānā sansargathī bhraṣhṭa thayu ane tenu sadāchāramāthī patan thayu. Ajāmilanā putromāno nāno putra tene priya hato ke jenu nām Nārāyaṇ hatu. Ajāmilno antakāḷ āvyo, Yamdūto dekhāyā. Teonā bihāmaṇā swarūpthī trās pāmīne Ajāmile potānā ati vahālā dīkarā Nārāyaṇne būm pāḍī. Ā shabdathī Vaikunṭhnā pārṣhado tenī sahāyamā āvyā. Yamdūtoe kahyu, “Āṇe samagra jīvan daramyān pāpāchār karyo chhe ne prāyashchitta paṇ nathī karyu.” Tyāre pārṣhadoe Yamdūtone Bhagwānnā nāmno mahimā varṇavatā kahyu, “Teṇe potānā pāponu sampūrṇa prāyashchitta karī līdhu chhe, kāraṇ ke teṇe Bhagwānnā param kalyāṇmay nāmnu uchchāraṇ karyu chhe.” Em kahī Yamdūtone tyāthī parat javā jaṇāvyu. Yamdūto tyāthī pāchhā gayā. Pārṣhado ane Yamdūtono samvād sāmbhaḷī Ajāmilne atyant pashchāttāp thayo. Bhagwānnā nāmno pratāp joīne teṇe Hardwārmā jaīne indriyonī vṛutti viṣhayamāthī pāchhī vāḷīne Bhagwān taraf rākhī sheṣh jīvan bhaktimay vitāvyu ne ante Vaikunṭhne pāmyo. [Bhāgwat: 6/1/20 - 6/2/44] Veshyā nondh: Veshyā(Gaṇikā)nā ghaṇā badhā ākhyāno prāpta thāya chhe. Temānthī ek dṛuṣhṭānt rūpe ahī prastut chhe. Prāchīn kāḷnā ek nagarmā Jīvantī nāmnī veshyā rahetī hatī. Te vyabhichār vṛuttithī potānu bharaṇ-poṣhaṇ karyā karatī. Ek vakhat ek popaṭ vechavāvāḷāthī tene popaṭnu bachchu kharīdyu. Veshyāne koī santān nahotu eṭale te popaṭnu putranī jem pālan karatī, roj savāre uṭhīne tene “Rām Rām” bolavānu shīkhavāḍatī. Popaṭ bahu sundar swarothī “Rām Rām” bolatā shīkhī gayo. Veshyā paṇ samay maḷatā tenī pāse āvīne sāthe sāthe “Rām Rām” bolatī. Ek vār ek ja samaye banneno antakāḷ āvyo. “Rām” nāmnu uchchāraṇ karatā karatā bannee prāṇ tyajī dīdhā. Veshyā to pāpī hatī ja, paṇ popaṭ paṇ pūrvano pāpī hato eṭale bannene levā māṭe Yamnā bhayankar dūto āvyā. Bījī bāju Bhagwān Viṣhṇunā pārṣhado paṇ te bannene levā āvyā. Banne vachche vikhavād thayo ane ghor yuddha thayu. Ante Bhagwān Viṣhṇunā pārṣhado Yamdūtone harāvīne te bannene Vaikunṭhamā laī gayā. Yamdūtoe nirāsh thaīne Yamrājā pāse jaīne badhī vigat jaṇāvī, tyāre Yamrājā temane samajāve chhe ke veshyā ane popaṭe antakāḷe Bhagwānnā nāmnu uchchāraṇ karyu māṭe te Naraknā adhikārī hovā chhatā puṇyashāḷī banī Bhagwānnā dhāmmā gayā chhe.

Ajamil attained the company of a sadhu and when told to undertake an observance he said, “I cannot observe it.” But still, the sadhu blessed him and granted him moksha by naming his son ‘Narayan’. Thus, we have attained God and so there is nothing left to do.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Possesssing good character, discipline and virtues, the pious brahmin Ajamil’s mind became corrupt when he encountered a prostitute and he fell from grace. Ajamil’s dearest son’s name was Narayan. When Ajamil was about to die, he saw the terrifying Yamduts come to take him to narak. He immediately yelled his son Narayan’s name. Vishnu Bhagwan’s pārshads from Vaikunth heard the cry and came to rescue Ajamil from the Yamduts. Yamduts argued, “He has sinned all his life and has not atoned for his sins. He is worthy of narak.” The pārshads countered by telling them the glory of God’s name, “He has completely atoned for his sins by taking the name of God - Narayan - which, if uttered, is the cause of liberation.” The Yamduts returned to narak. Listening to the conversation between the pārshads of Vaikunth and Yamduts of narak, Ajamil felt intense remorse and regretted all his sins. He understood the greatness of God’s name, withdrew his senses from the sensual pleasures, and lived the rest of his life in Hardwar by offering devotion to God. Ultimately, he attained Vaikunth. [Bhagwat: 6/1/20 - 6/2/44] Note about the prostitute: There are many narratives about the prostitute (veshyā). One such narrative is as follows: In one ancient city, there lived a prostitute name Jivanti. She purchased a baby parrot. The prostitute did not have any childred of her own, so she raised the parrot as her own child. In her daily routine, she would teach the parrot to repeat the name “Ram... Ram...” The parrot learned to speak the name “Ram... Ram...” One day, death came to both at the same time. Both died while chanting the name “Ram... Ram...” The prostitute was a sinner, but so was the parrot in its previous life. The Yamduts came to take both the narak. But Bhagwan Vishnu’s pārshads also came to take both to Vaikunth. The two sides argued and a battle broke out between them. Ultimately, Vishnu’s pārshads defeated the Yamduts and took both to Vaikunth. The Yamduts went back to Yamraja disappointed. Yamraja explained that although they were sinners and worthy of narak, both became pious because they spoke the name of God during their time of death and became worthy of Vaikunth.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.176

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 176 · Chapter 5 · Verse 176

Ā vātu anant sanshayne chhedī nākhe evī Bhagwān Puruṣhottamnī vātu chhe.

These are the talks of Bhagwan Purushottam which can destroy infinite doubts.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.177

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 177 · Chapter 5 · Verse 177

Ā badhī vātu sāmbhaḷīne āṭalu ja samajavānu chhe je, ‘Hu to ātmā chhu, Akṣhar chhu, Sukhānand chhu ne deh, indriyo, antahkaraṇ, kuṭumb e sarve mārā nahī ne hu eno nahī. Hu to Bhagwānno chhu ne Bhagwān mārā chhe.’ Āṭalu ja anek prakārnī vātu sāmbhaḷīne samajavānu chhe.

After listening to all these talks, only this needs to be understood, “I am ātmā, I am akshar, I am ever blissful and the body, senses, inner faculties and family are not mine and I am not theirs. I am God’s and God is mine.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.178

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 178 · Chapter 5 · Verse 178

Bhagwān pṛuthvī upar padhāre chhe tyāre rājasī, tāmasī, adham e sarveno uddhār karī de chhe, māṭe āvo jog ne sang farī maḷavāno nathī.

When God manifests on earth, he redeems all types of people – the passionate, arrogant, evil, etc. Therefore, this excellent association and opportunity (for moksha) will not be attained again.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.179

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 179 · Chapter 5 · Verse 179

Priyavratne keṭalā chhokarā thayā ne agiyār arbud1 rāj karyu; paṇ ātmārām mahābhāgwat kahevāyā ne te gṛuhasthāshrammā rahī kathāmāthī virām na pāmyā tathā sādhumāthī het ṭaḷyu nahī tethī moṭā kahevāyā ne Prahlādjīne tathā Priyavratne Mahārāj bahu vakhāṇtā. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ek arbud eṭale das karoḍnī sankhyā.

Priyavrat had children and he ruled for 110 million years; however, he was known as ātmārām mahābhāgwat (devotee of God who identifies himself as the ātmā). Though he followed the path of gruhasthāshram, he was never satiated listening to the talks of God - therefore, he was considered a great devotee. Maharaj praised Priyavrat and Prahlādji often.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.180

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 180 · Chapter 5 · Verse 180

Dharma ādi karatā dhyān adhik ne tethī gnān adhik ne tethī Moṭānī anuvṛuttimā rahīne temane rājī kare te adhik. Te ekanā peṭāmā traṇe āvī jāy ne Bhagwānno mahimā jaṇāy eṭale enī meḷe ja āfūrḍu1 het thāy ne het thāy tyāre anuvṛutti paḷe māṭe ā chintāmaṇi hāthmā āvī chhe tene mūkavī ja nahī. Āṭalo deh to Bhagwān parāyaṇ karī devo. Footnotes: 1. 1. Potānī meḷe, ekāek, saheje.

Meditation is superior to dharma, etc. Spiritual knowledge is greater than that and greater than that is to intuitively serve the great and please them. In this one, all other three are incorporated. When the glory of God is known, then affection for him arises spontaneously from within. And when such affection develops, then his wishes are followed. Therefore, this chintāmani which has come to hand should not be relinquished. Thus the body must be made God-centred.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.181

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 181 · Chapter 5 · Verse 181

Prathamnā Ekotermā Vachanāmṛutmā em āvyu je, Bhagwān Akṣhardhām sotā1 āvyā chhe. Te upar vāt karī je, “Ā bole chhe te mūrti upar tān rākhavu, bījāne kārya samajavu ne ā mūrtine kāraṇ samajavu. Ne bījāne ruche em hoy to vāt joīne karavī. Ne oḷakhīne tenī bhakti kare tene Bhagwān bhakti māne chhe, ne oḷakhyā vinā to ‘āvī fasyā tethī kriyā karavī paḍe’ tevu chhe. Paṇ oḷakhyā vinā sevā kare te bhakti na ke’vāy.” Te upar Prathamnu Sāḍatrīsmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvyu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sahit. 2. ā shabdo pāchhaḷ ek bodhakathā sankaḷāyelī chhe te brahmaswarūp yogījī mahārāj āvī rīte kahetā: āvī fasyā bhāī, āvī fasyā! musalamāno “yā husena, yā husena” karatān karatān tājiyā kūṭatā hatā. Ek vāṇiyo ugharāṇīe jato hato. Te jovā ūbho rahyo. Musalamānoe tene kunḍāḷāmān khenchyo ane tene godā mārī kahe, “tunya tājiyā kūṭa.” vāṇiyāne kanī āvaḍe nahīn paṇ have andar āvī gayā eṭale kyān javun? te pachhī “āvī fasyā bhāī, āvī fasyā!” em bolato kūṭavā mānḍyo. bodha jene bhagavān tathā santanun swarūp samajāyun nathī tene ahīn satsangamān niyama-dharma, bhajana-bhakti vagere ruchatun n hovāthī “āvī fasyā” jevun lāge chhe. Parantu jene bhagavān tathā santanun swarūp samajāyun chhe ane temano mahimā dṛuḍh thayo chhe tene to ā satsanga chintāmaṇi samān lāge chhe ane darek kriyā-sādhanāmān satat ānanda ane utsāh rahe chhe. [yogījī mahārājanī bodhakathāo: 20]

In Vachanamrut Gadhada I-71, it is said that God has come with his Akshardham. On this, Swami talked, “Keep your focus on this murti that is talking to you. Understand the entire creation to be the effect and know this murti to be the cause. Understand in this way and if this view is likely to appeal to others then, after due thought, talk to them. Only devotion offered after properly knowing the form of God is accepted by God as devotion. And without knowing, it is as if we are trapped and have to perform some work. But service performed without recognizing God is not called devotion.” Then he had Vachanamrut Gadhada I-37 read.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.182

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 182 · Chapter 5 · Verse 182

Bhagwān to ghaṇāyne maḷe chhe paṇ āvī gammat koīe karāvī nathī ne ā yog ghaṇo durlabh chhe. Farī farīne āvo yog nahī bane. Kāraṇ ke hāl sākṣhāt Bhagwānno yog chhe ne hālmā ghaḍī ghaḍī paḷ paḷ jāy chhe te ghaṇī durlabh chhe. Māṭe Bhagwān vinā bīju rākhashe tenī asadgati thāshe.

Many meet God but such joy has not been given by anyone. This association of the sadhu is very rare. This opportunity will not come often. At present, we have the company of God himself and every moment and second that passes is very precious. Therefore, one who keeps interest in anything except God will fall from the path of moksha.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.183

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 183 · Chapter 5 · Verse 183

Ā Sādhu Akṣhar chhe. Teno divyabhāv ne manuṣhyabhāv ek samajvo ne ā to ajanmā chhe, garbhamā āvyā ja nathī. Ne emanī rīt to naṭnī māyānī peṭhe samajavī ne ā to Mahārājnā sankalpe karīne āhī dekhāy chhe.

This sadhu is Akshar. Understand his divine traits and human traits as one. And this sadhu has no birth; he was never in the womb. His ways should be understood as the illusion of a magician. He is seen here only because of Maharaj’s wish.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.184

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 184 · Chapter 5 · Verse 184

Mahārāje bāvīs varase potānu swarūp jem chhe tem kahyu ne āpaṇe ākaḷā thaī jaīe chhīe.

Maharaj explained his form as it is gradually over 22 years. We, on the other hand, become hasty (in explaining his form to others).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.185

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 185 · Chapter 5 · Verse 185

Kumbhār hānḍalā ghaḍe chhe tenu draṣhṭānt: hānḍalā ghaḍatā māhīlī taraf lāgne vāste golīṭo rākhī bāryathī ṭapalo māre chhe tem āpaṇe golīṭānī jagāe mahimā samajavo ne ṭaplānī jagāe sādhan samajavu.

Swami cited the example of a potter who while making pots keeps a tool called a golito on the inside for support and strikes from the outside using a tool called a taplo. Similarly, for us, inner support means the glory of God and the external tool represents spiritual endeavours.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.186

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 186 · Chapter 5 · Verse 186

Bhagwānno māhātmye sahit nishchay thayā pachhī kāī karavu rahyu nathī. Māṭe māhātmyanī oth laīne ūlaṭu pāp karavu nahī; ne āpaṇne vṛuddhi thātī dekhātī nathī paṇ sarve dhīre dhīre thatu jāy chhe ne em ja thavānī rīt chhe. Jem bājrānā chhoḍmā dāṇā dekhātā nathī paṇ ḍūnḍu āve chhe ne pachhī dāṇā dekhāy chhe tem thāy chhe.

When conviction in God, together with an understanding of his glory, is developed then there is nothing left to do. Therefore, even under the pretext of God’s glory, sins should not be committed. We do not see progress being made, since everything proceeds slowly; and that is the way for things to happen. Just as, in a millet plant, grains are not seen initially, but when the cob grows the grains become visible. That is how spiritual development occurs.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.187

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 187 · Chapter 5 · Verse 187

Prabhu maḷyā te vāste koī vātnī chintā nathī ne sankalpne gnāne karīne uḍāvī devā ne tap karyethī krodhī thavāy chhe. Pūrve Durvāsādik tap karī karīne krodhī thayā chhe, em koṭhārmā vāt karī.

“We have met God so we have no worries of any kind. We should chase away our thoughts with gnān. By performing austerities, one becomes angry-natured. In the past, Durvāsā and others became hot-tempered by performing austerities.” Swami said this in the granary.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.188

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 188 · Chapter 5 · Verse 188

Sānkhyavāḷāney desh-kāḷ lāge chhe em kahīe to unmatta thaī jāy. Ne gnānī hoy, sānkhyavāḷā hoy tene ā lok sācho manāy ja nahī ne bījāne to khoṭo manāy ja nahī.

If one says that place and time affect even those who have developed knowledge of Sānkhya, they would become mad. And those who are spiritually wise or have developed Sānkhya would never believe this world to be true, and others would never believe it to be an illusion.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.189

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 189 · Chapter 5 · Verse 189

Bhagwānnā bhaktanā doṣh vichāre to jīv bhraṣhṭ thaī jāy chhe. Māṭe guṇ vichāravā. Ne Nāradādikane je lānchhan kahevāy chhe1 te to desh-kāḷ lāgyāthī tathā Bhagwānnī māyānu baḷ chhe em samajavu. Ne e sarve to ḍāhyā hatā, moṭā hatā ne anek jīvnā kalyāṇ karyā chhe te guṇ vichāravā. Footnotes: 1. 1. Nāradjī Shīlnidhi Rājānī Vishvamohinī nāmnī dīkarīmā moh pāmyā. (Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇ).

By thinking about the defects of a devotee of God, the jiva is defiled. Therefore, think of his virtues. And the stigma ascribed to Naradji,1 etc. is due to the effect of place, time and the power of God’s māyā. Understand it thus, since all of them were wise, great and liberated many jivas; thus, think of their virtues. Footnotes: 1. 1. Naradji was requested by King Shilnidhi to search for a husband for his daughter, the princess. Naradji looked at her palms and fell in love with her and wanted to marry her himself.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.190

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 190 · Chapter 5 · Verse 190

Paḍchhāyāne pugāy nahī tem viṣhayno pār āve tem nathī. Māṭe gnān thāy tyāre sukh thāy chhe.

A shadow cannot be caught, similarly, material desires and endeavours also cannot be fulfilled. It is not likely that one will reach their limit, therefore, happiness is experienced when spiritual wisdom is attained.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.191

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 191 · Chapter 5 · Verse 191

Bhagwān chhe te ekaḍo chhe ne sādhan chhe te mīnḍā chhe. Ekaḍā vinā saravāḷo na thāy. Rūp chhe te ānkhyanī bhūmikā chhe, tem panch-viṣhay panch indriyonī bhūmikā chhe te potpotānī bhūmikāmā bese chhe.

God represents the number one and endeavours represent zeros. There is no value (in zeros) without the one.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.192

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 192 · Chapter 5 · Verse 192

Āgnā ne upāsanā be rākhajo. Vairāgya ne ātmaniṣhṭhā to koīkne zāzī hashe ne koīkne thoḍī hashe.

Preserve the two, observance of God’s commands and upāsanā. Detachment and ātmā-realization may be present more in some and less in others.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.193

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 193 · Chapter 5 · Verse 193

Sarve ahīyā chhe ne āhī je Akṣhardhām chhe temā ja Bhagwān chhe. Prāgajī bahu sārā Vachanāmṛut gotī kāḍhe chhe, ne bahu sārī vātu kare chhe te upar amāro bahu rājīpo chhe.

Everyone is here and God is in the Akshardham that is here. Pragji selects very good Vachanamruts and delivers very good talks. I am very pleased with him.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.194

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 194 · Chapter 5 · Verse 194

Gnānpralay karavo tethī koī moṭī vāt nathī, māṭe gnānpralay karavo, jeṭalo gnānpralay karyo teṭalo māyāthī mukāṇo ne tem karyā vinā moṭāī to maḷe paṇ māyāthī mukāy nahī. Gnānpralay te shu je, Prakṛutinu kāryamātra haiyāmāthī kāḍhī nākhī brahmarūp thāvu, Guṇātīt thāvu, pachhī kāī karavu rahe nahī; ne Mahārājno siddhānt paṇ em ja chhe.

There is nothing greater than to attain the ultimate knowledge (gnān pralay) that all of creation is perishable, therefore, attain this ultimate spiritual knowledge. The extent to which this knowledge develops is the extent to which māyā is overcome. And without doing this, greatness may be attained but māyā is not overcome. What is this ultimate spiritual wisdom? It is to remove all the works of Prakruti from the heart, to become brahmarup and gunātit. Then nothing remains to be done. And that is Maharaj’s principle also.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.195

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 195 · Chapter 5 · Verse 195

Bhagwānnā bhaktane viṣhay nathī, ene to āgnā chhe.

For a devotee of God, there are no indulgences; for he indulges due to the command of God.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. In this talk, Swami explains that a devotee of God who follows the path of a householder because of the command of God or the Satpurush will not become bound by the sensual pleasures. This devotee understands his self to be the ātmā and understands the greatness of God. One who has no knowledge of the ātmā and Paramatma will become bound to the sensual pleasures.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.196

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 196 · Chapter 5 · Verse 196

Bakarāthī te hāthī sudhī moṭā hoy te paṇ vāḍāmā rahe, paṇ sinha vāḍāmā rahe nahī. Tem mumukṣhu hoy te māyānā bandhanmā rahe nahī; māṭe ā jogmā āvyā chhe te Bhagwānnā bhaktane manuṣhya jevā na jāṇavā.

From goats to animals as large as elephants all stay in an enclosure. But a lion cannot be confined to an enclosure. Similarly, a spiritual aspirant does not remain in the bondage of māyā. Therefore, since we have attained this association with the God-realized Sadhu do not consider the devotee of God to be like a mere human being.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.197

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 197 · Chapter 5 · Verse 197

Ekthī te lākh bakarā bole paṇ bīk na lāge ne ek kesarī sinha bole to badhāynā antar bhedāī jāy ne hāthīnā kumbhasthaḷ fāṭī jāy; tem Mahārājne avatārādik jevā kahe temā koīne thaḍako lāge nahī paṇ avatārādik sarve Mahārājnu dīdhu aishvarya bhogave chhe ne bhajī-bhajīne evā thayā chhe em je kahevu te to kesarī sinhanā nādthī jem hāthīnā kumbhasthaḷ fāṭe tevu kaṭhaṇ paḍatu chhe.

Whether one goat or a hundred thousand goats make noises, one will not be afraid. However, if one lion roars, then everyone’s heart fills with terror and even the elephant’s skull splits. Similarly, no one fears saying Maharaj is an avatār. However, to say all of the avatārs enjoy the powers given by Maharaj and they became great by worshiping Maharaj, that is as difficult as an elephant’s skull cracking open hearing the mighty roar of a lion.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.198

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 198 · Chapter 5 · Verse 198

Sānkhya ne yog be mārg chhe. Temā yogvāḷā viṣhaymā bandhāy ne vaḷī chhūṭe, ne sānkhyavāḷo bandhāy ja nahī.

There are two paths: Sankhya and Yoga. Those who follow the path of Yoga may become attached and then break the attachment; while those who follow the path of Sankhya will never become attached at all.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.199

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 199 · Chapter 5 · Verse 199

Bhagwān ne Sādhu be ja rākhavā eṭale te ghareṇu rākhī rūpiyā āpyā barābar chhe; māṭe be rākhī ve’vār karavo.

To retain only the two – God and his Sadhu – is like giving money on interest and keeping the ornaments as security. Therefore, keep these two and do one’s worldly activities.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.200

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 200 · Chapter 5 · Verse 200

Pānch guṇe yukta evā Sant na maḷe to ek ek guṇ shīkhavo ne pānche guṇ ekane viṣhe hoy evā Sant maḷe eṭale pūraṇ thayu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Dharma, gnān, vairāgya, bhakti ane mahimā.

If a sadhu with all five virtues1 is not attained, then learn one virtue at a time from different sadhus. And if one attains a Sadhu with all five virtues, then there is an end to all endeavours. Footnotes: 1. 1. Five virtues: dharma, spiritual wisdom, detachment, devotion and understanding of the glory of God that he is the all-doer.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.201

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 201 · Chapter 5 · Verse 201

Takiyo kāḍhī nākhīne kahyu je, “Ṭev paḍī jāy; ane koī padārthnī ṭev to ek Sahajānand Swāmīne na paḍe, bījā badhāyne paḍe.”

Swami got rid of his back pillow and said, “It can become a habit. Only Sahajanand Swami does not form a habit for any object. Everyone else will form a habit.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.202

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 202 · Chapter 5 · Verse 202

Traṇ jaṇ sukhiyā: ek to Moṭā Sādhu kahe tem kare te, tathā mannn kahyu na māne te gnānī, tathā kāī joīe nahī te, Āshā hi paramam dukham nairāshyam paramam sukham1 - e traṇ sukhiyā chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Āshā hi paramam dukham nairāshyam param sukham; Yathā sanchhidya kāntāshām sukham suṣhvāp pingalā. (Shrīmad Bhāgwat: 11/8/44) Āshā ja param dukh chhe ne āshārahit rahevu temā param sukh chhe. Jem Pingalā nāmnī veshyāe puruṣh māṭenī āshāne chhedī sukhethī ūngh līdhī.

Three kinds of people are happy: one who does as the great Sadhu says, the spiritually wise who does not accept the thoughts of his mind and one who does not need anything. ‘Āshā hi paramam dukham nairāshyam paramam sukham.’1 These three are happy. Footnotes: 1. 1. Desires cause great misery; one without desires is supremely happy.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.203

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 203 · Chapter 5 · Verse 203

‘Je vaḍe ā jakta chhe tene koī na jāṇe re.’ Bhagwān manuṣhya jevā thāy tene jāṇyā te samādhi chhe, ne dharmanu ang paṇ tenu ja chhe. Evā sarve ang temā āvī gayā, ne vātu karyethī ghaṇāne nishchay thāy māṭe vātu karavī, e ang adhik chhe. Vihad vagāḍī vānsaḷī tīkhī nautam tān, Chaud lok dhūni sāmbhaḷī chhūṭyu Shankar keru dhyān.1 Evī vātu chhe. Upāsanā ne āgnā benu baḷ rākhavu ne āgnā pāḷe nahī to dukh āve. Draḍh nishchay rākhavo je parvat parāyaṇ koīno feravyo fare nahī. Ne Indrane pānch brahmahatyā hatī te nishchayrūpī mūrti dhāryethī ṭaḷī gaī ne ek ek viṣhay Girnār Parvat jevo chhe te fare nahī. Paṇ nishchaynu tathā āsharānu baḷ rākhavu, jem Ṭopīvāḷe surango dārūthī foḍīne ḍungarne toḍī nākhyo tem parvat jevā viṣhaye toḍī nākhe chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhāvārth: Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa Bhagwāne navā tān - sūr sāthe evī ad‌bhut vānsaḷī vagāḍī ke tenī dhūn chaud lokmā sambhaḷāī ane dhyānmā beṭhelā Shivajīnu dhyān chhūṭī gayu. Ā vāt Brahmānand Swāmīnā ‘Helī māre vālīḍe re kahān’ padmā ullekhāyelī chhe. Kīrtan Helī māre vālīḍe re kahān, Vajāḍī re rangbharjī vānsaḷī re, Māṇā re rāj; pyārī bole re vānsaḷī. ṭek. Māve vajāḍī ho jī moralī re, rangabhīne vrajrāj; Shabda suṇīne ho jī sundarī re, bhūlī sarve ghar kāj re. Helī 1 Behad vāgī ho jī vānsaḷī re, tīkhī jo nautam tān, Chaud bhuvan dhun ho jī sāmbhaḷī re, chhuṭyu jo Shankar keru dhyān re. Helī 2 Man māhe harakhī ho jī mānanī re, rangbhar gaḷatī re reṇ; Brahmānand ho jī vālame re, vāī re alaukik veṇ re. Helī 3 [Brahmānand Kāvya: 2/420]

God behaves like a human and to know him (even when he acts like a human) to be God is samādhi. Vihad vagāḍī vānsaḷī tīkhī nautam tān, Chaud lok dhūni sāmbhaḷī chhūṭyu Shankar keru dhyān.1 Keep resolute faith in the manifest form of God so that, like a mountain, nobody can shake it even if they try. Indra was burdened with five Brahmicides (i.e. sin of killing Brahmins) which were overcome by beholding the murti in the form of firm faith in God. And each sense pleasure is like Mount Girnar and cannot be overcome. But keep the strength arising out of firm faith in and refuge to God, which, just as the British blasted the mountain using dynamite, can similarly shatter desires for the mountain-like sense pleasures. Footnotes: 1. 1. Meaning: Krishna Bhagwan played the flute in a novel tune, which was so extraordinary that the tune was heard in all of the 14 loks and even Shankar Bhagwan’s concentration was interrupted. This is mentioned by Brahmanand Swami in his kirtan ‘Heli māre vālīḍe re kahān’. Kīrtan Helī māre vālīḍe re kahān, Vajāḍī re rangbharjī vānsaḷī re, Māṇā re rāj; pyārī bole re vānsaḷī. ṭek. Māve vajāḍī ho jī moralī re, rangabhīne vrajrāj; Shabda suṇīne ho jī sundarī re, bhūlī sarve ghar kāj re. Helī 1 Behad vāgī ho jī vānsaḷī re, tīkhī jo nautam tān, Chaud bhuvan dhun ho jī sāmbhaḷī re, chhuṭyu jo Shankar keru dhyān re. Helī 2 Man māhe harakhī ho jī mānanī re, rangbhar gaḷatī re reṇ; Brahmānand ho jī vālame re, vāī re alaukik veṇ re. Helī 3 [Brahmānand Kāvya: 2/420]

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.204

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 204 · Chapter 5 · Verse 204

Zāḍne dehe karīne tathā pashune dehe karīne tathā loṭ āpyo hashe, āngaḷī chīndhī hashe, evā anek prakārthī sanskār thayā hashe te sarvenu kām thaī jāshe.

Through the life of a tree or an animal or by donating flour or even pointing (to show the way); any way one has gained merits (by serving God, the Sant, or his devotees), one will be liberated.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.205

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 205 · Chapter 5 · Verse 205

Hāl to Mahārājnā darshan karyethī mokṣha thāy tem ja mokṣha thāy chhe. Ne gnān to te dahāḍānā karatā hāl vṛuddhi pāmyu chhe. Ne hālnā haribhakta chhe tenā maḷelānā darshan karashe tenu paṇ tem ja so varas paryant kalyāṇ thāshe. Em kalyāṇno mārg ūbho raheshe.

Today, just as one is liberated by having the darshan of Maharaj, one is liberated similarly. And knowledge has flourished today compared to those days. And even a hundred years from now, anyone who has the darshan of those who have met the devotees of today will be liberated. The path of liberation will continue in this manner.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.206

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 206 · Chapter 5 · Verse 206

Karatā hoy so kījiye aur na kījiye kag, Māthu rahe sevāḷmā ne ūnchā rahe pag. Māṭe lok to game tem kahe te mānavu nahī ne potpotānā dharmamā rahīne Prabhune bhajavā. Ne bīju badhu koī prayojanne arthe chhe em samajavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhāvārtha: he kāgaḍābhāī! āpaṇā māṭe je karavā yogya hoya e j karavun, bījun n karavun. Nahīntar māthun shevāḷamān rahe ne pag ūnchā thaī jāya, evī hālat thāya. bodhakathā ek kāgaḍo bagalāno vād laī tenun anukaraṇ karī māchhalun pakaḍavā gayo, to māchhalun to n pakaḍāyun, paṇ tenī chāncha shevāḷamān khūnpī gaī ne pag ākāshamān adhdhar rahyā. bodha: je karatā hoya te karavun, paṇ bījā fandamān paḍavun nahīn. Dharma-niyam lopīne bījān sādhan karavān nahīn, nahīntar kalyāṇanī vāt to dūr rahī jashe ne ūlaṭun bījun pāpā pesashe.

Kartā hoy so kijiye aur na kijiye kag, Māthu rahe sevālmā ne uchā rahe pag.1 Let people say anything but do not believe it. Observe one’s own dharma and worship God. And understand everything else to be for some other worldly purpose. Footnotes: 1. 1. O Crow! Do whatever is appropriate and not anything else. Otherwise your head will remain in moss and legs will be raised in the air. This saying is based on the story of a crow and a swan. Once, they had a swimming contest. The crow was egoistic and felt it, too, could swim like the swan. But, after swimming a little distance, it got tired. The bird flipped over and its head got stuck in the mud and feet were suspended in the air. Soon, it died of suffocation. Therefore do not be egoistic. An alternate tale is: A crow tried to imitate a seagull catching fish in its beak. Instead of catching fish, the crow got its head stuck in the mud and its feet were suspended in the air.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.207

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 207 · Chapter 5 · Verse 207

Viṣhay bhogavavāno koṭi kalpthī khāḍo paḍelo chhe te purāy tevo nathī; tene pūravāno badhā shāstramā ek ja upāy chhe je, Nijātmānam brahmarūpam e ek ja shlok chhe.

The bottomless pit to enjoy material pleasures has been formed over tens of millions of years and is not likely to be filled. To fill it, all the scriptures describe only one solution. That is, ‘Nijātmānam brahmarupam.’ It is the only shlok (which explains the solution).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.208

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 208 · Chapter 5 · Verse 208

Vyāsjīe ghaṇu tap karyu. Ghaṇā shāstra Purāṇ karyā ne pote Bhagwān hatā paṇ shānti na thaī; pachhī Nāradjīne vachane karīne Shrīmad‍ Bhāgwat karyu ne temā Bhagwān ne Bhagwānnā bhaktanā guṇnu gān karyu tyāre param shānti thaī. Māṭe āpaṇe tem karavu.

Vyasji performed penance for many years. He wrote many scriptures such as the Purans and he was an avatār of God; yet he did not find peace. Then, on Naradji’s advice he wrote the Shrimad Bhagwat which sings the praises of manifest God (Shri Krishna) and God’s devotees and found peace. Therefore, we should do the same.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.209

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 209 · Chapter 5 · Verse 209

Āpaṇne Bhagwān tathā Sādhu maḷyā chhe ne oḷakhāṇā chhe tethī kāī karavu rahyu nathī, paṇ shānti thātī nathī tenu kāraṇ e chhe je, viṣhaymā rāg chhe je mannu dhāryu karavu tathā āgnā lopāy tathā agnān e traṇe karīne shānti thātī nathī.

We have met and recognized God and his Sadhu so there is nothing left to be done. But we still do not feel at peace. The reason for this is that there is desire for enjoying worldly pleasures. Doing as the mind wills, transgressing commands, and ignorance – due to these three things peace is not experienced.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.210

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 210 · Chapter 5 · Verse 210

Loḍhānī, lākaḍānī, paththarnī ne sonānī e beḍiyo koīk kāḷe bhāngīne ṭaḷī jāy paṇ panch-viṣhaynā pāsalārūpī beḍī ṭaḷe tevī nathī, ne agni tathā sūryano agni tathā jaṭharāgni tathā pralaykāḷno agni tathā mahāpralayno agni teṇe karīne paṇ vāsanā baḷī nathī. Ne moṭā moṭā hruṣhioe sāṭh hajār varṣh tap karyu tathā deh upar to rāfaḍā thaī gayā paṇ vāsanā baḷī nathī evī je vāsanā te to gnānpralaye karīne baḷe chhe ne Bhagwānnī mūrtinu dhyān ne āgnā teṇe karīne vāsanā lingdehno nāsh thaī jāy chhe. Āṭalī vāt so janme karīne kahevāy nahī ne samajāy nahī evī chhe.

Shackles made from iron, wood, stone and gold can be broken and overcome after some time, but the net-like shackles of the five material pleasures cannot be overcome. Since, desires have not been burnt by the worldly fire, the fire of the sun, the digestive fire, the fire of world dissolution and the fire at the time of final dissolution. Great rishis have performed austerities for up to sixty thousand years and anthills have covered their bodies, yet their desires have not been burnt. And such innate desires are only burnt by gnān pralay, meditation on God’s murti and observing his commands. These talks are such that they cannot be described adequately or understood even in a hundred births.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.211

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 211 · Chapter 5 · Verse 211

Vāghā Khāchare pūchhyu je, “Sampūrṇa thayā kem kahevāy?” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Ātmā ne Paramātmā benu gnān thāy, ne chhaṭhṭho nishchay1 kahyo chhe evo thāy tyāre pūru thayu kahevāy. Ne e vāt to vaktā jo nirdoṣh hoy ne vishvās hoy to thāy tevu chhe. Nīkar dākhaḍo karatā Bhagwānnī draṣhṭi thāy tyāre kāḷāntare samajāy.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Vachanāmṛut Loyā 12 pramāṇe chhaṭhṭho nishchay eṭale uttam nirvikalp nishchay.

Vagha Khachar asked, “When can one be said to be truly fulfilled?” Then Swami replied, “When the knowledge of both ātmā and Paramātmā is attained, and the sixth (highest) level of conviction in which there are no doubts in any action of God – good, bad or indifferent (as described in Vachanamrut Loya-12) – is attained, then one can be said to be fulfilled. This state is attained if the speaker is fault-free and one has trust in him. Otherwise, while trying (to be fulfilled), if God grants grace then, in time, it is understood.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.212

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 212 · Chapter 5 · Verse 212

Tap karīne baḷī jāy to paṇ Bhagwān teḍavā na āve; ne hinḍoḷā khāṭyamā sūī rahe, dūdh, sākar, chokhā jame ne be chākar sevā karanārā hoy ne raḷanārā bījā hoy tene ant same vimānmā besārīne Bhagwān laī jāy, ne e sukh pūrvanā sanskārthī chhe tem ja vimān paṇ prārabdha bhegu ja chhe.

Even if one burns away performing penance, God will not come to take him to his abode (because he does not have the refuge of God). On the other hand, God will take one who sleeps on a swing, eats rice in milk and sākar, and has others to serve him and labor for him to his abode in a vimān (because he has the refuge of God). And, just as his happiness is because of his merits of past births, the vimān (that takes one to the abode of God) is also because of that.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.213

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 213 · Chapter 5 · Verse 213

Koī raḷīne marī jāy toy khāvā na maḷe ne koīne gāḍā moḍhe rūpiyā chālyā āve te pūrvanu prārabdha kahevāy.

One may labor in life and yet have difficulty finding food to eat; and another may have cart-full of money come directly to him. This is all due to the prārabhda karmas of past births.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.214

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 214 · Chapter 5 · Verse 214

Āj āpaṇo tīr chāle chhe,1 tethī koī nām laī shake nahī ne bījānā tīr chālatā nathī eṭale tene dukh thāy chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Prabhāv chāle chhe.

Today, our (God’s and the Satpurush’s) influence prevails; therefore, no one1 can make us miserable. Others’ are not as influential; hence, they are miserable. Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is implying that kāl, karma, māyā, etc. cannot make the devotees of God and the Satpurush miserable, because whatever happens is according to their wishes.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.215

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 215 · Chapter 5 · Verse 215

Chhellā Prakaraṇnu Termu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne vāt karī je, “Potānā swarūpne Akṣhar mānīne upāsanā kare tenī prīti desh, kāḷ, karma, kriyā koīthī ṭaḷe nahī ne e koīnī moṭāīmā levāy nahī. Golokādik dhām paṇ kāḷnu bhakṣhaṇ chhe em jāṇato hoy ne tenā dehnī vyavasthā brāhmaṇ maṭīne Musalmānnī thāy paṇ Bhagwānmāthī prīti ṭaḷe nahī.” Tyā draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, “Bīju sarve dravya jātu rahe ne chintāmaṇi rahe to kāī gayu ja nathī ne chintāmaṇi gaī to kāī rahyu ja nathī.”

Gunātitānand Swāmi had Vachanāmrut Gadhadā III-13 read and said, “The love of one who identifies himself as Akshar and offers upāsanā will not diminish due to place, time, deeds, actions, etc., and he is not intimidated by anyone’s greatness. He understands Golok and other abodes will be destroyed by kāl; and even if he converts from a brāhmin to a Muslim, his love for God will never diminish.” Then, he gave an example, “All of the other wealth is lost but if one still has the chintāmani, then nothing is lost; on the other hand, if the chintāmani is lost, then nothing is saved.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.216

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 216 · Chapter 5 · Verse 216

Bhagwān vinā bījo sankalp thāy to baḷbaḷto ḍām de evu dukh āpaṇne thātu nathī paṇ upāsanānā pratāpthī sarve doṣh ṭaḷī gayā chhe. Māṭe ‘Hu Bhagwānno chhu ne Bhagwān mārā Swāmī chhe.’ Eṭalo bhāv rākhavo. Ne sharīr-sharīrī tathā kāraṇ-kārya tathā anvay-vyatirek e Vachanāmṛutne samajyā vinā arth karavo nahī, nīkar bādh āvashe. Māṭe āpaṇe to Swāmī-Sevakne bhāve upāsanā draḍh rākhavī eṭale sarve doṣh ṭaḷashe.

When thoughts other than those of God arise, one does not feel pain like that which is experienced when a branding iron is applied. But by the power of upāsanā all faults are overcome. Therefore, maintain the sentiment that “I am God’s and God is my master.” Preserve this feeling. Also, never try to explain the meaning of ‘the body-soul relationship,’ ‘cause-effect,’ and the ‘immanent-transcendent aspects of God’ without thoroughly understanding the Vachanamrut, otherwise obstacles will be encountered. Therefore, we should develop firm upāsanā, together with the master-servant understanding. Consequently all faults will be overcome.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.217

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 217 · Chapter 5 · Verse 217

Chhellā Prakaraṇnu Pāntrīsmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne vāt karī je, “Ā chha lakṣhaṇnī moṭāī to sarva haribhakta tathā sādhu tamāmne chhe.”

Swami had Vachanamrut Gadhada III-35 read and said, “The greatness due to these six characteristics1 is found in all devotees and sadhus.” Footnotes: 1. 1. The six characteristics of the devotees and sadhus are: (1) they never believe God to be formless, (2) they engage in the ekāntik bhakti of God and are pleased when someone else does the same, (3) when they stay among devotees, they do not allow any of their swabhāvs to interfere, (4) when they come across any precious item, they are happier giving it away, (5) they are of frank nature, such that everyone would know them outwardly and inwardly, and (6) though of a quiet nature, they do not like the company of kusangis.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.218

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 218 · Chapter 5 · Verse 218

Āpaṇe dharma pāḷavo, tyāg rākhavo, tap karavu, niyam pāḷavā vagere kriyāyu sādhannī chhe te potānā kalyāṇne arthe nathī, te to bījā jīvunā kalyāṇne arthe chhe. Ne amāre to zīṇī vātu chhe te tamane jāḍī karī daīne samajāvavī chhe.

The fact that we abide by our dharma, remain detached to objects, perform austerities, and practice other such spiritual endeavors is not for our own liberation; actually, it is for the liberation of others. I want to explain such extremely subtle talks in the most tangible way.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami’s purport here is that our liberation is due to the upāsanā of God. The spiritual endeavors, as mentioned here, that we engage in are so that others will perceive virtues in our pure conduct, and therefore, attain liberation.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.219

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 219 · Chapter 5 · Verse 219

Pancham Skandhmā Jaḍbharatnā vachan chhe je, “Amāre mate Vedokta mārg nathī.” Em vāt karī. Te upar Ṭhakkar Manjīe pūchhyu je, “Ene shu rahyu?” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Ātmā ne Paramātmā be, ne āpaṇe paṇ evā thāvu chhe.”

The fifth canto (of the Bhagwat) has the words of Jadbharat: “According to my principle, the path of the Vedas does not come into consideration.” On that, Manji Thakkar asked, “What comes into his consideration?” Swami answered, “The two: ātmā and Paramātmā. And we have to follow accordingly.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. The path of the Vedas refers to observance of dharma - the moral do’s and dont’s. By these words, Swami is explaining that for those who have the knowledge of ātmā and Paramātmā, though they observe the do’s and dont’s, they do not desire the fruits of observing dharma, which is the happiness of swarg-lok. Such devotees with the knowledge of ātmā and Paramātmā firmly observe dharma to please God instead. Gunatitanand Swami has also explained this in vat 1/207.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.220

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 220 · Chapter 5 · Verse 220

Madhyanu Dasmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvī vāt karī je, “Vachanāmṛutnā artha samajāy tevā nathī; paṇ bahu abhyās rākhe to potānī meḷe samajāy evo Mahārājno var chhe. Ne Mahārājne ā gnān sarva sādhu, satsangīne āpavu chhe. Prakṛutino pati te kuṭasth puruṣh kahevāy ne gṛuhasth paṇ kuṭasth puruṣh kahevāy, tem ja gṛuhasthnī peṭhe ja Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa paṇ kuṭasth puruṣh kahevāy. Ne sānkhyagnānne mate karīne nirleppaṇu kahevāy. Ne Vairāṭ Puruṣh tathā Mahāpuruṣh tathā Akṣhar e sarvenā niyantā Mahārāj Puruṣhottam chhe em samajavu te gnān kahevāy. Ne divyabhāv-manuṣhyabhāv kalyāṇkārī samajāy te bhakti kahevāy. Ne āpaṇā sharīrnā teje karīne Bhagwānnā darshan thāy to paṇ tenu āpel chhe em samajavu e bhakti kahevāy. Ne evā bhaktane kāī vighna nathī. Ne sānkhya gnāne karīne sankalpne khoṭā karī nākhavā e ja mūrtimā sthiti thaī; te mūrti sāmu joī rahyethī sankalp bandh thaī jāy.”

After reading Vachanamrut Gadhada II-10, Swami spoke, “The meanings in the Vachanamrut are not easy to understand. But if one studies them a lot, they can be understood by oneself – this is Maharaj’s promise. And Maharaj wants to give this spiritual wisdom of the Vachanamrut to all sadhus and satsangis.” Spiritual wisdom is to understand that Maharaj is the controller of Vairat Purush, Mahapurush and Akshar. To defeat all worldly desires with the knowledge of Sānkhya is equal to developing single-minded focus on the murti. By continually looking at this murti, desires cease to exist. Devotion is understanding the human traits and divine traits of God and his Sadhu as the means for ultimate moksha. Also, even if the darshan of God is possible only by the light from our body, then to still understand that the light is given by him is called devotion. And such a devotee has no obstacles.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.221

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 221 · Chapter 5 · Verse 221

Zāzu kāī karavānu nathī. Mahārājne Bhagwān jāṇī tenī āgnāmā rahevu eṭale pūru thaī rahyu, ne shāstramā eṭalu ja karavānu lakhyu chhe. Āpaṇe Bhagwānnā chhīe, māyānā nathī em mānavu.

There is not much we need to do, except realize Maharaj to be God and obey his commands - everything is accomplished in this. Moreover, the scriptures also mention that this is all that needs to be done. Believe that we belong to God and not māyā.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.222

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 222 · Chapter 5 · Verse 222

Bhagwān striyu sāthe rame te rajoguṇī kriyā, ne taravār chalāve te tamoguṇī kriyā, ne sādhuno mārag chalāve te sattvaguṇī kriyā, ne Guṇātīt kriyā to judī rītnī ja chhe, Ṛuṣhabhdevnī kriyānī peṭhe. Māṭe e eke guṇ Bhagwānne viṣhe chhe ja nahī em samajavu.

When God plays with women, he is exhibiting rajo-gun. When he wields a sword, he is exhibiting tamo-gun. When he follows the path of a sadhu, he is exhibiting sattva-gun. But the gunātit actions (the actions that transcend raj, tam, and sattva) are of a different nature. The example of this is Rushabhdev’s actions.1 Therefore, one should actually understand that none of these gunas are in God. Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is speaking of Rushabhdev’s actions during his later life after installing his son Bharat to the throne. He wandered in the form of an ascetic. He also acted blind, mute, deaf, etc. The wicked people would beat him, spit on him, urinate on him, and throw mud at him. Though he behaved like one who is mad, he experienced the bliss of God internally.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.223

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 223 · Chapter 5 · Verse 223

Āpṇāmā keṭlākne brāhmaṇnī kriyā hoy, sonīnī, vāṇiyānī, kaṇabīnī, koḷīnī, kṣhatrīnī evī judī judī kriyāo hoy. Te kriyā sāmu joīe to mokṣha thāy ja nahī, māṭe te kriyā sāmu jovu nahī; Bhagwān sāmu jovu. Bhagwānnī āgaḷ kriyāno sho bhār chhe ne vāsanāno sho bhār chhe? Māṭe haribhaktamā tathā sādhumā rajoguṇī, tamoguṇī ne sattvaguṇī kriyāyu hoy te joīne avaguṇ levo nahī. Jene Bhagwānno āsharo thayo chhe te to Guṇātīt thaī rahyo chhe; ne rajoguṇī, tamoguṇī ne sattvaguṇī e traṇ prakārnā jīvne Bhagwānno sambandh thāy to Guṇātīt thaī jāy chhe.

On seeing actions of rajogun, tamogun and sattvagun in devotees and sadhus, do not find faults in them. One who has the shelter of God is in the process of becoming gunātit. And if jivas of a rajogun, tamogun or sattvagun nature keep the company of God, they will become gunātit.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.224

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 224 · Chapter 5 · Verse 224

Ā samāmā āpaṇo avatār thayo chhe te moṭā bhāgya chhe. So varṣha pahelā ke so varṣha pachhī janma thayo hot ne game to samādhi thāt temā shu ūghaḍyu? Ā vātu ne āvo jog tenī barābar thāy nahī. Ne hāl to dharma, arth, kāmne paḍyā mūkīne kevaḷ mokṣha ja rākhyo chhe. Temā jene guṇ nahī āve ne avaguṇ āvashe tene asur jāṇavo ne hālnī kriyā eke avaguṇ āve evī nathī, saheje ja guṇ āve evī kriyā chhe.

At present, dharma, wealth and desires have been kept aside and only moksha (as the goal of life) has been kept in view. And those who see no virtues in it and see faults should be known as demons and the present actions (of the manifest form of God and his Sadhu) are such that nobody can find fault. The actions are such that one naturally sees virtues in them.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.225

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 225 · Chapter 5 · Verse 225

Bhagwān ne ā Sādhu to be ghaḍīmā kalyāṇ kare evā dayāḷu chhe, paṇ tenī āpaṇne khabar paḍe nahī, māṭe sang ne ruchi sārī rākhavī; ne sang na oḷakhī shakāy to vishvās rākhavo eṭale tene be ghaḍīmā kalyāṇ thayu em oḷakhāve ne kathā-kīrtan karīne āvardā pūro karī devo.

God and this Sadhu are so compassionate that they can grant moksha in a very short period, but we are ignorant of this. Therefore, keep good company and inclination. If good company cannot be recognized, then keep trust in God and his holy Sadhu so that they can enable one to understand that moksha has been attained in a very short time. Thus, pass the rest of your life engaged in spiritual discourses and devotional songs.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.226

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 226 · Chapter 5 · Verse 226

Ājno ekaḍmal karīne kāḍhī mūkelo jagatno guru chhe. Ne Swarūpānand Swāmīne Mahārāj kahe je, “Ājanā satsangīnu kalyāṇ to pūrve Rāmkṛuṣhṇādik avatār thayā tenā jevu thāy chhe.”

A sadhu that has been cast out as an ekadmal is still the guru of the whole world.1 Maharaj said to Swarupanand Swami, “Today, the satsangis are liberated just as the avatārs of the past, such as Ram, Krishna, etc., were liberated.” Footnotes: 1. 1. An ekadmal is a sadhu of Shriji Maharaj who left Maharaj because he had difficulty observing the harsh commands of Maharaj. Though he has been cast out, because of his association with God and the Sant at one point, Swami is saying he is still considered extraordinary.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.227

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 227 · Chapter 5 · Verse 227

Dashe dishāmā ghoḍo feravīne yagna ādarīe ne koī ghoḍāne bāndhe to vighna thāy ne yagna thāy nahī ne tenu faḷ maḷe nahī. Māṭe potānā gharnā faḷiyāmā ghoḍo feravīne yagna pūro karī faḷ levu; ne faḷ to yagnamā chhe ne ghoḍo feravyāthī to kīrti vadhe evu chhe ne te to Swarūpānand Swāmī jevā samarthno ghoḍo bandhāy nahī ne Paramchaitanyānand Swāmīno Dharmapurmā ghoḍo bandhāṇo te Muktānand Swāmīe chhoḍāvyo1 ne Paramhansānand Swāmīno ghoḍo gāyomā bandhāṇo ane Bhagwānnā samīpne pāme tathā Bhagwānno dīkaro hoy to paṇ chosaṭh lakṣhaṇ2 āvavā bākī rahe, māṭe faḷiyāmā ghoḍo feravīne yagna pūro karī devo. Footnotes: 1. 1. Māne karīne Paramchaitanyānand Swāmī Mahārājne chhoḍī jatā rahyā. Chhevaṭe Dharmapurmā Kushaḷkuvarbāne tyā rokāyā. Mahārāje Muktānand Swāmīne mokalī emane pāchhā bolāvyā. 2. Santnā 64 lakṣhaṇ: 1. Dayāḷu, 2. Kṣhamāvāḷā, 3. Sarvajīvnu hit ichchhanārā, 4. Ṭāḍh, taḍako ādik sahan karanārā, 5. Koīnā paṇ guṇmā doṣh nahī jonārā, 6. Shānt, 7. Jeno shatru nathī thayo evā, 8. Adekhāī tathā vairthī rahit, 9. Mān tathā matsarthī rahit, 10. Bījāne mān āpanārā, 11. Priya ane satya bolnārā, 12. Kām, krodh, lobh tathā madthī rahit, 13. Aham-mamatva-rahit, 14. Svadharmamā draḍh rahenārā, 15. Dambha-rahit, 16. Andar ane bahār pavitra rahenārā, 17. Deh tathā indriyone damnārā, 18. Saraḷ swabhāvavāḷā, 19. Ghaṭit bolnārā, 20. Jitendriya tathā pramād-rahit, 21. Sukh-dukhādi-dvandva-rahit, 22. Dhīrajvāḷā, 23. Karmendriyo tathā gnānendriyonī chapaḷtāthī rahit, 24. Padārthnā sangrah-rahit, 25. Bodh karavāmā nipuṇ, 26. Ātmaniṣhṭhāvāḷā, 27. Sarvane upakār karavāvāḷā, 28. Koī paṇ prakārnā bhay rahit, 29. Koī paṇ prakārnī āshārahit, 30. Vyasan-rahit, 31. Shraddhāvāḷā, 32. Udār, 33. Tapasvī, 34. Pāparahit, 35. Grāmyakathā ne vārtā nahī sāmbhaḷnārā, 36. Satshāstranā nirantar abhyāsvāḷā, 37. Māyik panchaviṣhay-rahit, 38. Āstik buddhivāḷā, 39. Sat-asatnā vivekvāḷā, 40. Madya-mānsādiknā sansarge rahit, 41. Draḍh-vratvāḷā, 42. Koīnī chāḍī-chugalī nahī karanārā, 43. Kapaṭ-rahit, 44. Koīnī chhānī vātne prakaṭ nahī karanārā, 45. Nidrājit, 46. āhārjit, 47. Santoṣhvāḷā, 48. Sthir buddhivāḷā, 49. Hinsārahit vṛuttivāḷā, 50. Tṛuṣhṇārahit. 51. Sukh-dukhmā sambhāvavāḷā, 52. Akārya karavāmā lājvāḷā, 53. Potānā vakhāṇ nahī karanārā, 54. Bījānī nindā nahī karanārā, 55. Yathārth brahmacharya pāḷnārā, 56. Yam tathā niyamvāḷā, 57. Āsanjit, 58. Prāṇajit, 59. Bhagwānnā draḍh āshrayvāḷā, 60. Bhagwadbhakti-parāyaṇ, 61. Bhagwān arthe ja sarva kriyā karanārā, 62. Bhagwānnī mūrtimā dhyān-parāyaṇ rahenārā, 63. Bhagwānnī līlākathānu shravaṇ-kīrtan karanārā, 64. Bhagwānnī bhakti vinā ek paṇ kṣhaṇ vyartha nahī javā denārā. [Satsangijīvan (Harigītā) 1: 25-37] (Swāmīnī vāt: 1/171nī pādṭīp)

During an Ashwamedh Yagna the sacrificial horse is taken throughout the ten directions and if somebody seizes it, the yagna remains incomplete till the horse is freed. So, the fruits of the sacrifice are not earned until the horse is released. But, if the horse is allowed to roam in one’s own compound, one can finish the yagna and earn the fruits. Since, the fruits are attained by performing the yagna and by riding the horse, fame increases. And the horse of the powerful, like Swarupanand Swami, cannot be captured.1 Even one who remains close to God and may be the son of God still has to attain the 64 qualities. Therefore, ride the horse in the compound and finish the yagna. Footnotes: 1. 1. ‘Capturing the horse’ – used as a metaphor to mean that a devotee becomes attached to material pleasures instead of God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.228

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 228 · Chapter 5 · Verse 228

Vāsanā to em ṭaḷe je, āpaṇā satsangnā badhāy moṭerā sādhu bhegā hoy ne Shvetdvīp jevu dhām hoy ne Brahmānā kalp jevaḍī āvardā hoy to badhāy pāsethī ek ek - babe lakṣhaṇ shikhāy, nahī to e badhāy Sādhunā lakṣhaṇ ekmā hoy teno sang karīe to vāsanā ṭaḷī jāy. Footnotes: 1. 1. Santnā 64 lakṣhaṇ: 1. Dayāḷu, 2. Kṣhamāvāḷā, 3. Sarvajīvnu hit ichchhanārā, 4. Ṭāḍh, taḍako ādik sahan karanārā, 5. Koīnā paṇ guṇmā doṣh nahī jonārā, 6. Shānt, 7. Jeno shatru nathī thayo evā, 8. Adekhāī tathā vairthī rahit, 9. Mān tathā matsarthī rahit, 10. Bījāne mān āpanārā, 11. Priya ane satya bolnārā, 12. Kām, krodh, lobh tathā madthī rahit, 13. Aham-mamatva-rahit, 14. Svadharmamā draḍh rahenārā, 15. Dambha-rahit, 16. Andar ane bahār pavitra rahenārā, 17. Deh tathā indriyone damnārā, 18. Saraḷ swabhāvavāḷā, 19. Ghaṭit bolnārā, 20. Jitendriya tathā pramād-rahit, 21. Sukh-dukhādi-dvandva-rahit, 22. Dhīrajvāḷā, 23. Karmendriyo tathā gnānendriyonī chapaḷtāthī rahit, 24. Padārthnā sangrah-rahit, 25. Bodh karavāmā nipuṇ, 26. Ātmaniṣhṭhāvāḷā, 27. Sarvane upakār karavāvāḷā, 28. Koī paṇ prakārnā bhay rahit, 29. Koī paṇ prakārnī āshārahit, 30. Vyasan-rahit, 31. Shraddhāvāḷā, 32. Udār, 33. Tapasvī, 34. Pāparahit, 35. Grāmyakathā ne vārtā nahī sāmbhaḷnārā, 36. Satshāstranā nirantar abhyāsvāḷā, 37. Māyik panchaviṣhay-rahit, 38. Āstik buddhivāḷā, 39. Sat-asatnā vivekvāḷā, 40. Madya-mānsādiknā sansarge rahit, 41. Draḍh-vratvāḷā, 42. Koīnī chāḍī-chugalī nahī karanārā, 43. Kapaṭ-rahit, 44. Koīnī chhānī vātne prakaṭ nahī karanārā, 45. Nidrājit, 46. āhārjit, 47. Santoṣhvāḷā, 48. Sthir buddhivāḷā, 49. Hinsārahit vṛuttivāḷā, 50. Tṛuṣhṇārahit, 51. Sukh-dukhmā sambhāvavāḷā, 52. Akārya karavāmā lājvāḷā, 53. Potānā vakhāṇ nahī karanārā, 54. Bījānī nindā nahī karanārā, 55. Yathārth brahmacharya pāḷnārā, 56. Yam tathā niyamvāḷā, 57. Āsanjit, 58. Prāṇajit, 59. Bhagwānnā draḍh āshrayvāḷā, 60. Bhagwadbhakti-parāyaṇ, 61. Bhagwān arthe ja sarva kriyā karanārā, 62. Bhagwānnī mūrtimā dhyān-parāyaṇ rahenārā, 63. Bhagwānnī līlākathānu shravaṇ-kīrtan karanārā, 64. Bhagwānnī bhakti vinā ek paṇ kṣhaṇ vyartha nahī javā denārā. [Satsangijīvan (Harigītā) 1: 25-37]

Innate desires are overcome when all the senior sadhus of our Satsang are gathered together, there is an abode like Shvetdwip, and one’s lifespan is equal to a kalpa of Brahmā; then one or two virtues can be learnt from everyone. Otherwise, these innate desires can be uprooted if the company of one who has all the qualities of a Sadhu1 is kept. Footnotes: 1. 1. The 64 qualities of a sadhu (as mentioned in the Satsangijivan/Harigita: 1/25-37) are, one who: 1. Is compassionate, 2. Is forgiving, 3. Wishes the betterment of all jivas, 4. Tolerates cold, heat, etc., 5. Does not look at the flaws in others’ virtues, 6. Is tranquil, 7. Does not have an enemy, 8. Is devoid of jealousy and animosity, 9. Is free of ego and envy, 10. Honors others, Expand all qualities 11. Speaks kindly and truthfully, 12. Is free of lust, anger, greed, and arrogance, 13. Is free of I-ness and my-ness, 14. Is firm in one’s personal dharma, 15. Is free of pretentiousness, 16. Maintains physical and mental purity, 17. Punishes his body and indriyas, 18. Possesses an agreeable nature, 19. Speaks only as necessary, 20. Has control over the indriyas and free of laziness, 21. Is free from the duality of happiness and misery, 22. Possesses patience, 23. Is free from over-activity of karma-indriyas and gnan-indriyas, 24. Does not collect material objects, 25. Is an expert in instruction, 26. Possesses ātmā-realization, 27. Benefits everyone, 28. Is free of all types of fear, 29. Is free from any expectations , 30. Is free of addictions, 31. Possesses faith, 32. Is generous, 33. Is austere, 34. Is free of sin, 35. Does not listen to gossip, 36. Constantly engages in scriptural study, 37. Is free from indulging in worldly pleasures, 38. Possesses a theist intellect, 39. Possesses discretion of truth and false, 40. Is free of alcohol and meat consumption, 41. Is firm in observances of vrats, 42. Does not gossip, 43. Is free of deceit, 44. Does not reveal other’s secrets, 45. Has conquered sleep, 46. Has conquered taste, 47. Is content, 48. Has a stable mind, 49. Is inclined toward nonviolence, 50. Has no desires, 51. Has equanimity in happiness and misery, 52. Is ashamed in doing misdeeds, 53. Does not compliment himself, 54. Does not slander others, 55. Observes celibacy perfectly, 56. Has self-control and restraint, 57. Has complete control of his body, 58. Has control of his breath (and thus internal faculties), 59. Has firm refuge of God, 60. Is inclined toward devotion of God, 61. Does all activities for God’s sake, 62. Is inclined to remain in meditation of God’s murti, 63. Listens to God’s divine incidents, 64. Does not let one second pass without devotion to God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.229

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 229 · Chapter 5 · Verse 229

Āgnā lopāy to prārthanā karye chhūṭako thāy paṇ upāsanāno bhang thāvā devo nahī, te āgnānu ākaru prakaraṇ hoy ne kaheshe je, Girnār sonsarā nīkaḷī jāo to e āgnā paḷe tevī nathī; paṇ āgnā mānīne Girnārne jaīne māthu āḍāḍavu. Pachhī māg thāy to sonsaru nīkaḷavu, nīkar māthu aḍāḍī besī rahevu, eṭale Bhagwān rājī thāy.

When commands are transgressed, one is absolved by offering prayers, but do not let any lapses occur in upāsanā. And if an extremely difficult command is given, such as, go directly through Mount Girnār – and this command is not possible to follow – still, respecting the command, go to Mount Girnār and touch your head to it. Then if a path is created, go right through, otherwise touch your head and stay seated so that God is pleased.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.230

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 230 · Chapter 5 · Verse 230

Potānī vāt karī je, “Mane rūpiyānā tathā korīnā1 nāmānī khabar nathī tathā pratham kaḍiyāne ghī jokhī āpyu te sherne badale basher jokhī āpyu tathā koṭhārne tāḷu vāsyu te sānkaḷ dīdhā vinā nakūchāne tāḷu vāsyu, em amane koī vātnī vyavahārnī khabar nahotī.” Em manuṣhyacharitranī vāt karī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Chār ānā, pāvalī.

Swami spoke of himself, “I did not know how to keep an account of money. Once, I measured ghee for the masons, and instead of 500 grams, I measured out 1000 grams. Once, I fastened a lock in the metal loop of the door without using a chain. In this way, I did not know simple worldly matters.” Swami spoke of his human-like actions in this way.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.231

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 231 · Chapter 5 · Verse 231

Indriyu tathā man satsangī thāy evī āshā rākhavī nahī, te to thāy ja nahī, te to sāttvik sevyāthī paṭo ramatā1 shikhavāḍe tethī jitāy tathā niyame karīne pinḍīkaraṇpaṇu2 thāy eṭale indriyunu baḷ chāle nahī. Ne tene jītyānā traṇ upāy chhe, Muktānand Swāmī jevā hoy te shabda sāmbhaḷe to ākāshnu kāraṇ samaje, em gnāne karīne judā paḍe tathā Govindrām3 jevā upashame karīne judā paḍe ne Mayārām Bhaṭṭa jevā hoy te kriyāmā doṣh-dhyāne karīne judā paḍe, em sānkhyavichāre karīne niyammā āve chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Indriyo ne man sāthe dāv ramatā, yukti karatā. 2. Sankoch thāy, kṣhīṇatā āve. 3. Govindrām lāḍvāmā mīṭhu hatu paṇ jamī gayā.

Never harbour any hope that the senses and mind will become satsangis, for they will never. Holy people teach and guide one how to trick them and win over them. By observing austerities, physical strength is reduced, and so the power of the senses does not work. There are three methods of defeating them. Those, like Muktanand Swami, when they hear words, understand them to be a part of space (so they never get perturbed or feel insulted). In this way, by spiritual knowledge, they remain aloof. Those like Govindram are unaffected due to their state of profound tranquility. And those like Mayaram Bhatt reflect on the drawbacks of worldly activities and remain aloof. Thus, by the thoughts of Sānkhya, the senses and mind are brought under control.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.232

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 232 · Chapter 5 · Verse 232

Kaḷi Yugmā tap thāy evā deh nahī, māṭe tap karavānu lakhyu nathī. Kalau kīrtanāt,1 kīrtan karyethī pāp baḷe, ne hālatā-chālatā Swāminārāyaṇnu bhajan karyethī pāp baḷī jāy. ‘Nārāyaṇkavach’mā kahyu chhe e kalam lakhī gayā. Footnotes: 1. 1. Kṛute yad dhyāyato Viṣhṇum tretāyām yajato makhaihai; Dvāpare paricharyāyām kalau taddharikīrtanāt. (Shrīmad Bhāgwat: 12/3/52)

In this Kali-yug, the body is not capable of performing extreme austerities, therefore it is not stated to perform extreme austerities. ‘Kalau kirtanāt’ – sins are absolved by singing kirtans. And by chanting the Swaminarayan mantra while moving around, or walking, sins are absolved. This has been written in the Narayankavach.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.233

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 233 · Chapter 5 · Verse 233

Satsang kare tene māthethī kāḷ, karma ne māyānī bīk ṭaḷī gaī. Tenā rakṣhak Bhagwān thayā. Jem raiyatne1 koī dukh de to rājā vaḍhavā jāy, tem je Ved pāḷe tene Jampurīmā laī jāy nahī ne laī jāy to page lāgīne pāchho mokale ne bījāne to āhīthī ja māravā mānḍe ne yathārth Ved pāḷe to Bhagwānnā dhāmmā jāy, eṭalu to Vedmā baḷ chhe; ne Ajāmeḷ mahāpāpī hato ne tene sādhunu darshan thayu eṭalāmā Jamnā hāththī mukāṇo, ne Moṭā Sādhu hoy tenā bheḷā to Bhagwān rahe chhe, tene vegaḷā melatā nathī. Ne lokone jivāḍavā sāru varsād karyo chhe, nīkar varsād kyā chhe? Footnotes: 1. 1. Prajāne.

For those who practise satsang, the fear of kāl, karma and māyā has been banished from their minds. God has become their protector. Just as those who harass the citizens are rebuked by the king, similarly, those who observe the instructions of the Vedas cannot be taken to Yampuri, and if they are taken, then the servants of Yama would bow to them and send them back. But, they start beating others from here. And those who fully observe the Vedas go to the abode of God – that is the power of the Vedas. Ajamil was a grave sinner, but he had the darshan of a sadhu, so as a result was freed from the clutches of Yama. And God stays with the great Sadhu; he does not leave him. And to help people live, God sends rain. Otherwise, where is the rain?

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.234

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 234 · Chapter 5 · Verse 234

Viṣhayno parābhav to ek Puruṣhottam ne tenā Ekāntik Sādhu e bene ja na thāy ne te vinā bījo koī viṣhaythī nirlep rahe ja nahī, māṭe viṣhaythī chheṭe ja rahevu, ne Bhagwānno pakṣh rākhavo ne dehne to potānu rūp mānavu ja nahī ne dehne māne temā badhā dukh rahyā chhe ne dehne na māne temā dukh ja nathī.

Only Bhagwan Purushottam and his God-realized Sadhu are not defeated by the material pleasures. Apart from them, nobody else stays untouched by the material pleasures. Therefore, stay away from material pleasures, keep the support of God and do not believe the body to be one’s true form. By believing the body to be one’s true form, all miseries are harboured; and by not believing the body as one’s true form, there is no misery.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.235

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 235 · Chapter 5 · Verse 235

Udyam tathā kriyā karye akalyāṇ thātu nathī, te to karavu, paṇ pāpīno sang na karavo. Muvāku jivāve, asmān chaḍī jāve, pay anna hu na khāve, to bī māyā ke gulām he.

By endeavoring and engaging in worldly activities, one does not lose their kalyān; therefore, one should endeavor and engage in these activities. However, one should not keep the company of sinners. Muvāku jivāve, asmān chaḍī jāve, pay anna hu na khāve, to bī māyā ke gulām he.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. One may bring the dead back to life, one may fly in the sky, one may abstain from eating food or drinking water; yet, one is still a slave of māyā. Brahmanand Swami explains that no matter what powers one may achieve, because the intent of their action is to increase their own fame (due to their ego), they still succumb to māyā. Therefore, greatness is not in gaining such powers.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.236

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 236 · Chapter 5 · Verse 236

“Mahārāj hatā te dī jevā chhe tevā na oḷakhāṇā tathā Raghuvīrjī Mahārāj tathā moṭā moṭā sādhu hatā te divase jevā chhe tevā oḷakhāṇā nahī. Pachhavāḍethī vakhāṇ thāy chhe. Hāl paṇ jem chhe tem Sādhu oḷakhātā nathī.” Nāraṇ Bhakte pūchhyu je, “Bhagwān jem chhe tem kem oḷakhātā nathī?” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Jem chhe tem oḷakhāve to samās na thāy, ūlaṭo asamās thāy. Ne Mahārāje jem chhe tem vātu karī tethī sau māṇas vartamānmāthī paḍī gayā. Pachhī Mahārāje keṭlāk Vachanāmṛut khoṭā karī nākhyā ne kahe je, ‘Eke Vachanāmṛut rākhavu nathī.’ Pachhī Nityānand Swāmīe prārthanā karīne kahyu je, ‘Dharmāmṛutamā tathā shāstramā maḷatu āve em shodhīne lakhashu.’ Tyāre āṭalā rahevā dīdhā; māṭe jem chhe tem samajāve to samās na thāy, māṭe em samajavu je, Mahārāje karyu chhe te āpaṇu sāru thāy em karyu chhe, nīkar bījānā jevu āpaṇu thaī jāy. Temā ne āmā fer rahe nahī.”

Swami said, “When Maharaj was present, no one understood his true greatness as it was. And when Raghuvirji Maharaj and other great sadhus were present, no one understood their true greatness as well. Now that they are not present, everyone praises them. And today, no one understands the greatness of the Sadhu as it is.” Nāran Bhakta asked, “Why does one not understand God as he is?” Swami answered, “If he revealed himself as he is, then that would cause regression rather than progression. When Maharaj did reveal his true identity, the unworthy transgressed the observance of the religious vows.1 Then, Maharaj excluded many Vachanamruts2 and said, ‘I do not want to keep any Vachanamrut.’ But Nityānand Swāmi prayed, ‘We will keep the ones that conform to the Dharmāmrut and the scriptures.’ Then Maharaj agreed to that. Therefore, if he explained his true form as it is, one would not progress. One should understand that whatever Maharaj did was for our own benefit. Otherwise, we would also start to transgress our religious vows like others and there would be no difference between us and others.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami purport here is that when Maharaj spoke of his extraordinary greatness, the unworthy started transgressing the religious vows, mistakenly thinking that as long as we understand his greatness, he will liberate us. 2. The Vachanamruts Maharaj is referring to here are the ones that reveal his supremacy. Maharaj has said in a few Vachanamruts that as long as one understands the greatness of the manifest form of God, even if one sins by mistake, they will still be liberated. However, the unworthy mistook that and used their understanding of God’s greatness to purposefully transgress the religious vows. Therefore, Maharaj wanted to eliminate all the Vachanamruts. For this reason, Swami says in this vāt that when one is unworthy and he listens to the talks of God’s supremacy, one may regress by transgressing the religious vows.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.237

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 237 · Chapter 5 · Verse 237

Satsangī jevā chhe tevā samajātā nathī, sādhu jevā chhe tevā samajātā nathī ne potāne potānā jīvnī paṇ khabar nathī je, mane kevā samarth maḷyā chhe. Ne tyāgī thaīne ṭopī ghāle temā shu ūghaḍyu? Bhagwān ne Moṭā Sādhunu rahasya to samajātu nathī. Te rahasya to e chhe je, brahmarūp thaīne het karavu. Ne ā to vege chaḍī javāṇu chhe, tyāgne vege chaḍī javāy, rāgne vege chaḍī javāy ne gappā māravāne vege chaḍī javāy, paṇ rahasya samajāy nahī tyā sudhī shu ūghaḍyu? Ne jāṇe je, hu māru rūḍu karīsh, paṇ te to Moṭā karashe to ja thāshe. Ne mahimā to evo chhe je, panch mahāpāp baḷī jāy ne kāḷo sarp karaḍyo hoy to chaḍe nahī, kharekharo vishvās hoy to; ne por1 vagar varsāde kāṇā pakavyā. Footnotes: 1. 1. Gaye varṣhe.

Satsangis and sadhus are not understood as they really are. One is not even aware of one’s own real self and how powerful is the one whom we have attained. And what is gained if one renounces and then still seeks power and fame? The essence of (the principles of) God and the great Sadhu is not understood. The essence is to become brahmarup and then offer devotion with deep affection. This is because one is carried away on the spur of the moment. On the spur of the moment, one renounces, enjoys desires and indulges in idle talks. But until the essence is understood, what is attained? And one thinks, “I will do good for myself.” But that will happen only if the great (Sadhu) makes it happen. His glory is such that the five grave sins are burnt (to ashes) and the poison from the bite of a black cobra has no effect – if one has true faith in him.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.238

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 238 · Chapter 5 · Verse 238

Viṣhayno ant āve tem nathī. Pachhī Suthār Mādhā Bhakte pūchhyu je, “Nirmūḷ kem thāy?” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Nirmūḷ thayā hoy tenā sangthī gnān thāy, vairāgya thāy, vivek āve ne ātmā ne deh judā samajāy to nirmūḷ thāy. Te Shukjī, Jaḍbharat, Janak, Ambarīṣh enā viṣhay nirmūḷ thayelā jāṇavā. Māṭe nadīno, hruṣhino, strīno ne viṣhayno ant levo nahī. Ne Ved tathā Shikṣhāpatrī pramāṇe vartavu. Ne velo chhe te uparthī sukāī jāy ne mūḷmā līlo rahe to upar paṇ līlo rahe ne mūḷmāthī kāpī nākhe to ṭaḷī jāy, kriyā to pūrvanā sanskārne anusāre thāy chhe, ne “Koī kahe Hari ho gaye, koī kahe hovanhār, Mukta pragaṭkī prīchh bīn, bhaṭakat sab sansār. “Āgaḷ thaī gayā tenā sāru kūṭe chhe ne āgaḷ thāshe tenā sāru kūṭe chhe paṇ ā pragaṭ chhe tene koī māntu nathī.”

“There is no end to enjoying the pleasures of the senses.” Then, the devotee Mādhā Suthār asked, “How can the desires (for enjoying pleasures) become uprooted?” Swami answered, “By the company of one whose desires have been uprooted, one gains gnān, develops vairāgya, learns vivek, and understands that the body and the ātmā are separate. Then the desires become uprooted. One should understand that Shukji, Jadbharat, Janak, and Ambarish had uprooted their desires. Besides, there is no end to a river, rishi, a woman, and the pleasure of the senses. Moreover, one should live according to the Vedas and the Shikshāpatri. Even if a vine dries up, if its roots are green, then it will remain green. However, if its roots are cut, then it will die. One’s actions are according to the past sanskārs. And, Koī kahe Hari ho gaye, koī kahe hovanhār, Mukta pragaṭkī prīchh bīn, bhaṭakat sab sansār. “People beat their heads for those that occurred in the past (they long to meet the avatārs that occurred in the past) and they beat their heads for the avatār that will occur in the future; but no one believes in the manifest that is here presently.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.239

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 239 · Chapter 5 · Verse 239

Rājā tap karavā gayo tene thāḷ āve ne ek garīb tap karavā gayo tene roṭalo āve. Tyāre kahe je, “E tap kare chhe ne hu paṇ tap karu chhu ne mane āvu kem maḷe chhe?” Tyāre kahyu je, “Tune gher roṭalo maḷato nahī, te tapanā pratāpthī roṭalo maḷe chhe ne rājā to thāḷ mūkīne āvyo chhe tethī thāḷ āpavo paḍe chhe.”

A king went to perform austerities and he received a full dish; and a poor man went to perform austerities and he received only a piece of millet bread. Then the poor man said, “He does austerities and I also do austerities, so why do I get this only?” Then it was said, “At home you did not get even a piece of millet bread and by the virtue of your austerities you get it. But, the king has left a complete dinner and so we have to give him a full dish.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.240

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 240 · Chapter 5 · Verse 240

Ek manuṣhyane khāvā na maḷe ne ek baḷad lāḍvāne paṇ khāy nahī. Pachhī e manuṣhye tap karavā mānḍyu tyāre khoro loṭ maḷavā mānḍyo. Tyāre kahe je, “Hu tap karu chhu tene roṭalā maḷatā nathī ne ā baḷadne lāḍvā kem maḷe chhe?” Tyāre kahyu je, “Te kāī karyu nathī, te have tap karīsh te pachhī maḷashe ne ā baḷade to bahu karyu chhe, paṇ kāī sanskārthī baḷadno deh āvyo chhe. Te deh mūkīne Bhagwānnā dhāmmā jāshe.” E rīte gnāne karīne tathā tape karīne muktamā adhik-nyūnpaṇu chhe. Prahlādnu deh Bhagwāne jīvnā jevu karyu, tethī baḷe nahī, saḍe nahī ne shastra paṇ vāge nahī. Evu thāy tyā Bhagwānnu kartavya jāṇavu. Evu bhaktathī potā vate thāy nahī ne dehdhārīmā to Shrī Kṛuṣhṇane bāṇ vāgyā ne Prahlādne bāṇ na vāgyā, e Bhagwānnu kartavya samajavu. Ne pāṇīmā chhāṇu tare em pṛuthvī pāṇīmā tare chhe. Ne pāsherno pāṇo ḍūbī jāy ne ā keṭlāk parvat chhe paṇ ḍūbatā nathī e Bhagwānnu kartavya chhe. Tem ja jaṭharāgni tathā varsādnā māhātmyanī vāt karī.

One man did not get any food to eat whereas an ox got sweets which it could not eat. Then the man began performing austerities and he got rancid flour. Then he wondered, “I perform austerities and do not even get simple food, so why does this ox get sweets?” Then he was told, “You have not done anything pious yet, and now if you perform austerities then afterwards you will get the fruits. And the ox had done a lot of good, but due to some deeds of past births has attained the body of an ox. It will leave this body and go to God’s abode.” In this way, due to spiritual knowledge and austerities, there is a gradation in the moksha attained. God made Prahlad’s body (indestructible) like a jiva and so it would not burn, would not rot and could not be hurt even by weapons. When these kinds of events happen, know them to be the work of God. This cannot be done by devotion on one’s own. And among those who possessed a body, Shri Krishna was injured by an arrow while arrows did not injure Prahlad – understand this to be the work of God. Also, just as cow dung floats in water, this earth is floating in water. Even a quarter-pound stone sinks, while there are so many mountains (in the middle of the ocean, i.e. islands) but they do not sink – this is all the work of God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.241

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 241 · Chapter 5 · Verse 241

Ā jīv chhe te jyā sudhī Bhagwānne sharaṇe na jāy tyā sudhī game teṭalu kare ne devtā thāy, īshvar thāy ke game teṭalī moṭāīne pāme paṇ kāḷ, karma, māyā, garbhavās, ne narkanā kunḍathī tare nahī ne jyā sudhī garbhavāsmā āve tyā sudhī narkanā kunḍamā shu bākī chhe? Ne Bhagwānne sharaṇe jāy tyāre kāḷ, karma, māyā, garbhavās ne narkanā kunḍanu dukh ene māthethī ṭaḷī jāy chhe.

This jiva may do anything – become a deity, an ishwar or attain any degree of greatness – but until it seeks refuge at the feet of God, it will not overcome kāl, karma, māyā, birth and the pits of hell. And as long as it has to stay in the womb, what is the difference between that and the pits of hell? When it seeks refuge at the feet of God, then all misery due to kāl, karma, māyā, birth and the pits of hell are all removed from its fate.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.242

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 242 · Chapter 5 · Verse 242

Koṭhārmā Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “He Mahārāj! Āsharānu shu rūp chhe?” Tyāre uttar karyo je, “Bāyaḍī-chhokarāno āsharo chhe tem tathā rūpiyā hashe to bhūkhe nahī marāy e āsharo, tem ja Bhagwān vinā bījāmā māl na māne e āsharānu rūp. Evo āsharo hoy tene Bhagwān Sādhuno sang āpī, gnān āpīne potānī pāse rākhe ne evā bhaktanī fakar Bhagwānne chhe, jem āpaṇā mandirmā āj māṇas āvyu ne kāl māndu paḍe, pachhī vīs varas māndu rahe to paṇ chākarī āpaṇe karavī paḍe ne tenī fakar āpaṇne hoy.” Pachhī pūchhyu je, “Bhagwān maḷyā pachhī Bhagwānnā bhakta sāthe ahankār kem rahe chhe?” Tyāre uttar karyo je, “E to rajoguṇmā em rahe ja.”

In the storeroom, Harishankarbhai asked, “O Maharaj! What is the nature of true refuge?” The answer, “Like the refuge one has in wife and children, and the refuge in money - that one will not die of hunger if one has money, similarly, believing that there is no worth in anything except God is the nature of true refuge. For one who has such true refuge, God gives the company of a Sadhu, gives spiritual knowledge and keeps him near him, and for such a devotee, God cares. Just as if a person comes to our mandir today and falls ill tomorrow and remains ill for 20 years, still we have to serve him and worry about him.” Then he asked, “Even after attaining God, why does ego remain before a devotee of God?” Then he replied, “In the state of rajogun it remains like that (even in a devotee of God).”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.243

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 243 · Chapter 5 · Verse 243

Swāmīe vāt karī je, “Koī beṭho Bhagwān bhaje to tene āhī amāre roṭalā āpavā ne tenā gharnā manuṣhyane anna, vastra pūrā karavā e amāre māthe chhe.” Em dayā karīne kahyu.

Swami said, “If someone sits and worships God, then here (on earth) I have to give him food and provide food and clothes to the members of his family. That is my responsibility.” Thus, he said this out of compassion.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.244

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 244 · Chapter 5 · Verse 244

Ghar vechīne Bhagwān bhajavā, kāraṇ ke deh mūkīne pachhī gharmā koṇ rahenāru chhe?

Sell even your house (i.e. use your body) and worship God, since after leaving the body, who is there to stay in the house (i.e. the body)?

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.245

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 245 · Chapter 5 · Verse 245

“Kārtik Swāmīe pṛuthvīnī pradakṣhiṇā karī, ne Gaṇpatine Pārvatīe kaḷā batāvī tethī pṛuthvīnī pradakṣhiṇā karavī na paḍī ne kanyā maḷī. Em Moṭānā samāgammā chhe.” Mādhavjī Suthārnu1 nām laīne sarvene kahyu je, “Ā samāgammā rahetā nathī eṭalī khoṭya chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Mādhavjī Suthār mūḷ Dhorājīnā. Swāmī viṣhe sadbhāv, paṇ kriyāpradhān jīvan hoī kathā-vārtāmā ochhu bese.

Kartik Swami circled the earth. But Ganapati was shown a short cut technique by Parvati, in which he did not have to circumambulate the earth and so won the race for the bride. This is the benefit that one gets from the company of the great.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.246

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 246 · Chapter 5 · Verse 246

Sārā māṇasne vartavāmā to fer nathī paṇ samajavāmā fer rahe chhe.

Good people do not act differently but they have a different understanding (regarding the form of God and his holy Sadhu).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.247

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 247 · Chapter 5 · Verse 247

‘Ghāyal thaīne faratī ḍolu sūze nahī gharbār re.’ Eno arth je, āhī rahevātu nathī ne gharmā paṇ goṭhatu nathī.

‘Ghāyal thaīne faratī ḍolu sūze nahī gharbār re.’1 Swami explained the meaning, “One cannot stay here (with the Satpurush) and one does like staying home.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Meaning: A devotee lost in his love with God sees God in all of his activities. His mind is not interested in the worldly tasks. However, Gunatitanand Swami is explaining these lines in his own special way here.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.248

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 248 · Chapter 5 · Verse 248

“Strī hoy te sarva āpīne dhaṇī rākhe, kāraṇ ke ranḍāpo to gāḷavo na paḍe.” Te upar Harishankarbhāīnu draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, “Sūtā sūtā khāīne paṇ gharmā rahe to ranḍāpo to gāḷavo na paḍe. Tem āpaṇe sarve āpīne Bhagwān rākhavā.”

A wife would give up everything to retain her husband, and avoid widowhood. Similarly, we should give up everything and keep God.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.249

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 249 · Chapter 5 · Verse 249

“Vyāsjīe kīḍāne traṇ-chār janma levarāvīne paṇ mokṣha karyo, tem Moṭāno samāgam thayo hoy to te chhoḍe nahī.” Tyāre Harishankarbhāīe pūchhyu je, “Eṭalā janma levarāvavā te karatā ek janme ja kem pār pāḍyu nahī?” Tyāre uttar karyo je, “Gnān thayā vinā pār paḍe nahī ne Moṭā to ek janme ja gnān āpe, paṇ māne nahī.” Tyā draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, “Ek haribhaktanā upar amāre tamārā jeṭalu ja het hatu paṇ māru mānyu nahī ne farī ghar karyu.”

Vyasji made the worm take three to four births, but liberated it; similarly, we have the company of the great Sadhu and he will lead us to Akshardham and nowhere else. Then Harishankarbhai asked, “Instead of making the worm take so many births, why did he not accomplish it in one birth?” Then Swami replied, “Without spiritual knowledge it cannot be accomplished. And the great give spiritual knowledge in one birth only, but we do not believe in what they say.” Then he gave an example, “I had as much affection for one devotee as I have for you, but he did not listen to me and remarried.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.250

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 250 · Chapter 5 · Verse 250

Moṭā lagār paṇ draṣhṭi kare to kāmādik pīḍī shake nahī ne potānī meḷe game teṭalā dākhaḍā kare paṇ kāmādik parābhav karyā vinā rahe ja nahī. Māṭe Moṭāno draḍh āsharo karavo.

If the great Sadhu casts even a slight glance, lust, etc. cannot harass. And, despite any amount of effort on one’s own, lust, etc. will still overpower one. Therefore, take firm refuge at the feet of the great Sadhu.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.251

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 251 · Chapter 5 · Verse 251

Upāsanānā Vachanāmṛut das, vīs, pachīs judā kāḍhīne teno veg1 lagāḍvo tathā Sādhunā mahimānā judā kāḍhīne teno veg lagāḍvo ne em karyā vinā Vyākaraṇ bhaṇe to paṇ mūḷagī khoṭya āvo, kāraṇ ke anek shabda haiyāmā bharyā tethī jem chhe tem samajāy nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Vānchan, shravaṇ, manan, nididhyāsanthī manḍī paḍavu.

Select ten, twenty, twenty-five Vachanamruts that focus on upāsanā and study them; and also pick out those which discuss the glory of the Sadhu and study them. Without doing this, even if one studies grammar, still one will be at a total loss. Since, many words have been filled in one’s heart and so, they cannot be understood in their true sense.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.252

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 252 · Chapter 5 · Verse 252

Bhagwānno dīkaro hoy to paṇ sādhu-samāgam vinā ne Vachanāmṛutne laīne beṭhā vinā samajāy nahī. Ne tem na kare to Sādhumā jevo māl chhe tevo jaṇāto nathī, māṭe ām abhyās karyethī ja kasar ṭaḷe chhe.

Even if one is a son of God, still, without the company of a great Sadhu and without sitting down with the Vachanamrut, the glory of God and his holy Sadhu is not understood. So, if one does not do this, then one does not realize the qualities of the Sadhu as they are. Therefore, only by study like this are deficiencies removed.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.253

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 253 · Chapter 5 · Verse 253

Viṣhay thakī to jīv potānī meḷe judā paḍī shake ja nahī ne viṣhay mūkavā jāy to bamaṇā bandhāy ne Moṭā Sādhu thakī to viṣhaythī judu paḍāy; tyā draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, ‘Dūdh ne pāṇī koīthī judā paḍe ja nahī. Paṇ hansathī judā paḍe chhe.’

The jivas cannot separate from material pleasures on their own. And if they attempt to leave them, then they becomes doubly bound. But with the help of the great Sadhu they can become separate. There, an example was given, “Nobody can separate milk and water. But they are separated by the mythical swan.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. The mythical swan is called the hansa and is recognized by its ability to separate a mixture of water and milk by merely pecking at the mixture. The hansa are said to graze on only pearls. In this Kali-yug false sadhus can be compared to black hansas. Those who encourage devotion and live a disciplined life in keeping with the commands of God, the scriptures and the holy Sadhu are true hansas. With just a word, they cleanly separate the truth from falsity and worldly pleasures from spiritual joy. Those who can destroy our worldly desires and attachment are true hansas – true Sadhus.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.254

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 254 · Chapter 5 · Verse 254

Sānkhyavichārvāḷo hoy te vastumātrane panchabhūtnī ne nāshvant samaje, te bhegī Bhagwānnī mūrtino niṣhedh thāy, māṭe sānkhye sahit yog shīkhavo ne Brahmarūp thāvu ne viṣhay khoṭā chhe em to kahetā jībh ūpaḍe ja nahī, te to Moṭānā pratāpthī kahevāy.

One who has developed the thoughts of Sānkhya understands all things to be made of the five gross elements (earth, water, light, wind and space) and to be perishable. With this, the murti of God is also negated (as they believe it is made from gross elements). Therefore, learn Sānkhya together with Yoga, which propounds the worship of God’s murti for moksha, and become brahmarup. But, one is unable to declare that the material pleasures are illusory (since everyone enjoys them); that can only be said by the grace of the great Sadhu (who really shuns all worldly objects and pleasures).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.255

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 255 · Chapter 5 · Verse 255

Avī vāt potāne manmā jāṇī rākhavī te kahevī ja nahī, paṇ bahu āgrah hoy tene kahevī ne alp-vachanā thāvu1. Ne ā dekhāy chhe evī ne evī mūrti Akṣhardhāmmā chhe, lagāre fer nathī. Emā tej vadhāre dekhāḍe chhe eṭalo ja fer chhe. Ā dekhāy chhe e ja mūrti Akṣhardhāmmā chhe em samajvāmā kāchyap eṭalī kāchyap chhe; māṭe divyabhāv manuṣhyabhāv ek samajavo eṭale thaī rahyu. Bīju to tenī pachhavāḍe āfūḍu samajāshe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Thoḍā bolā thavu.

The form of God that is in Akshardham and the one which you see (Bhagwan Swaminarayan) are identical. the only difference is that the former shows more light. The only deficiency is in not understanding this murti, which one is seeing, to be the same as the murti in Akshardham. Therefore, understand divine traits and human traits to be one and the same, and everything is achieved. All other things will be automatically understood afterwards.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.256

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 256 · Chapter 5 · Verse 256

Vyavahār chhe te karavo ne mane karīne judā rahevu. Dhṛutrāṣhṭra ne Bhīm maḷyā evu het vyavahārmā dehe karīne rākhavu. Garāsiyānā jevu het rākhavu;1 mane karīne ne jīve karīne judā rahevu, temā bhaḷavā āve teno tyāg karavo. Vahevārmā harakhshok thāy e ja māyānu rūp chhe. Dehe karīne rāj karavu paṇ jīv to Bhagwānmā ja joḍī devo je, hu Bhagwānno chhu ne Bhagwān mārā chhe, em jīv jaḍī devo ne bhajan ochhu thāshe, kīrtan ochhā gavāshe, tenī fikar nathī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Uparchhallu het. Garāsiyā pote kṣhatriya jāti. Teo potānā verīne paṇ bāthmā ghālīne maḷe. Paraspar bannenā hṛudaymā zer hoy, paṇ monī mīṭhāsh ne lāgaṇīnā umaḷkāmā jaṇāvā na de.

Engage in worldly affairs but remain mentally detached. With the body keep attachment for worldly activities like that of Dhritrashtra for Bhim when they embraced.1 Keep affection like that of a Garāsiyo.2 Remain aloof by mind and soul from worldly affairs and renounce that which tries to enter them. Feelings of happiness and misery in worldly activities is the form of māyā. With the body, rule even a kingdom, but the jiva must be attached to God. ‘I am God’s and God is mine.’ In this way attach the jiva to God. And in the process, if less worship is offered and fewer bhajans are sung, there is nothing to worry about. Footnotes: 1. 1. Dhritrashtra embraced Bhim without any attachment for him and with the intention of crushing him to death. 2. Superficial affection. A Garasiyo is of the warrior community. He embraces even his enemies. They both hate each other, but exhibit such outward affection and respect that their true, inner feelings are masked.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.257

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 257 · Chapter 5 · Verse 257

Potānu kalyāṇ karavāmā draṣhṭi barābar rākhavī ne bījānu kalyāṇ to loṭo-joṭo1 karavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Jevu-tevu.

Keep a proper focus in attaining one’s own moksha and make only simple efforts for the moksha of others.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.258

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 258 · Chapter 5 · Verse 258

Vidyā bhaṇāvavī te buddhi āvavā vāste tathā satsangmā rahevā vāste ne āvardā kāpavā vāste chhe.

The purpose of studying and teaching is so that one gains knowledge, stays in Satsang, and to pass their life.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.259

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 259 · Chapter 5 · Verse 259

Bhagwāne karmano ek koṭhār ughāḍīne ardhā koṭhārnā viṣhay karyā chhe, ne ardhā koṭhārnī indriyu karī chhe, māṭe te to sajāti chhe te ekatā thaī jāy ne jīv to judo ekalo tenāthī vijāti chhe, te bhaḷe nahī.

God has opened a storeroom of karmas. And from half the store, he has made material objects, and from the other half he has made the senses. Therefore, since they are of similar nature, they unite, while the jiva alone is separate and different from both of them and does not mix with them.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.260

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 260 · Chapter 5 · Verse 260

Rūprām Ṭhākar brāhmaṇne na jamāḍe ne satsangī koḷīne jamāḍtā.

Rupram Thakar would not feed the brāhmins but would feed the kolis who were satsangis.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.261

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 261 · Chapter 5 · Verse 261

Traṇ deh, traṇ avasthā, traṇ guṇ tethī judā paḍīne Guṇātīt thāvu tathā brahmarūp thāvu ne enī kriyāthī judā paḍavu je, e to dehnā tathā avasthānā guṇ chhe, māṭe tene mānavā nahī ne khoṭā jāṇavā, ne āvī rītno vivek to Moṭā Puruṣh vinā bījāne samajāy ja nahī.

One should separate themselves from the three bodies, the three states, and the three gunas and become gunātit and brahmarup; and one should remain aloof from the activities of the body. One should disregard the actions of the body and consider them as false. This type of discretion cannot be understood by anyone other than the Mota-Purush.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.262

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 262 · Chapter 5 · Verse 262

Āpaṇne satsang maḷyo chhe tevo koīne maḷyo nathī. Māṭe ā samāmā Sādhu jevā chhe tevā nahī oḷakhāy, haribhakta nahī oḷakhāy, Bhagwānnu swarūp jem chhe tem nahī samajāy ne āgnā barābar nahī paḷāy eṭalī khoṭya āvashe.

No one has attained the satsang that we have attained. Therefore, in this present time, one will only face shortcomings if they have not understood the Sadhu as he is, the devotees as they are, the form of God as it is, or do not observe his commands properly.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.263

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 263 · Chapter 5 · Verse 263

Ā loknu sukh kevu chhe to soḷ dahāḍānu shrāddha ne pachhī bandhūknī goḷiyu chhe. Ne Kṛupānand Swāmīne samādhimāthī uṭhāḍyānī vāt karī.

What is the happiness of this world like? It is like the joy for crows during the sixteen days of shrāddh when they are offered good food and then they face the bullets of the rifle.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.264

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 264 · Chapter 5 · Verse 264

Vaḍādarā1 jem koīne mā kahe, ben kahe, bā kahe, māsī kahe e sarve dāṇā levā sāru chhe; tem āpaṇe mane karīne sarvethī judā rahevu. Ne eṭalo badho chhaḷ2 kare to Bhagwān bhajāy. Footnotes: 1. 1. Loṭ māgnārā ek jātnā brāhmaṇo. 2. Yukti.

Brahmins who beg for grains or flour will address ladies in turn as mother, sister, grandmother or aunt – all this to get grains. Similarly, we should remain mentally separate from all worldly objects and relations. When this technique is used, then God can be worshipped.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.265

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 265 · Chapter 5 · Verse 265

Upāsanā e ja bhakti chhe. Ne game tevā moṭā viṣhay dekhīne temā moh na pāmavo, evī samajaṇ karavī. Ne prakṛutinī āṇīkornā1 viṣhayne viṣhṭā jevā jāṇavā, paṇ mane karīne emā māl mānavo nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Prakṛuti-Puruṣhnā lokthī nīchenā, devatā ādinā viṣhay sukh.

Upāsanā is itself devotion. Develop such an understanding that even after seeing the most tempting material pleasures, one is not attracted to them. Below Prakruti, know the material pleasures to be like waste, and in the mind do not believe them to be of any worth.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.266

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 266 · Chapter 5 · Verse 266

Burānpurmā ḍoshiyu pāse be mahinā ame vātu karī hatī, paṇ man jāvā dīdhu nathī; kem je, man āpaṇu nathī māṭe tenāthī judā rahevu.

I spoke to women in Buranpur for two months but I did not allow my mind to be drawn to them, because the mind is not ours. Therefore, one should separate from their mind (not allow it to control oneself).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.267

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 267 · Chapter 5 · Verse 267

Panch-viṣhayne ṭāḷavā sāru sarvee bheṭyu bāndhī1 chhe paṇ te to ṭaḷe ja nahī. Ne te kyāre ṭaḷe? To traṇ deh thakī par potānu swarūp Brahmaswarūp māne to ja ṭaḷe. Pachhī te Akhanḍānand thāy, Ātmānand thāy, Akṣharānand thāy, pachhī tene kāī lāge ja nahī. Jem pṛuthvīmā kriyā thāy chhe te ākāshne lāge ja nahī ne jem Gujarāt deshmā khode to pāṇo āve ja nahī, tem tene lāge ja nahī. Ne shāstramā to badhāy shabda sarakhā hoy nahī, be ām hoy ne be ām hoy, paṇ ekdhārā shabda hoy nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Kamar kasī.

Everyone is eagerly prepared to overcome the five types of sense objects, but they cannot be overcome. When can they be overcome? Only when one’s form is believed as brahman (brahmarup), above the three bodies. Then one experiences the joy of being ātmā, eternal and imperishable, and one is not affected by anything. Just as actions performed on the earth do not affect the sky, and just as when digging in the soil of Gujarat no stones are encountered, similarly, they are not affected. And not all the words of the scriptures are the same. There are some referring to one thing and others referring to something else. But the words are not all the same.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.268

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 268 · Chapter 5 · Verse 268

Kathā-vārtā, kīrtan ne dhyān emānthī tṛupti pāmavī nahī ne Bhagwānnī mūrtimā manuṣhyabhāv kalpe e droh karyo kahevāy ne sākār samajavā, sarvoparī samajavā te karatā paṇ ā vāt aṭpaṭī chhe. Māṭe Bhagwānnī pragaṭ mūrtine viṣhe traṇ dehno tathā traṇ guṇno tathā traṇ avasthāno bhāv tathā indriyunī kriyā dekhāy, paṇ te Bhagwānnī mūrtine viṣhe samajavo j nahī, paṇ dekhāy chhe te to naṭnā draṣhṭāntnī peṭhe samajavu.

Do not be contented with spiritual discourses and discussions, devotional songs and meditation. To attribute human traits to the manifest form of God is considered to be blasphemy. This statement is more complex and difficult to understand than to know God as being with a definite human form and supreme. So, the characteristics of the three bodies, three gunas and the three states, as well as the actions of the senses may be seen in the manifest murti of God. Yet they should be understood to be like the illusion of a magician.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.269

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 269 · Chapter 5 · Verse 269

Muktānand Swāmīe Mahārājne pūchhyu je, “Shānti kem thāy?” Tyāre Mahārāje potānā charitra kahī dekhāḍyā ne sankalp karyo je, “Amārā darshan kare teno mokṣha thāy, ne amārā darshan na thāy ne amārā sādhunā darshan kare teno mokṣha thāy, ne tenā darshan na thāy to amārā haribhaktanā darshan kare tathā tenā goḷānu pāṇī pīe, tenā roṭalā jame teno mokṣha karavo. Evo sankalp karyo chhe.” Shānti thayāno upāya bavātyo, paṇ Muktānand Swāmīne samajāṇu nahī ne shānti to ā upāy kahyo tethī ja thāy, paṇ koī sādhan karyāthī shānti thāy ja nahī. Sādhanthī to vighna na lāge.

Muktanand Swami asked Maharaj, “How can peace be attained?” Then Maharaj described his own exploits and resolved, “Those who have my darshan will attain moksha. If my darshan is not attained, then one who has the darshan of my sadhus will attain moksha. And if their darshan is not possible, then one who has the darshan of my devotees or drinks the water or eats the food offered by them will attain moksha. That is what I have resolved.” He showed this as the route to peace, but Muktanand Swami did not understand it. And peace is possible only by this method of remembering divine exploits. It is not attained through any other endeavours. Through endeavours, obstacles are not encountered.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.270

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 270 · Chapter 5 · Verse 270

Vātu karavā mānḍe tyāre potānu ang bandhāy ne farī farīne eknī ek vāt karavānu prayojan e chhe je, potānī meḷe ekalā ja vāt samajyā hoīe te koī feravnār maḷe to farī jāy, ne pachās-so māṇase maḷī nakkī karyu hoy to pachhī koīthī fare nahī. Ne sūkṣhma vātu chhe te draṣhṭānte karīne sthūḷ jevī samajāy chhe, te to kahetā āvaḍe tethī tathā Bhagwānnī ichchhāthī samajāy chhe.

One’s inclination becomes consolidated when one begins to speak (about God). And there is only one purpose to talk about the same thing over and over again: If you are the only one to have understood something, and if someone says something to the contrary, then you will lose your understanding. However, if 50 or 100 people come together and consolidate their understanding, then that understanding will not be lost. And the subtle talks are understood with concrete examples. And these are understood when one learns how to tell others and because of God’s wish.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.271

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 271 · Chapter 5 · Verse 271

Ghanshyāmdāsjī1 Mahārājnā bhegā akhanḍ rahyā paṇ kāī samajyā nahī ne kasar ghaṇī ja rahī gaī. Pachhī Mahārāje kahyu je, “Tune hamaṇā nahī samajāy, āgaḷ koī Sādhu samajāvshe.” Pachhī āj badhī vāt samajāvīne kasar ṭāḷī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Pūrvāshramnā Nājā Jogiyā.

Ghanshyamdasji stayed close to Maharaj but did not gain any understanding and many shortcomings remained. Then, Maharaj said, “You will not understand right now, but in the future, some sadhu will explain it to you.” Then, today, [I] spoke to him and rid him of his shortcomings.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.272

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 272 · Chapter 5 · Verse 272

Manuṣhyabhāv, divyabhāv ek samajyā hoīe ne nishchay karyo hoy pachhī Bhagwān ḍagmagāṭ karāve ne feravavānu kare to paṇ faravu nahī. Jem Nityānand Swāmī na faryā tem.

If one has understood the human traits and divine traits (of God) as one, and then one has developed the conviction of God, then no matter how much God tries to sway one’s mind, one should not sway; just like Nityanand Swami did not sway.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.273

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 273 · Chapter 5 · Verse 273

Deh dharyā hatā paṇ sangne joge karīne prasang lāgyā hatā. Pachhī kāḍhanār maḷyā tyāre nīkaḷyā ne hamaṇā paṇ emanu em keṭlāknu chhe. Paṇ potānī meḷe to chālī nīkaḷāy ja nahī, kem je, sange karīne prasang to lāge ja.

People take birth, but because of the company they keep they develop profound association with worldly objects. When they meet one who can remove these attachments then they are removed. Still now, for many, it is the same, since one cannot shed the desire for material pleasures on one’s own. Thus, one becomes like the company one keeps.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.274

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 274 · Chapter 5 · Verse 274

Ḍoshiyune sādhue vāt na karavī evo prabandh bāndhīne kahyu je, “Hu Bhagwān chhu to tenu kalyāṇ karīsh. Māṭe gṛuhasthne mā, bahen, dīkarī ne strī te chār vinā bījāne vāt karavī nahī. Nīkar tene māthe koīk kalank mūkashe, tethī vimukh thāshe ne dukh āvashe.”

Sadhus should not talk to women. Establishing this rule, Maharaj said, “I am God and will grant women moksha. Therefore, a householder should not talk to any other women in private except these four: mother, sister, daughter and wife. Otherwise, someone will accuse him and so he will be excommunicated, resulting in misery.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.275

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 275 · Chapter 5 · Verse 275

Deh potānu nathī ne potānu māne chhe e ja agnān chhe, e agnān to ṭaḷe ja nahī ne jenā upar Bhagwān ne Moṭā Sādhu kṛupā kare tenu agnān ṭaḷe.

The body (really) does not belong to us but it is believed as our own; this is ignorance. This ignorance is not overcome for aeons, but, those on whom God and the great Sadhu confer their grace, their ignorance is overcome.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.276

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 276 · Chapter 5 · Verse 276

Gṛuhasthne shobhā te tyāgīne dūṣhaṇ, ne tyāgīne shobhā te gṛuhasthne kalankrūp chhe. Tem ja sadhavā-vidhavānu paṇ samajavu.

What befits a householder is a blemish for renunciants; and what befits a renunciant is a blemish for householders. Understand in the same way for married women and widows.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.277

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 277 · Chapter 5 · Verse 277

Jeno kāgaḷ āvyo hoy te panḍe ja maḷe ne ām sāmsāmā beṭhā eṭale kāgaḷmā prīti na karavī, pragaṭ Bhagwānnī mūrti āgaḷ gnān, vairāgya, ātmaniṣhṭhā e sarve khāṭī chhāsh jevā chhe, emā kāī māl nathī. E to ang chhe te raheshe ja. ‘Khāṭī chhāsme kā sukh māne, sūr khavaiyo ghīko he’1 em ek Bhagwānnā ādhār vinā bīju badhu khāru jaḷ ja chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sūrdāsnā padnī antim pankti. Bhagwānnu sukh ghī jevu maḷyu, pachhī khāṭī chhāsh jevā sansārmā shu māl mānavo?

If the writer of a letter himself arrives and sits in front, as we are sitting now, then do not bother about the letter he had written. Compared to the murti of the manifest form of God, spiritual knowledge, detachment, ātmā-realization and all other means for liberation are like sour buttermilk; they are like the letter. There is no worth in them. But because one has an inclination for them they will remain. ‘Khāti chāshme kā sukh māne, sur khavaiyo gheeko he.’1 Thus, without the support of God, everything else is just as worthless as salty water. Footnotes: 1. 1. Why try to find joy in sour buttermilk, since the bliss of God is like ghee.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.278

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 278 · Chapter 5 · Verse 278

Gnān thayu te kenu nām je, shāstra sāmbhaḷīne tathā koīnī vāte karīne tathā sange karīne farī javāy nahī te pāku gnān kahevāy.

When can spiritual wisdom be said to have been attained? When, even after listening to scriptures or somebody’s talks or through someone’s company, one does not waver in one’s understanding, that is called true spiritual wisdom.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.279

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 279 · Chapter 5 · Verse 279

“Bījā koīne kalyāṇ karatā āvaḍyu nathī; nāḷ karatā gaḷu karyu chhe.1 Ne bījā avatāre ek-be jīvnā kalyāṇ karyā chhe ne satsangī ḍoshīe lākhu jīvnā kalyāṇ karyā chhe. Bhagwānnī mūrti, Bhagwānnu dhām, Bhagwānnā pārṣhad ne jīv e chār avināshī vastu chhe ne bīju badhu nāshvant chhe. Temā jīv chhe te baddha chhe. Jem koīkne beḍīmā nākhyo hoy te nīkaḷāy ja nahī, tem jīvne prakṛutirūp strī ne strīne puruṣh em paraspar beḍī chhe, te koī upāythī tūṭe tevī nathī; te to gnānthī tūṭe chhe paṇ dehe karīne tyāg karyethī tūṭatī nathī.” Te upar pāvaiyānu tathā baḷadnu draṣhṭānt dīdhu je, “Ene dehe karīne tyāg chhe paṇ vāsanā ṭaḷatī nathī.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Putra janma karāvnārī bāī navjāt shishunu nāḷ (nābhimānthī laṭaktī majjā) kāpī nākhe chhe. Koī aṇāvaḍatvāḷī bāī ā majjā kāpavāne badale bāḷaknu gaḷu ja kāpī nākhe to bāḷak jīvthī jāy.

“No one else knew how to liberate others. Instead of cutting the umbilical cord, they cut the neck.1 And the avatārs of the past liberated one or two jivas; whereas, the satsangi women liberate hundreds of thousands of jivas today. Bhagwan’s murti, his abode, his pārshads and the jiva are the four eternal things. Everything else is temporary. Of these, the jiva is bound. Just as one is bound by a chain and he cannot free himself; similarly, the jiva is naturally bound by the mutual love between a man and a woman. This bondage cannot be broken by any means. The only way to break this bondage is gnān; but by physical renunciation, it cannot be broken.” Regarding this, Swami gave an example of an impotent and a bullock and said, “They have physical separation, but their desires are not eradicated.” Footnotes: 1. 1. When a child is born, the umbilical cord is cut from its navel. However, if someone cuts the newborn’s neck instead of the umbilical cord, the newborn will die. Principle: The nāstiks believe they will be liberated by expending their karmas that are bound to them since eternity and realizing their self to be the ātmā. In doing so, they refute Paramātmā’s role in their liberation, despite one attains liberation only by the grace of Paramātmā. Therefore, those who refute Paramātmā and rely on their own endeavors have cut the child’s neck instead of the umbilical cord.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.280

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 280 · Chapter 5 · Verse 280

Premī Bhagwānmā paṇ vaḷage ne bīje paṇ vaḷage ne gnānī hoy te bīje vaḷage nahī ne koī ānṭī āve to gnānī paṇ vaḷage, te upar Bhīṣhmapitānu draṣhṭānt dīdhu. E gnānī hatā, paṇ pakṣhe karīne vaḷagyā.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhīṣhma Pānḍav-Kauravnā dādā thāy. Temane Kauravono pakṣh bandhāī gayo. Temaṇe Kauravonu anna khādhelu. Tethī Bhagwān Shrī Kṛuṣhṇano nishchay hovā chhatā, temanu gnān avaḷā pakṣhe karīne vyartha gayu.

“One with love will cling to God and will also cling to other things. However, one with gnān will not cling to other things. Nevertheless, if a gnāni gets tangled up with something, even he may become bound by clinging to it.” Regarding this, Swami gave the example of Bhishmapitā. “He was a gnāni but he became bound due to the wrong paksha.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhishmapitā was the great-great-grandfather of the Pandavas and Kauravas. He became bound to the Kauravas because he ate their food for many years. Although he recognized Krishna as God, he fought on the Kauravas side and his gnān was useless.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.281

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 281 · Chapter 5 · Verse 281

Ā sūryane jem koīnī barābar kahevāy nahī, tem ā Bhagwānne paṇ koīnī upamā devāy nahī. Ne āgaḷ anant avatār thaī gayā ne vaḷī anant avatār thāshe, te sarve ā Bhagwānnu dīdhu kaṇethu1 khāy chhe ne enī āgnāmā varte chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Mūḷ shabda ‘kaṇetu.’ Dar māse pagār peṭe maḷatā dāṇā; anna, vetan.

Nothing else can be compared with this Sun. In the same way, this Bhagwan (i.e. Bhagwan Swaminarayan) cannot be compared to anyone else. And there have been infinite avatārs in the past and there will be infinite more; they all live off the ‘wages’ earned from this Bhagwan (i.e. Bhagwan Swaminarayan) and they all obey his commands.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. This discourse reveals the supremacy of Bhagwan Swaminarayan. Swami makes the distinction between Bhagwan Swaminarayan and the other avatārs and says Bhagwan Swaminarayan is the cause of the other avatārs.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.282

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 282 · Chapter 5 · Verse 282

Āvo samo farīne nahī maḷe ne gādī upar hāth mūkī ishārat karī kahyu je, “Ā Sādhu ne ā Bhagwān koī divas āvyā nathī ne koī divas āvashe paṇ nahī, ne bījā āvashe.”

“This time will not come again.” Then, signaling with his hand by placing it on his cushion, he said, “This Sadhu and this Bhagwan never came in the past and will never come again. Others will come.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami’s intent in this discourse is that Aksharbrahman and Parabrahman came on this earth for the first time; and henceforth, he will remain manifest on the earth through the Aksharbrahman Satpurush forever. Since they will remain present, there is no question of them coming on this earth again; hence, they will not come again.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.283

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 283 · Chapter 5 · Verse 283

Priyavratnā draṣhṭāntthī kahyu je, “E to gṛuhasthāshrammā hatā ne chhokarā thayā paṇ bhāgwatāhā ātmarāmāh evā hatā ne strīne joge karīne chhokarā thāy; jem peshāb nīkaḷe, maḷ nīkaḷe, thūnk nīkaḷe, nāvu, khāvu e jem kriyā thāy chhe tem ja e paṇ kriyā thāy; paṇ tenu smaraṇ, chintavan, manan na thāy, ne chintavan to Bhagwānnī kathā-vārtānu thāy. Te kahyu chhe je, Priyavrat to Bhagwānnī kathāthī virām na pāmatā hatā, eṭale e to sarvethī judā ja hatā ne emā to māl evo chhe. Jem bhavāyāne viṣhe strīnī bhāvanā chhe te agnāne karīne chhe, tem ā paṇ agnāne karīne manāy chhe; paṇ khoṭu chhe.”

Swami gave the example of Priyavrat and said, “He had children because he was a gruhastha; yet he was known as ‘bhāgwatāhā ātmārāmāhā’. He was such a great devotee; but because he was married, he had children. Just as one urinates, defecates, spits, bathes, eats, and does other such bodily activities, they also do that activity (i.e. conceiving children). However, they do not contemplate on that activity but they contemplate on the discourses of God. It has been said that Priyavrat never tired of listening to God’s discourses. Therefore, he was different from others. Just as one believes a male actor dressed as a woman is a woman because of his ignorance; similarly, one believes all of this (worldly life and its activities) is true because of their ignorance. But it is actually false.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Priyavrat was the son of Swāyambhuv Manu and Shatrupā. By serving Nāradji, he automatically gained the knowledge of Paramātmā. His father wished for him to succeed the throne but he did not want to rule. But Brahmāji commanded him and he ruled the whole earth. Despite treading the path of a gruhastha, he was not bound by it.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.284

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 284 · Chapter 5 · Verse 284

Shikṣhāpatrīmā sarve sanshaynā nivāraṇ lakhyā chhe. Tethī koīne kāī sanshay hoy to pūchhajo; ‘Paṇ ānu kem hashe ke ānu kem hashe?’ e kāī pūchhavānu rahyu nathī, have to dāṇā khāīne bhajan karyā karavu. Ne Shikṣhāpatrī pāḷashe tene dehe karīne dukh nahī āve.

In the Shikshapatri, Maharaj has written the solutions to all problems. Therefore, if anyone has any doubts, then ask. But there is no reason to ask “Why this?” and “Why that?” Now, gather grains, eat, and worship God. Whoever observes the Shikshapatri will not experience misery of the body.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.285

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 285 · Chapter 5 · Verse 285

Ek sādhu Kapildev Bhagwānno avatār kahevātā, paṇ ḍoshiyune laīne jātā rahyā; e to daivnī māyānu baḷ evu ja chhe, te joge karīne em ja thāy.

One sadhu was said to be the avatār of Kapildev; however, he left with a woman. This is the strength of God’s māyā. When one comes into contact with māyā, that will happen.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.286

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 286 · Chapter 5 · Verse 286

Ekalshṛungīne agnān-upasham hatu,1 tethī viṣhaymā bandhāī gayā paṇ tenā bāp Vibhānḍak hruṣhine to gnān hatu ne shrāp devā jātā hatā, tyā rastāmā rājāe bahu sanmān karāvyu ne chākarī karāvī ne viṣhayno jog thayo ne Ekalshṛungīnā dīkarāne khoḷāmā besāryo, tethī rīs ūratī gaī ne viṣhaymā bandhāyā. E to daivnī māyānu baḷ ja evu chhe je, jog thaye koī bandhāyā vinā rahe ja nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Haraṇīne veṣhe faratī strīnā sansarge tapobhang thayelā muni Vibhānḍaknā Ekalshṛungī putra thāy. Munie putra janma thatā ja jangalmā alāyadī parṇakuṭī bāndhelī. Jethī karīne putrane strī jātinu bhān ja na thāy. Ek vār Angdeshnā Rompād Rājānā rājyāmā duṣhkāḷ paḍyo. Brāhmaṇoe Ekalshṛungīne rājyamā lāvavāmā āve to varsād thāy evu kahyu. Rājāe ek veshyāne taiyār karī. Tenā hāv-bhāv, svādiṣhṭ bhojan, ang-sparsh vagerethī Ekalshṛungī vih‌vaḷ thayā ne rājyāmā khenchāī āvyā. Vṛuṣhṭi thaī. Pachhī paṇ teo to rājyamā paraṇīne rahyā. Traṇek varas bād Vibhānḍak shodhatā tyā āvyā ne shāp āpavā taiyār thayā ke potānā be putrone putravadhūe khoḷāmā ramavā mūkī dīdhā. Munino krodh osarī gayo.

Ekalshrungi lacked desires because of his ignorance.1 Therefore, he became bound by the vishays (when he came into contact with them); but his father Vibhāndak Rishi possessed gnān and he was going to curse the king. But the king welcomed him, honored him, and served him on the way. When he came into contact with the vishays and when Ekalshrungi’s child (Vibhāndak’s grandson) was placed on his lap, his anger dissipated. This is the strength of God’s māyā. When one comes into its contact, one will not remain without becoming bound. Footnotes: 1. 1. Vibhāndak Rishi raised his son Ekalshrungi in the forest where there was no chance of encountering women. Hence, he did not know the difference between male and female. He was said to be free of desires for vishays simply because of his ignorance. In a nearby kingdom called Angdesh ruled by King Rompād, the lack of rain caused a drought. The brāhmins told the king to bring Ekalshrungi Rishi to make it rain. The king sent a prostitute with delicious foods to seduce him. She seduced Ekalshrungi with her movements and delicious foods. Ekalshrungi was drawn to the king’s kingdom and it rained. He then stayed in that kingdom and married. Three years later, his father came looking for him. Hearing what happened, he became angry at the king and was determined to curse him. However, the king had his daughter-in-law put her son (Vibhāndak’s grandchild) in his lap, causing his anger to dissipate. Therefore, Swami makes the contrast between Ekalshrungi and his father here. Ekalshrungi did not have desires because he did not know the distinction between male and female. Once he came into contact with vishays, his desires sprouted. However, his father had gnān; yet when encountering his own grandchild, he succumbed to the vishays.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.287

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 287 · Chapter 5 · Verse 287

Ghaṇek puṇye karīne ā jog maḷyo chhe. Ne badhā bhegā rahyā chhīe paṇ jene jeṭalī samajaṇ hashe tene teṭalu sukh āvatu hashe. Jūnā-navāno kāī meḷ nathī.

This company has been attained due to many spiritual merits. And all of us live together, but everyone enjoys bliss according to his understanding. Whether one is old or new is of no importance.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.288

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 288 · Chapter 5 · Verse 288

Deraḍīmā kaṇabīne vaṇ vavarāvī ghaṇo ja lābh āpyo tenī vāt karī.

Swami spoke about how he benefited one farmer in Deradi by having him plant cotton.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.289

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 289 · Chapter 5 · Verse 289

Ā sādhune viṣhe jene jeṭalo guṇ teṭalī sadvāsanā, ne avaguṇ teṭalī asadvāsanā chhe, em samajavu.

The extent to which one sees virtues in this Sadhu is the extent of one’s good nature, and the extent of faults seen is the extent of one’s bad nature. Understand in this way.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.290

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 290 · Chapter 5 · Verse 290

Keṭlāk kahe chhe je, “Kāī jāṇatā nathī, āvaḍatu nathī;” paṇ gādīe koṇe besāryā chhe, enī tene kāī khabar chhe? Badhuy jāṇe chhe tyāre ja gādīe besāryā chhe. Ā to satsangmā kusangnī vāt karī, have mokṣhanī vāt karīe chhīe je, ‘Ekopi Kṛuṣhṇasya kṛutah praṇāmo’1 e shlokno arth karyo je, ek praṇāme mokṣha thāy, to ā to karoḍo praṇāmo karyā hashe, paṇ mokṣha thayānī pratīti āvatī nathī ne shānti thātī nathī. Paṇ jo pragaṭ Bhagwānne jāṇīne tathā oḷakhīne ek praṇām kare to Bhagwānnā dhāmmā jāy ne mokṣha thayānī pratīti āve ne shānti paṇ thāy. Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhagwānne māhātmya sahit ek ja danḍavat praṇām karyo hoy to tenu faḷ das Ashvamedh Yagna karī pavitratā prāpta karyā barābar thāy chhe. Jo ke das Ashvamedh Yagna karanārne paṇ farī janma dhāraṇ karavo paḍe chhe, paṇ Bhagwānne praṇām karanār kadī farī sansārmā āvato nathī. Arthāt tenī mukti thāy chhe. (Mahābhārat; Shāntiparva: 12/47/92)

Some say that he (Swami) does not know anything and is unable to do anything. But do they know anything about the person (Bhagwan Swaminarayan) who has placed him on the seat? He (Bhagwan Swaminarayan) knows everything, that is why Swami has been placed on the seat (by him). Here, I have just talked about the bad company in the Satsang fellowship. Now, I will talk about moksha. ‘Ekopi Krishnasya krutah pranāmo...’ This shlok was explained: if moksha is attained by performing only one prostration, then we have offered tens of millions of prostrations, yet we do not feel convinced that moksha has been attained and we do not even experience peace. But, if after knowing and recognizing the manifest God, one offers a single prostration, then one attains the abode of God and one is convinced that moksha has been attained. And peace is also experienced.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.291

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 291 · Chapter 5 · Verse 291

Je koīne kalyāṇ karavu hoy ne gharmā rūpiyā hoy to bāī, bhāī bannenā be mandir karāvavā. Eṭale tenu kalyāṇ thaī rahyu chhe.

Anyone who wants to attain moksha and has enough money at home should build two separate mandirs, for men and women. Thus, his moksha is being achieved.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.292

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 292 · Chapter 5 · Verse 292

Varsād to Bhagwān varsāve chhe ne Indra to risāī gayo chhe te varasto nathī, ne kāḷ paṇ kopyo chhe, paṇ dayā āvyāthī varsād karyo chhe.

God makes it rain because Indra is angry and will not make it rain. Even kāl is enraged. However, because of God’s compassion, he makes it rain.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.293

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 293 · Chapter 5 · Verse 293

Rūpiyāmā, gharmā, strīmā ne dehmā māl mānasho nahī. Dāṇā to Bhagwān āpashe, te ekṭhā karīne āvardā pūro karavo chhe. Ne gharmā kām karnār hoy ne rūpiyā hoy tene to dāṇā khāīne vātu sāmbhaḷvī ne jene kāī na hoy tene kosh joḍī devo ne kām karavā manḍī paḍavu ne pachhī Bhagwān bhajavā. Ā deh to pāṇīnu, pṛuthvīnu, ākāshnu bandhāyu chhe ne temā bhaḷī jāshe. Ne badhāy moṭerāne ek mahino vātu sāmbhaḷvā āhī rahevu em āgnā chhe.

Do not believe that there is any value in money, home, women and the body. Grains are given by God, so store them and pass your life in worshipping God. One who has a servant in the house and has money should eat and listen to the spiritual talks of the Sadhu. Those who have nothing should start watering the crops and begin working for their livelihood and then worship God. This body is made of water, earth and space and will merge with them. And even all the senior sadhus and householders should stay here in Junagadh for one month to listen to the talks. That is an order.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.294

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 294 · Chapter 5 · Verse 294

Satsangnā niyam na paḷe to tilak na karavu1 ne kahevu ke, “Hu satsangī nathī ne mārāthī paḷe nahī, paṇ Bhagwān ne Sādhu sāchā chhe.” Em karashe teno mokṣha thāshe; paṇ satsangmā rahīne Shikṣhāpatrī nahī pāḷe tene dukh āvashe ne Bhagwān sukhe bhajāshe nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Satsangmāthī bahār nīkaḷī javu.

If the codes of conduct of Satsang cannot be observed, then do not apply the tilak, and say, “I am not a satsangi. I cannot observe the rules, but God and the Sadhu are right.” One who does this will attain moksha. But while staying in Satsang, if the Shikshapatri is not observed, then misery will arise and one will not be able to worship God happily.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.295

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 295 · Chapter 5 · Verse 295

Agṇotaro1 Kāḷ paḍyā pachhī bīje varas Panchāḷethī Mahārāje kāgaḷ laīne Gaḍhaḍe mokalyā hatā, te ame Mahārājthī judā paḍyā eṭale dehmā tāv āvyo ne Mahārāj paṇ māndā thayā. Pachhī anek māṇas ne ḍhor marī gayā ne bāḷo sād pṛuthvīmā rahyo nahī ne maḍadāne khenchnār koī rahyu nahī, tethī gām gandhāī ūṭhyā ne hāḍakānā ḍhagalā thayā; em potānā dehnī ne brahmānḍnā jīvnā dehnī ekatā samajāvī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Samvat 1869no prakhyāt dukāḷ.

“During the famine of Samvat 1869, Maharaj sent me to Gadhada with a letter. This separation caused a fever in my body, and Maharaj also became ill. Then, many people and cattle died. The cries of infants could not be heard anywhere on the earth. There was no one to take the dead bodies [to cremation sites], so the villages smelt of foul odor and bones piled over.” In this way, Swami showed oneness with his body and the bodies of all the jivas of the brahmānd.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.296

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 296 · Chapter 5 · Verse 296

Vasharām Bhaktanā gūmaḍānu bahu dukh joīne mane tāv āvī gayo. Pachhī gūmaḍu fāṭyu ne sukh thayu, em dayānu adhikpaṇu samajāvyu.

“Seeing the pain of Vashrām Bhakta’s boil, I came down with a fever. Then, the boil ruptured and I felt peace.” In this way, Swami showed his exceeding compassion.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.297

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 297 · Chapter 5 · Verse 297

Kāḷ paḍashe to satsangī dukh pāmashe ne āpaṇāthī dāṇā khavāshe? Nahī khavāy. Khaḷkhaḷiye nātā nātā bakholmā pag pesī gayo te bhāngī jāt; paṇ Mahārāje rakṣhā karī, tethī tarat khenchī līdho. Ane Vāḍīmā paththar upar hu paḍī jāto hato, te jem koī zālī rākhe tem adhdhar rahyo.

If there is a severe famine, then satsangis will experience misery and will we be able to eat? No, we’ll not be able to eat. While bathing in the rapids of the river my foot got trapped in the crack and it would have broken, but Maharaj protected me and immediately pulled me out. Also, in the farm, I was about to fall on the rock, but I remained suspended as if I was being held by someone.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.298

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 298 · Chapter 5 · Verse 298

Girnārmā ṭūnṭiyu āvyu te mane Vāḍīmā dhakko mārīne gayu, tethī achānak hu paḍī gayo, pachhī bīje divase keṭlāk māṇas marī gayā.

A plague came from Girnar and knocked me over in the orchard, so I suddenly fell. Then the next day, many people died.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.299

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 299 · Chapter 5 · Verse 299

Raghuvīrjī Mahārāje deh mūkyo te divas āhī mune tāv āvyo, te tāptā sagaḍīmā sharīr ūḍī paḍe evo baḷiyo tāv āvyo tathā bhīnt paḍī gaī tathā khaḍ baḷī gayu.

The day Raghuvirji Maharaj left his body, I came down with a fever such that the body got so hot, it was like warming oneself near a fire. And a wall fell down and grass burned away.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.300

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 300 · Chapter 5 · Verse 300

Gay Rājā jevo rājā karavo chhe te thāshe tyāre pachhī be karoḍ māṇas ā chhe tethī bījā Bhagwān bhajashe ne Raghuvīrjī Mahārāj jevā āchārya karavā chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Gaya Rājā e Amūrtraynā ek dharma-parāyaṇ rājā Mahābhārat-kāḷmā thaī gayā. Mahābhārat anusār ā rājāe so varṣha sudhī yagnomā bachelu anna khādhu hatu! Te roj moṭu dān karatā. Viṣhṇunī yog-shaktinu temane gnān hatu. Te Bhagwānnā ansh kahevātā. Prajānu pālan putranī māfak karatā.

We want to make a king like King Gaya.1 When that happens, more people will worship God in addition to the 20 million people that worship God currently. And we want to make another āchārya like Raghuvirji Maharaj. Footnotes: 1. 1. King Gaya was a great king who lived during the Mahabharat era. He lived according to his dharma. According to Mahabharat, he ate the food left over from yagnas for 100 years. He gave donations every day. He had knowledge of Vishnu’s yogic powers. He is considered an avatār of God. He treated his subjects like his children.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.301

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 301 · Chapter 5 · Verse 301

Prahlāde das hajār varṣha Nārāyaṇ sāthe yuddha karyu paṇ jitāṇā nahī ne Nāradne vachane karīne chha mahināmā bhaktie karīne jītī līdhā.

Prahlad fought with Narayan for ten thousand years but was not able to defeat him. With Naradji’s advice, he was able to defeat Narayan in six months with devotion.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.302

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 302 · Chapter 5 · Verse 302

Bhāgwatnā Pancham Skandhamā Jaḍbharate Rahugaṇne kahyu je, “Tu rājyādiknī vāt kare chhe paṇ tu gnānī nathī, ahinsā ne brahmacharya sahit ne rāg-dveṣhādik rahit evo dharma, tene yukta evo je Vaidik mārg, te paṇ amārā ātmā-Paramātmānā gnānvāḷāne gaṇatīmā nathī, to tārā rājya-bhṛutyādik1 te amārā brahmavettānī shī gaṇatīmā?” Footnotes: 1. 1. Rājā ane sevak ādi.

In the fifth canto (of the Bhagwat), Jadbharat says to Rahugan, “You speak of ruling a kingdom, but you are not a gnāni. For those like me who possess the knowledge of the ātmā and Paramatma, the path of the Vedas that expound dharma - characterized by ahinsā and brahmacharya and devoid of attachment and malice - does not even come into consideration. So, how can your kingdom and servants come into consideration to those who know Brahman like me?”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.303

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 303 · Chapter 5 · Verse 303

Chhellā Prakaraṇnu Ogaṇchālīsmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvyānī āgnā karīne bolyā je, “Ā Vachanāmṛutmā kahyu chhe e vāt paṇ ek samajvānī chhe.”

After having Vachanamrut Gadhada III-39 read, Swami said, “The discourse in this Vachanamrut should be understood.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.304

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 304 · Chapter 5 · Verse 304

Madhya Prakaraṇnu Navmu Vachanāmṛut vānchavānī āgnā karīne bolyā je, “Ā Vachanāmṛutmā kahyu chhe tem Mahārājne Puruṣhottam jāṇashe ne satsangmāthī nīkaḷī jāshe to paṇ Akṣhardhāmmā jāshe; ne satsangmā raheto hashe ne dharma pāḷato hashe ne ūrdhvaretā1 hashe, paṇ Mahārājne Puruṣhottam nahī jāṇe to bījā lokmā jāshe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Aṣhṭāng brahmachārī.

Swami instructed that Vachanamrut Gadhada II-9 be read and then said, “As described in this Vachanamrut, one who knows Maharaj as Purushottam and leaves Satsang will still go to Akshardham. And one who stays in Satsang, observes dharma and is a celibate, but does not know Maharaj as Purushottam, will go to another abode.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.305

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 305 · Chapter 5 · Verse 305

Pragaṭ mūrti vinā bījā koīmā māl nathī. Te upar sākhī bolyā je, Muveku jīvāve asmān chaḍhī jāve, Pay anna hu na khāve to hu māyāko gulām hai; Vidyāku bakhāne kachhu manhukī jāne, Aise nipaṭ1 sayāne2 tāko vāsanāme dhām3 hai; Sārī sṛuṣhṭiku upajāve sab jīvku nībhāve, Jag īsh jyu kahāve to hu man pariṇām hai; Gnān bhakti hin ati urme malin, Aise mūḍhaku Mukund kahe brahmaku4 na ṭhām hai; Rājā, chor, yogī, gṛuhī, dvij rākhat paranār, Aiso adharma dekhake īsh dharat avatār. Footnotes: 1. 1. Khūb. 2. Shāṇā. 3. Vāsanāmā ja vās chhe. 4. Brahmadhāmmā.

“There is no worth in anything other than the manifest form of God.” Then, Swami has the following verse sung: Muveku jīvāve asmān chaḍhī jāve, Pay anna hu na khāve to hu māyāko gulām hai; Vidyāku bakhāne kachhu manhukī jāne, Aise nipaṭ sayāne tāko vāsanāme dhām hai; Sārī sṛuṣhṭiku upajāve sab jīvku nībhāve, Jag īsh jyu kahāve to hu man pariṇām hai; Gnān bhakti hin ati urme malin, Aise mūḍhaku Mukund kahe brahmaku na ṭhām hai;1 Footnotes: 1. 1. One may revive the dead, one may climb to the sky, one may not eat or drink anything; yet, he is still a servant of māyā. One whose wisdom may receive praises from people; one may have the power to reveal others’ thoughts; nevertheless, they are a haven of desires. One may be responsible for the creation, one may support all the jivas of the world, one may be called the ishwar of the world; even so, his mind is bound to māyā. Muktanand Swami says of those without gnān and bhakti of God and with impure desires of the world in their heart - they are purely ignorant and they will not reside in Akshardham.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.306

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 306 · Chapter 5 · Verse 306

Bhagwānnī smṛuti rākhavī e sarvathī adhik chhe. Ne Bhagwān to āpaṇā jīvmā beṭhā ja chhe te deh mūkavā same dekhāy chhe ne smṛuti rahe te to sarva sādhannā antne pāmyā. Te upar Bharatjīnī vāt karī.

To remember God continuously is the best of all. God is seated in our jiva and he is seen at the time of leaving the body. If recollection of God remains, then the highest goal of all endeavours has been attained. In this connection, the story of Bharatji was narrated.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.307

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 307 · Chapter 5 · Verse 307

Shuddha thāvāne tap ne anuvṛutti be sādhan chhe. Temā anuvṛutti chhe te adhik chhe; te karatā ātmā ne Paramātmā be ja rākhavā chhe.

To become spiritually pure there are two means: austerities and intuitively following the wishes of God. Of them, intuitively following the wishes is better. And better than that is to keep (focus on) only the two – ātmā and Paramātmā.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.308

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 308 · Chapter 5 · Verse 308

Gām Mahuvānā haribhakta Ḍāhyāne kahyu je, “Bhūt kāḍhavu emā Swāmīnu shu kām chhe? Swāminārāyaṇne ghare ghaṇāy chākar chhe, ek Hanumānjīnī mānatā karashe eṭale Hanumānjī jashe; te mārī mārīne bhukkā kāḍhī nākhashe.”

Swami said to Dahya of Mahuva, “Why do you need Swami to expel a ghost? Swaminarayan has many servants. If you believe in Hanumanji, he will beat the ghost out.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.309

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 309 · Chapter 5 · Verse 309

Āpaṇe gnān shīkhatā to āvaḍe ja nahī ne vairāgya to chhe ja nahī. Māṭe hu Bhagwānno ne e mārā, em mānavu. Ne het to pandar ānā strīmā chhe ne ek āno amārāmā chhe, ne kalyāṇ to ene sharaṇe gayā eṭale samarth chhe te kalyāṇ kare, e enī moṭāī chhe.

We do not have the spiritual knowledge and do not possess detachment. So, believe ‘I am God’s and God is mine.’ And you have maximum attachment for worldly pleasures and minimum attachment for us. But since you have surrendered at his feet and he is capable, he will ensure your moksha. That is his greatness.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.310

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 310 · Chapter 5 · Verse 310

Navarāsh hoy tyāre Bhagwānnī mūrtine laīne besavu. Ne te mūrti te shu je, Bhagwānnī kathā, vārtā ne dhyān e Bhagwānnī mūrti chhe. Ne deh hoy tyā nidrā, kām, svād, lobh e sarve deh bheḷā hoy, māṭe tene to deh bheḷā ja karī rākhavā. Ne koī vyasan rākhe chhe, afīṇnu, hokānu, svād rākhe chhe, lobh rākhe chhe, e sarve sukh jevā jaṇāy chhe paṇ e to dehne dukh de evā chhe.

When one is free, sit with the murti of God. What is that murti? The murti of God is the spiritual discourses, discussions and meditation of God. Wherever there is a body, there is sleep, desire, taste, greed – since all these accompany the body. So, confine them to the body. Some have addictions to opium, smoking, tasty foods, greed which all appear to give happiness, but they are such that they cause the body misery.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.311

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 311 · Chapter 5 · Verse 311

Bhagwān bhajavāmā traṇ vighna chhe: ek lokno kusang, satsangmā kusang ne indriyu-antahkaraṇno kusang; māṭe e sarvenā chhaḷmā āvavu nahī. Ne satsangmā kusangno jog thāy ne brahmarūp hoy to dehrūp karī nākhe ne satsangmā sārāno jog thāy to dehrūp hoy tene brahmarūp kare.

There are three obstacles in worshipping God: one is bad worldly company, bad company in Satsang and bad influence due to the senses and inner faculties. Therefore, do not be taken in by their deceit. And if one associates with bad company in Satsang, then even if one is brahmarup, one becomes body-conscious. But if good company in Satsang is attained, then one who is body-conscious becomes brahmarup.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.312

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 312 · Chapter 5 · Verse 312

Rājāne pāṇī na pāyu to paṇ sankalp karyo hato tethī tene gām āpyu. Tem jīv potānā swabhāv mūkatā nathī, tem Bhagwān paṇ pote jīvno mokṣha karavāno sankalp mūkatā nathī.

The king was not given water, but still, because he had resolved to donate, he gifted a village.1 Similarly, even though the jiva does not shun its innate natures, God also does not give up his resolve to grant moksha to it. Footnotes: 1. 1. A king was out hunting and became very thirsty. He saw a villager with a jug of water and resolved in his mind to give a village in exchange for the water. However, the villager poured the water on the ground. Despite this, the king fulfilled his own resolve and gave a village to him. Similarly, even though people do not follow his commands, God is merciful towards them.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.313

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 313 · Chapter 5 · Verse 313

Pānḍave yagna karyo temā Bhagwān paṇ bheḷā hatā, to paṇ noḷiyo sonāno thayo nahī ne hruṣhinā chār sher sāthavānā yagnamā sonāno thayo,1 em satpātranī sevānu faḷ chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Mahābhārat kāḷmā Mud‌gal Ṛuṣhi nāmnā ek pavitra ṛuṣhi shilonchhavṛutti (khaḷā ke bajārmā paḍel anājnā kaṇ kaṇ vīṇīne khāvānī vṛutti) dharāvatā hatā. Teo chha mahinā bhūkhyā rahī tap karatā. Anāj pāke tyāre khetarmāthī dāṇā vīṇī bhegā karīne atithine sāthavo jamāḍtā. Ek vār atithī tarīke āvelā Durvāsāne Mud‍gal Ṛuṣhie bhāvthī pāraṇā karāvyā. Durvāsāe jamī līdhā pachhī pṛuthvī par ḍhoḷī dīdhelā eṭhā sāthavāmā ek noḷiyo āḷoṭyo. Mud‍gal Ṛuṣhinā bhāvthī jamāḍāyelā ā eṭhā sāthavāmā āḷoṭtā noḷiyo aḍadho sonāno thaī gayo. Tyār pachhī keṭalāy varṣho bād Pānḍavoe Rājasūya Yagna karīne ekavīs hajār brāhmaṇone jamāḍyā. Ā noḷiyo brāhmaṇoe jamīne chhānḍelā annamā āḷoṭyo parantu tenu bākīnu ardhu sharīr sonānu thayu nahī. Tyāre noḷiyāe kahyu, “Mud‍gal brāhmaṇnā chār sher anāj jeṭalu tārā Rājasūya Yagnanu puṇya nathī.” Arjune Shrī Kṛuṣhṇane ā vāt karī. Prabhu kahe, “Māro ek chānḍāḷ bhakta mārāmā vṛutti joḍīne bhajan kare chhe. Te bhūkhyo rahī gayo chhe. Tene lāvīne bhāvthī jamāḍo to yagna pūro thashe ane shankh vāgashe.” Pachhī te shvapachne shodhī lāvyā, paṇ chheṭe besāḍīne avagnāpūrvak jamāḍyo. Tethī shankh na vāgyo. Prabhu kahe, “Mane jevā bhāvthī jamāḍo chho tevā bhāvthī te shvapach bhaktane jamāḍo.” Te pramāṇe karyāthī shankh paṇ vāgyo ane tenā eṭhā annamā āḷoṭvāthī noḷiyo paṇ sonāno thaī gayo.

When the Pandavs performed a yagna, God was with them, yet the mongoose did not turn golden. And in the yagna by Mudgal Rishi, in which he offered two kilos of parched corn, it turned golden. Thus, this is the fruit of offering service to the deserving.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. During the Mahabharat era, Mudgal Rishi was a pure, devout rishi who possessed the shilonchh vrutti – the ability to pick up individual grains from the storage area in the farm and eat them. He fasted for six months without eating anything. When the crops ripened, he would collect grains from the fields and feed any guests. Once, he fed Durvasa. A mongoose rolled in the grains spilt by Durvasa while eating. Since they had been affectionately served by Mudgal Rishi, the mongoose turned half golden. Then, many years later, the Pandavs performed a Rajasuya Yagna and fed 21,000 Brahmins. This mongoose rolled in the grains spilt by these Brahmins, but its remaining half did not become golden. So, the mongoose commented, “Your Rajasuya Yagna does not even carry the merit equal to Mudgal Rishi’s few grams of food.” Arjun narrated this to Shri Krishna. He said, “A Chāndāl devotee of mine is meditating on me and is offering worship. He has remained hungry.” So, the Pandavs found him and sitting him at a distance, fed him. But still the conch of victory (success) did not sound. Shri Krishna said, “Feed him with the same feelings you feed me.” When this was done, the conch sounded and by rolling in his spilt grains, the other half of the mongoose turned golden.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.314

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 314 · Chapter 5 · Verse 314

Charotarnā ek gāmnā pāṭīdār Girdhar Bhakta sādhu hatā tene mandavāḍmā ghī khādhāthī dehmā baḷ āvyu, tethī strīnā sankalpnī vāsanā thaī te mane kahī, pachhī me vichār karyo je, enu rūḍu thāy em karavu. Evo sankalp karīne Muktānand Swāmī dvāre Mahārājne kahī Priyavratno mārag1 chalāvyo. Tethī tyāgīne vāsanā ude thāy ne gṛuhasthāshram kare teno shāstramā bādh nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Jem Rājā Priyavrat Nāradjīnā updeshe tyāgī thayā ne Brahmānu dabāṇ āvatā pāchhā gṛuhasthāshramī thayā. Tem koī kāraṇsar tyāgīe gṛuhasthāshrammā javu paḍe to tenu shrey aṭakatu nathī, e Priyavratno mārg.

Girdhar Bhakta was a Patidar of one village from Charotar. He was a sadhu. When he fell ill, he ate a lot of ghee and his body gained vigor. He started having lustful desires. I thought about what would be beneficial to him, so I had Muktanand Swami ask Maharaj to start the path of Priyavrat.1 Therefore, if a sadhu starts to have lustful desires and becomes a gruhasth again, there is no objection to that according to the scriptures. Footnotes: 1. 1. Listening to Naradji’s preachings, King Priyavrat renounced. However, Brahmā pressured him to return to his familial life. Therefore, if a renunciant has to return to gruhasthāshram, his liberation is not ruined. This is the path of Priyavrat.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.315

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 315 · Chapter 5 · Verse 315

Mānī hoy tene mān āpīne jītavo, ne garavīne1 dīn thaī jītavo, ne garībne dabāvīne jītavo, ne lobhīne padārth āpīne jītavo, em sarvene jītī levā. Ne Mahārāje mane kahyu je, “Tame to Indrāṇī chho2 ne bījā to Indra chhe; ne Indra to ghaṇāy thaī jāy ne Indrāṇī to ek ja rahe. Tem bījā to ghaṇāy thaī jāshe ne tame to ek ja chho.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Garviṣhṭhne. 2. Ahī Swāmī anya mukta sadguruo karatā potānī visheṣhtā batāve chhe. Jem Indra badalātā rahe paṇ Indrāṇī na badalāy. Tem bījā mukto pṛuthvī par āve ne jāy, paṇ Guṇātīt to sadā rahe ja chhe. Ahī Indra eṭale Shrījī Mahārāj nahī levā. Fakta ‘Indrāṇī’ shabdanī visheṣhtā darshāvavā Swāmīe ā draṣhṭānt āpyu chhe. Akṣharmukto anant koṭi, paṇ Mūḷ Akṣhar to ek. E draṣhṭie ā draṣhṭānt prayojāyu chhe.

Win over an egotist by honouring him; win over the arrogant by being meek; win over the meek by controlling them and win over the greedy by giving them things – in this way win over everybody. Maharaj told me, “You are the queen of Indra and others are Indras.1 Many become Indra, but there is only one queen of Indra. Similarly, many other akshar muktas will come and go, but only you are the one and unique Aksharbrahman.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Here, Gunatitanand Swami reveals his greatness compared to other senior sadhus. According to mythology just as Indra changes but Indra’s queen (Indrani) does not, similarly, other muktas may come from and go to earth, but the Gunatit stays forever. Here, the emphasis is on the use of the term the ‘queen of Indra’ since there are many akshar muktas but there is only one Mul (Eternal) Akshar.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.316

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 316 · Chapter 5 · Verse 316

Vātu karavāthī mākhīmāthī sūrya thāy ne sūryamāthī mākhī thāy, jo vāt karatā āvaḍe to. ‘Vātan kī vāt baḍī karāmat he.’ Ā sarve satsang vāte karīne karāvyo chhe, ne ā sarve vāte karīne chhe bīju kāī nathī.

By dialogue, if one knows how to present the topic, then from a fly one becomes like the sun and from the sun, one becomes like a fly (i.e. a spiritually weak person can become spiritually strong and vice-versa). ‘Vātanki vāt badi karāmat he.’1 The Satsang has developed due to spiritual talks. All this development is also due to talks, not anything else. Footnotes: 1. 1. The art of expression and communication is a great technique.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.317

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 317 · Chapter 5 · Verse 317

Satsang, Sādhu ne Bhagwān jevā maḷyā chhe tevā oḷakhātā nathī ne manuṣhyabhāv rahe chhe. Jevo lābh thayo chhe tevo lābh paṇ oḷakhāto nathī ne manuṣhyabhāvmā divyabhāv chhe te manāto nathī, ne upavās kare paṇ ām samajāy nahī, kem je, Mūlam nāsti kutah shākhā? Pāmar to parachā māge, paṇ ek Shrī Kṛuṣhṇane ūrdhvaretā kahyā chhe ne Narnārāyaṇne kahyā chhe, evā to āj Mūḷjī Brahmachārī ne Mayārām Bhaṭṭa sher ghī jame ne ghāṭ thāy nahī. Ne be hajār māṇas strīo sahit bheḷā rahetā to paṇ kāmnāno ghāṭ thāy nahī. Jitendriya shāstramā Lakṣhmaṇjī ādik be kahyā chhe ne anuvṛuttivāḷā Kṛuṣhṇāvatārmā traṇ1 kahyā chhe, ne bhīḍo khamyāmā traṇ kahyā chhe, ne āj to ākhā satsangmā e traṇ guṇe jukta chhe; e ja moṭo paracho chhe. Māṭe jem chhe tem oḷakhavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Uddhav, Arjun ane Rukmiṇī.

We are unable to recognize the true nature and worth of the Satsang, Sadhu and God we have attained as they are and so human characteristics are perceived. The benefit attained is also not grasped fully. And that there is divinity even in the human traits of God and his Sadhu is not believed. And one observes fasts, but does not understand this divinity even in human traits since, ‘Mulam nāsti kutaha shākhā?’1 The dull witted demand miracles. But only Shri Krishna and Nar-Narayan are described as celibates. Like them, today, Mulji Brahmachari and Mayaram Bhatt, even if they eat 500g of ghee, will have no [lustful] thoughts in their mind. And two thousand men were staying together with women, still they did not entertain any lustful desires. The scriptures describe Lakshmanji and Hanumanji as having gained complete mastery over the senses. And during the incarnation of Krishna, three – Uddhav, Arjun and Rukmini – observed all his instructions and three are described as having tolerated all hardships. And, today, everyone in Satsang has the three qualities. That is itself a great miracle. Therefore, understand the true form of Satsang, the Sadhu and God as they are. Footnotes: 1. 1. Without roots, can there be any branches? In other words, fundamentals are missing. It is like those who fast to attain God, but lack firm faith in him that all his actions are divine. In such cases, fasting is futile.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.318

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 318 · Chapter 5 · Verse 318

Satsangmā keṭlāk lāmbo pag karīne sūtā nahī, tathā maṭakā jītatā tathā khanjoḷavu nahī tathā prasādīnu paṇ gaḷyu, chīkaṇu khādhu nahī tathā sankalp thāvā dīdhā nahī, e sarve kaṭhaṇ vāt chhe ne e raste koīthī chalāy nahī, ne tene manuṣhya na kahevāy. To paṇ te gnānīnī barobar na kahevāy ne desh-kāḷ lāgyā ne thāḷ bīje gayo tyāre jenī āgaḷ ūnche shabde bolāy nahī tene vachan kahyā.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Shrījī Mahārājne Jīvubā tathā Lāḍubā thāḷ banāvīne jamāḍatā paṇ jyāre Dharmakuḷ āvyu tyārthī Suvāsinī Bhābhī vagere Dharmakuḷnī strīoe Shrījī Mahārāj māṭe thāḷ banāvavānu sharū karyu. Āthī Jīvubā-Lāḍubā dil dubhāyā. E vakhate emaṇe Shrījī Mahārājne veṇ kahyā. Ām, desh-kāḷ lāgyā.

In Satsang, many did not sleep with their legs straight. Some controlled their blinking and itching (i.e. refrained from blinking and scratching). Some did not eat sweets or oily foods even as prasād, nor did they even desire such items. These people cannot be called human, because these are difficult endeavors for others to follow. Even so, they cannot be equaled to one who is a gnāni; for when the circumstances changed, harsh words were spoken to Maharaj, even though this was not proper.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Jivuba and Laduba prepared Shriji Maharaj’s food in Gadhada. When Shriji Maharaj’s family arrived, Suvasini Bhabhi and other women prepared Maharaj’s food. Therefore, Jivuba and Laduba were hurt. They spoke some harsh words to Shriji Maharaj. Hence, they succumbed to the change in circumstances. Therefore, Swami is saying that even if one is strict in discipline and observance of niyams, if they lack gnān, they will react adversely when encountering unfavorable circumstances.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.319

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 319 · Chapter 5 · Verse 319

Mahuvānā kumbhārne so Jampurīnu dukh thayu chhe, te to e ja khame bījāthī khamāy nahī. Ane hāl to jāgatāy sukh chhe ne ānkhya mīnchīne paṇ sukh chhe.

The potter of Mahuva is experiencing the misery of 100 Jampuris. Only he can tolerate that, not others. And today, there is bliss in this world and bliss when one closes their eyes.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is implying that when one is in the presence of the Satpurush, in whom Shriji Maharaj is present, one experiences bliss in this world. And when one dies, they will experience bliss in Akshardham.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.320

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 320 · Chapter 5 · Verse 320

Potpotāno deh sāro lāge, gām sāru lāge, desh sāro lāge, e to daivanī māyānu baḷ chhe.

Everyone feels that their own body, village and country is good. This is due to the power of God’s māyā.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.321

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 321 · Chapter 5 · Verse 321

Ekanā manḍaḷmā lāḍavānī rasoī thāy ne ekanā manḍaḷmā na thāy, to ek ang āvyu. Ne akhanḍ dhyān kare to paṇ ek ang āvyu ne tresaṭh bākī rahyā; ne koī rīte karīne Sādhu oḷakhāī jāy to temā badhuy āvī jāy.

One mandal makes laddus and another does not. (In the mandal that does not), they acquire one virtue. If one constantly meditates, that is still one virtue acquired and 63 virtues are still left to be acquired. But if someone recognizes the Sadhu in any way, then everything (all the virtues) are included in that.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.322

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 322 · Chapter 5 · Verse 322

Gopāḷ Swāmīne sāṭh sādhu hatā. Temāthī chār sādhu āpavānu kahyu. Tyāre kahe je, “Māre to be ja sādhu chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Ahī Swāmī samajāve chhe ke Gopāḷānand Swāmīnā manḍaḷnā 60 sādhumāthī sādhu-guṇe-yukta ane teonī āgnā-marajīnā pālak be ja sādhu hatā, tethī ā vātmā Gopāḷānand Swāmī kharekharā sādhu kahevāya evā to be ja chhe em kahe chhe. Swāmīe Vāt 5/28mā Gopāḷānand Swāmīnā ā be sādhuono ullekh karyo chhe: Bālamukund Swāmī ane Sarvanivāsānand Swāmī.

Gopal [Gopalanand] Swami had 60 sadhus in his mandal. Someone asked for four sadhus from his mandal. Gopal Swami replied, “I only have two sadhus.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. In this talk, Swami is pointing out that a true sadhu is one who actually possesses the qualities of a sadhu, not one who dons the clothes of a sadhu. In Swamini Vat 5/28, Swami mentions that the two sadhus of Gopalanand Swami were Balmukund Swami and Sarvanivasanand Swami.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.323

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 323 · Chapter 5 · Verse 323

Kharekharo jīv sopīne teno thaī rahe to sinhano māl shiyāḷiyā khāī shake nahī.

If one truly entrusts the jiva (to God) and lives as one of his, then the food of lions (i.e. God) will not be eaten by foxes (i.e. māyā).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.324

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 324 · Chapter 5 · Verse 324

Ek raheṇīe deh mūkavo kaṭhaṇ chhe, te upar Gaḍhaḍānī ḍoshiyunī1 vāt karī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Jīvubā, Lāḍubā, Rājabā vageree ek raheṇīe deh chhoḍyo tenī vāt.

To die having behaved consistently in life is difficult. On that, Swami spoke about the women of Gadhada.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is speaking about Jivuba, Laduba, Rajba, and other women that lived in Gadhada. They all behaved consistently as according to their dharma and niyams till the end of their life.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.325

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 325 · Chapter 5 · Verse 325

Jem chhe tem oḷakhavu e kaṭhaṇ chhe, ne oḷakhāy to samāgammā rahevu kaṭhaṇ chhe, ne samāgammā rahe to jīv sopīne anuvṛuttimā rahevu e kaṭhaṇ chhe. Be ānā paṇ koīnā pakṣhano bhāg rahe kharo.

To recognize God and his holy Sadhu as they are is difficult; and even if they are so recognized, it is difficult to stay in their company; and if one stays in their company, then to entrust the jiva to them and live implicitly by their wish is difficult. Since, even a little attachment to others still remains.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.326

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 326 · Chapter 5 · Verse 326

Jem chhe tem kahīe to tarat manāy nahī, māṭe manne vaḷagāḍī mūkavu, eṭale dhīre dhīre baḷ pāmashe tem samajāshe.

If the basic concepts are described as they are, they are not immediately believed. Therefore, keep the mind engrossed in the Satpurush. Then slowly, as strength is gained, true understanding will develop.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.327

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 327 · Chapter 5 · Verse 327

Koī kaheshe je, “Mane jem chhe tem kaho hu em karīsh.” Paṇ Moṭā hoy te em jāṇe je, moḍhe kahe chhe paṇ ānāthī thāshe nahī; ne koī moḍhe kahe nahī, paṇ tenuy jāṇe je, ā moḍhe kaheto nathī paṇ tenāthī thāshe.

Some devotees may say, “Tell me exactly what is to be done presently and I will do.” However, the great Sadhu knows that even though he is asking me directly, he will not be able to do. Another does not say directly, but the great knows about him – that even though this one does not say so directly, he will be able to do.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.328

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 328 · Chapter 5 · Verse 328

Jem chhe em kahīe to gher koī jaī shake nahī. Ne jāy to tyā rahevāy nahī. ‘Tājī tīkṣhṇa dhār aḍatāmā aḷagu kare; lesh na rahe sansār vachan lāgyā koī vīrnā.’ Footnotes: 1. 1. Ahīn svāmī kahe chhe ke sānkhyanī vāt jem chhe tem thāya ane pratyakṣha bhagavānanā mahimānī vāt thāya to mumukṣhune jagat pratyenī āsakti ṭaḷī jāya ane bhagavānamān prīti thāya. Tethī te gher jaī shake nahīn ane jāya to rahī shake nahīn arthāt jagatanā vyavahāramān joḍāī shake nahīn. 2. Koī shūravīr laḍavaiyo tenī tīkṣhṇa dhār kāḍhelī talavārano ghā vāge to sharīrathī anga alag karī nākhe. Tem bhagavān ane santanā shabdo tīkṣhṇa talavār jevā chhe te saheje j sansāranī vāsanāno nāsh karī nākhe ane mumukṣhunun man sansārathī udās karī tene vairāgya pamāḍī de.

If we spoke exactly as it is, no one would go home. And if one does go home, he cannot stay there.1 ‘Tājī tīkṣhṇa dhār aḍatāmā aḷagu kare; lesh na rahe sansār vachan lāgyā koī vīrnā.’2 Footnotes: 1. 1. The purport of these words is that if the Sant talks about sānkhya (knowledge that the world is temporary) and the greatness of God, then the aspirant will be freed from the attachment to the world and will not go home. If he does go home, then he will not be able to stay there or will not be able to join in his worldly duties. 2. A brave soldier, wielding a sharp sword, will separate the body into two with one blow. Similarly, the words of God and the Sant are like the sword. They break one’s attachment to the world and the aspirant becomes apathetic toward the world.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.329

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 329 · Chapter 5 · Verse 329

Moṭā samarth hoy te ghī sher jamī jāy paṇ tene strī-bhogno sankalp thāy ja nahī. Samādhivāḷā Arūpānand Swāmīne viṣhayno jog thavāthī satsangmāthī nīkaḷī gayā ne samādhi tūṭī gaī ne gnān uday thaye pāchhā farī vakhat satsangmā āvyā eṭale samādhi thaī gaī. Pachhī Mahārāje hasīne kahyu je, “Bhagwānno vaḷagāḍ koī rīte chhūṭe tevo nathī.”

Even if the Great [Purush] eats one sher of ghee, he will still not have thoughts of enjoying a woman. Arupanand Swami, who could experience samādhi, had contact of the vishays and left Satsang. He stopped experiencing samādhi. When he regained his gnān, he returned into Satsang and he started experiencing samādhi again. Then, Maharaj laughed and said, “When God clings to you, there is no way to free yourself from his grasp.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.330

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 330 · Chapter 5 · Verse 330

Upāsanā, āgnā ne Sādhu oḷakhavā; e traṇ vānā avashya joīe. Āgnāmā dharma, niyam, vrat, dān, tap sarve āvī jāy.

Understand upāsanā, commands and the Sadhu; these three things are certainly necessary. In commands, dharma, codes of conduct, observances, donations, austerities are all included.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.331

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 331 · Chapter 5 · Verse 331

Sādhu sāchā chhe temā asādhunī buddhi rahe te viparīt bhāvanā chhe. Ā vāt aṭpaṭī chhe. Te Sādhune bījā sādhunī joḍe meḷavyāthī oḷakhāy. Te upar Munibāvānā draṣhṭānt1 daī ghaṇīk vāt karī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Suratnā ā Vedāntī sanyāsī pāse Brahmānand Swāmī Sanskṛut bhaṇelā. Shrījī Mahārājno mahimā kahī Munibāvāne teo Gaḍhaḍā lāvyā. Mahārājmā temane Shrī Kṛuṣhṇanā darshan thayā. Teo Surat na jatā Gaḍhaḍā ja rokāī gayā ne Mahārāj pāse dīkṣhā laī tyāgī thaī gayā. Sanyāsīnā pāsh lāgyā hoī teo chhāne-chhapne hoko pī letā. Vaḷī, Ghelāmā snān karī dhyān karavā jāy chhe tevu jaṇāvatā, paṇ hakīkate kustī karavā jatā. Koīne dūrthī āvatu jue to tarat padmāsanmā dhyānmā besī jatā.

“Believing that the genuine Sadhu is like other false sadhus is an ill-disposed feeling. This truth is complicated. One can understand by comparing the [genuine] Sadhu with other sadhus.” Then, Swami gave the example of Munibawa1 and talked at length. Footnotes: 1. 1. Munibawa was a Vedanti sannyāsi from Surat. Brahmanand Swami learned Sanskrit from him. Swami gradually told him the greatness of Shriji Maharaj and brought him to Gadhada for Maharaj’s darshan. He had the darshan of Krishna in Maharaj. He did not return to Surat; instead, he stayed in Gadhada and became a sadhu. Because of his sannyāsi habits, he would secretly smoke the hookah. Sometimes, he would say he is going for a bath in the Ghela River, but he actually went to wrestle. If someone spotted him from far, he would sit down cross-legged and pretend to meditate. Munibawa has asked Maharaj questions in Vachanamrut Panchala 3 and Panchala 4.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.332

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 332 · Chapter 5 · Verse 332

Chhellā Prakaraṇnu Tetrīsmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvīne vāt karī je, “Evā moṭā chhe paṇ viṣhaynā jogmā sāru rahevāy chhe te Moṭānī draṣhṭi chhe.”

Swami had Vachanamrut Gadhada III-33 read and said, “The devotees are great (as mentioned in the Vachanamrut), but the reason they do not succumb to the temptation of enticing vishays when they come into contact with them is the protective vision of the Mota [Purush].”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.333

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 333 · Chapter 5 · Verse 333

Koī vātnī antarmā chintā thāy to Bhagwānne māthe nākhī devu. Enāmā anant kaḷāu chhe. Te upar Baḷi tathā Vṛundāne chhaḷyānī vāt karī.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Baḷīne chhaḷyo: Viṣhṇue Vāmanrūp dharī baḷi pāse traṇ pagalā jamīn māngī. Baḷie e āpavā sankalp karyo ke pote Virāṭ banī gayā ne be pagalāmā traṇe lok māpī līdhā. Trīju pagalu Baḷine māthe mūkyu ne tene Sutaḷmā mokalī dīdho. Vṛundāne chhaḷī: Vṛundā Viṣhṇunī bhakta satī hatī. Teno pati Jālandhar asur hato. Viṣhṇune teno nāsh karavo hato. Āthī Jālandharnu rūp laī Vṛundānu satītva chukāvyu ne Jālandharne kapaṭthī māryo.

If any worry for any matter arises within, then place it on the head of God. He has countless skills. On this he talked about how God tricked King Bali and Vrunda1 by employing his skill. Footnotes: 1. 1. Tricking of Bali: Lord Vishnu in the form of Vaman (a dwarf) asked for three steps of land. When King Bali granted it, Vaman grew enormously in size and with his first two steps covered the heavens and the nether worlds. Then he placed the third step on Bali’s head, sending him to Patal (the nether world). Tricking of Vrunda: Vrunda was a faithful devotee of Vishnu. Her husband, Jalandhar, was a demon, whom Vishnu wanted to destroy. Therefore, Vishnu assumed Jalandhar’s form and tricked Vrunda into breaking her fidelity and killed Jalandhar by trickery.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.334

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 334 · Chapter 5 · Verse 334

Amdāvādnī langhīe1 badhā shaherno ijāro rākhyo. Te kūṭī kūṭīne khāvā paṇ navarī na thaī ne bhūkhī ne bhūkhī marī gaī. Tem āpaṇe badhāno ijāro rākhavo nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Mūā pāchhaḷ kuṭāvnārī, chhājiyā levaḍāvnārī strī.

A langhi of Amdavad had a contract for every town. In grieving after the dead, she could not free herself and died hungry. Similarly, we should not have contracts with too many people.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. A langhi is a woman who beats her chest while repeating the name of the person who has died as a means of grieving. According to Brahmaswarup Yogiji Maharaj’s folk tales, one such woman lived in Amdavad. She would grieve in this manner for money after anyone who died in Amdavad. Once, a plague struck Amdavad and many people died. She could not free herself to eat and died beating her chest after the dead. The moral of this story is that one should not get too involved in other peoples’ business; otherwise, they will not let us worship God freely.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.335

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 335 · Chapter 5 · Verse 335

Gonḍaḷnā harijane kahyu je, “Shā pāp karyā hashe te Mahārājnā darshan na thayā?” Tyāre Swāmīe kahyu je, “Puṇya karyā hashe te āj ā darshan thayā; nahī to ghaṇā pāp karat. Bhojane chhādane chintā vṛuthā kurvanti Vaiṣhṇavāh1 āpaṇe to māḷā feravavī, roṭalā to Bhagwān deshe ne keṭlākne dīdhā chhe paṇ khabar nathī ne keṭlākne de chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Jeo Vaiṣhṇav - Bhagwānnā bhakta chhe teo bhojan ane vastranī chintā vṛuthā (khoṭī) kare chhe, kāraṇ ke je vishvambhar - jīvprāṇīonu poṣhaṇ karanār - Bhagwān chhe te potānā ja sharaṇe āvanārnī upekṣhā karashe shu?

A devotee of Gondal said, “What sins have I committed that I did not have the darshan of Maharaj?” Then Swami said, “You must have performed holy deeds that today you have this darshan. Otherwise you would have committed many sins.” ‘Bhojane chhādane chintā vruthā kurvanti vaishnavāhā.’1 We should tell the rosary. God will give us food and has given it to many, but we do not know. And he is still giving to many. Footnotes: 1. 1. Devotees unnecessarily worry about food and shelter.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.336

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 336 · Chapter 5 · Verse 336

Zernā lāḍavā khātā sārā lāge paṇ ghaḍīk pachhī gaḷu zalāy, tem ā ve’vār chhe.

Poisoned lāddus taste good when eaten, but after a while the throat burns. Worldly activities are like this.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.337

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 337 · Chapter 5 · Verse 337

Marnārāne shīd raḍo chho, raḍnārā nathī rahevānā; Topne moḍhe tumbaḍā, te sarve ūḍī jāvānā.

Marnārāne shīd raḍo chho, raḍnārā nathī rahevānā; Topne moḍhe tumbaḍā, te sarve ūḍī jāvānā. Why cry for the deceased? Even the ones who cry will not remain. Like gourds in front of a cannon, our body will not remain.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.338

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 338 · Chapter 5 · Verse 338

Gṛuhasth chhe te to ātmānu gnān jāṇe nahī, māṭe jene Bhagwānne viṣhe tathā Moṭā Sādhu sāthe het chhe tene kāī karavu rahyu nathī. Te upar Madhya Prakaraṇnu Navmu tathā Vartālnu Agiyārmu Vachanāmṛut vichārvā. E beno ek bhāv chhe.

Swāmi said, “One who has affection for God and his great Sadhu has nothing left to do. Based on this, contemplate on Vachanāmruts Gadhadā II-9 and Vartāl 11. They both convey the same message.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.339

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 339 · Chapter 5 · Verse 339

Koṭi koṭi sādhan kare paṇ ām vārtā karavī tenī barābar thāy nahī ne bījāthī to āṭalī pravṛuttimā vātu thāy nahī.

Tens of millions of endeavours may be undertaken but they cannot match the power of these discourses. And others would not be able to deliver such discourses amid all these activities.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.340

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 340 · Chapter 5 · Verse 340

Mahimā samajāy chhe ne farī bhūlī javāy chhe. Māṭe so vakhat vānchīne samaje to farī bhulāy nahī, ne Mahārāj chhatā het bahu hatu ne hamaṇā gnān adhik chhe, ne ghaṇāk sanskārī jīv āvyā chhe, māṭe Sādhumā het tarat thaī jāy chhe.

One understands the mahimā of God, then forgets. Therefore, if one solidifies their understanding after reading 100 times, then one will not forget again. When Maharaj was present, love was predominantly greater. Now, gnān is predominantly greater. Many jivas with great merits of past births have come today, so they easily develop love for the Sadhu.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.341

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 341 · Chapter 5 · Verse 341

Nidrā āve to sūī javu ne surang uḍāḍvānī vāt karī ne koī rīte shatru jitāy em na hoy, to jem Ṭopīvāḷe laḍāīmā dhoḷo dārū pātharīne1 sāmānu lashkar chhaḷthī mārī nākhyu, tem āpaṇe chhaḷ karavo ne manne jītavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Angrejo gandhak ne surokhār mishra karī pṛuthvī par pāthare. Tenā par shatrusenā āve ke agni chāmpe. Gandhak tarat saḷagī ūṭhvāthī senāno nāsh thāy.

If there is no way the enemy in the form of the inner faculties can be defeated, then do as the British – in war they first spread white gunpowder and by trickery killed the opposing army (by igniting the gun powder when the opposing army came to the battlefield). Similarly, use trickery to win over the mind and internal enemies.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.342

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 342 · Chapter 5 · Verse 342

Anek prakārnā pāpī jīv chhe, tene samajāvavā e ja Bhagwānno pratāp chhe.

There are many types of sinful jivas and only God has the power to explain to them the path of moksha.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.343

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 343 · Chapter 5 · Verse 343

Madhyanu Aṭhṭhāvīsmu Vachanāmṛut vanchāvī vāt karī je, “Jīvmā bhūlya āve paṇ anek juktithī tene Bhagwānnā mārgamā rākhavo, paṇ pāḍī nākhavo nahī, e ja Moṭānī moṭāī chhe. Ne ā Vachanāmṛutmā Mahārāje potāno swabhāv kahyo chhe teno bhāv paṇ āvo chhe.” Evī ghaṇī ja mahimānī vātu karī.

After having Vachanamrut Gadhada II-28 read, Swami said, “A jiva may make mistakes, but by any means, to keep it on the path of God and not allow it to fall is the greatness of the great Sadhu.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.344

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 344 · Chapter 5 · Verse 344

Bhagwān ne Bhagwānnā bhaktanī sevā e bemā ja māl chhe.

There is worth only in the service of God and his devotees.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.345

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 345 · Chapter 5 · Verse 345

Mumukṣhu jīvne gnān paṇ thāy ne het paṇ thāy kharu, paṇ satsangmā kusang chhe te enu bhūnḍu karī nākhe chhe, māṭe te oḷakhavo.

An aspirant may develop both spiritual knowledge and affection for the Satpurush. But bad company in satsang spoils it. Therefore, recognize it and stay away from it.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.346

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 346 · Chapter 5 · Verse 346

Baḷadiyāne tantīmā1 bāndhe chhe tem jīvmātrane tantīmā bāndhī līdhā chhe, te koī kriyā thāy ja nahī ne chhuṭāy nahī, ne temāthī chhūṭyāno upāy to pragaṭ Bhagwān ne tenā sangī e be ja chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Tānt, chāmaḍānī dorī; ā tantīthī je vastu bāndhavāmā āve te chhūṭī na shake. Baḷadne tantīthī bāndhī kheḍūt tene pūṭhe thāpo māre eṭale baḷad māne ke pote bandhāī gayo. Ām thoḍā abhyās pachhī bāndhanār tene bāndhe nahī paṇ khālī thāpo māre toy baḷad samaje ke hu bandhāī gayo. Chhoḍatī veḷāe paṇ khālī thāpaṭ ja māravānī!

Just as an ox is bound to a rope,1 all jivas are tied to māyā so that they can neither work for moksha nor break free. The only two means of breaking free from this bondage are manifest God and his associate, the holy Sadhu. Footnotes: 1. 1. It is the usual practice to strap a load on the back of an ox and slap its back to make it move. The ox is conditioned to move whenever someone slaps its back even when there is no load.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.347

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 347 · Chapter 5 · Verse 347

Jūnāgaḍhmā jeṭalā chhe teṭalāne feravī kūṭīne, game tem karīne paṇ, pāsarā1 karīne pār mūkavā chhe to tamāre to shī fakar chhe, keṭalā divas jīvavu chhe? Footnotes: 1. 1. Sīdhā, shuddha.

However many people there are in Junagadh, I want to, in anyway possible, make them pure and put them beyond māyā. So what worry do you have? How many days do you want to live?

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.348

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 348 · Chapter 5 · Verse 348

Sukhī thāvānā prakār: ek to koī rīte karīne Bhagwānmā joḍāyā hoy tathā Santmā joḍāyā hoy tathā ātmagnāne karīne indriyu niyammā karī hoy tathā Bhagwānnā nishche sahit vairāgya hoy tathā sannivartivāḷā1 jīv hoy; e pānch prakārthī sukhī rahevāy. Māṭe potānu taḷ2 tapāsī jovu je, emāthī māre kayu ang chhe, te vichārī sukhī rahevu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Antardraṣhṭivāḷā. 2. Bhūmikā, sthiti.

Happiness results when one attaches to God and his holy Sadhu by any means; one attains knowledge of the ātmā; the senses observe the moral and spiritual disciplines; one has firm conviction in the form of God together with detachment; and the jiva introspects – by these five ways one can remain happy. Therefore, everyone should examine one’s own position and think, “To which of these (five) am I inclined?” and remain happy.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.349

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 349 · Chapter 5 · Verse 349

Bhagwānnā Akṣhardhām sāmī je draṣhṭi e alaukik draṣhṭi chhe, ne prakṛutinu kārya e laukik draṣhṭi chhe. Temā Bhagwānno nishchay e kharekharī alaukik draṣhṭi chhe.

To look at the Akshardham of God is a heavenly vision and to observe the work of Prakruti is an earthly vision. In this resolute faith in God lies the divine vision.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.350

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 350 · Chapter 5 · Verse 350

Santmā joḍāṇo hoy tenu e lakṣhaṇ chhe je, tenī anuvṛuttimā rājī rahe ne te kahe teṭalu ja kām kare paṇ jāstī1 kare nahī ne evānī fakar to Santne rahe. Pachhī tenī te pānch divase, mahine, be mahine ke chār mahine khabar rākhyā kare, ne khabar na rākhe to bagaḍī jāy māṭe khabar rākhe; ne tamoguṇīne to kaī sūze nahī, māṭe tene mokaḷo melīe to ṭhīk paḍe ne maroḍīe to mūnzāy. Footnotes: 1. 1. Vadhāre.

The characteristic of one who has attached to the Sadhu is that he remains happy in obeying the Sadhu intuitively. And he does only that work which the Sadhu tells him to do and nothing more. The Sadhu remains concerned for him and regularly enquires about him after five days, one month, two months or four months. And if the Sadhu did not look after him, he would be spoilt, therefore he looks after him. But one who is of a lazy and arrogant nature is not able to think of anything, therefore, it is better to let him loose. Since if he is forced, he would become depressed.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.351

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 351 · Chapter 5 · Verse 351

Ā samo nahī āve, ā samo to chīr bāḷīne tāpyā jevo chhe.

This time will not return. At this time it is worth burning the costly clothes and warming oneself (i.e. it is time to sacrifice everything to serve God and his Sadhu in manifest human form).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.352

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 352 · Chapter 5 · Verse 352

Kūvāmā rāīnā dāṇā bharīe ne ek tīrvā1 sagya2 chaḍhāvīe eṭalā jīvnu kalyāṇ karavu chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Tīr ākāshmā jeṭalu ūnche jāy teṭalo. 2. Ḍhagalo.

Fill a well with mustard seeds and make a pile as high as an arrow can be shot in the sky – that is the number of jivas we want to liberate.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.353

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 353 · Chapter 5 · Verse 353

Hu mandirmā rahu tyāre koī bārya jāy nahī ne hu bārya jāu tyāre koī mandirmā rahe nahī.

When I stay in the mandir, no one leaves the mandir. When I leave the mandir, no one stays in the mandir.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.354

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 354 · Chapter 5 · Verse 354

Gaḍhaḍāmā Mahārāj pāse sānkhya-yogī bāī-bhāī ghaṇāk rahetā. Temāthī sānkhya-yogī bāiyune laīne keṭlāk jatā rahyā, temā ek Somalo Khāchar tathā Bāpu Ratanjī tathā Miyājī eṭalā sārā rahyā, ne amārā Jūnāgaḍhmā koī sādhu-pāḷāne rūpiyānu nāmu nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhagwān Swāminārāyaṇe Mānarūpī Hāḍakānā Vachanāmṛutmā (Gaḍhaḍā Madhya 41mā) Bāpu Ratanjīnī ane Miyājīnī prashansā karī chhe.

Many sānkhya-yogi male and female devotees stayed with Maharaj in Gadhada. Some of these males left with the sānkhya-yogi females. Among those, Somlā Khāchar, Bāpu Ratanji,1 and Miyāji1 remained good. And in Junāgadh, many sadhus and pārshads do not have any money accounts. Footnotes: 1. 1. Shriji Maharaj has praised Bapu Ratanji and Miyaji in Vachanamrut Gadhada II-41.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.355

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 355 · Chapter 5 · Verse 355

Trikamdās Koṭhārīe kahyu je, “Antarāy rākhasho nahī, tamāru swarūp oḷakhāvjo.” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Oḷakhāvyu chhe. Antarāy rākhatā nathī ne bhaḍako jovo chhe? Paṇ bhaḍakāmā kāī māl nathī, ām ja ṭhīk chhe.”

Trikamdas Kothari said, “Do not keep any barrier. Reveal your true form.” Then Swami said, “It has already been revealed. No barrier is being kept. Do you want to see the divine light? But remember there is no value in the light. This (human form of Akshardham) is the right thing.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.356

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 356 · Chapter 5 · Verse 356

Sūī raheto hoy paṇ te bhāre bhagwadī hoy, te āpaṇāthī oḷakhāy nahī. Te upar gām Bhādrānā Ḍosābhāīnī1 vāt karī je, e mandirmā āvīne sūī rahetā ne bījā aḍadhī rāt sudhī besatā. Paṇ tenī barābar thāy nahī. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ḍosābhāī Jūnāgaḍh āvyā tyāre Guṇātītānand Swāmī temane Sudāmā ane Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa maḷyā te rīte maḷelā; evā e bhaktarāj hatā. 1905nī sālmā Gopāḷānand Swāmīe temanī pāse, “Guṇātītānand Swāmī Mūḷ Akṣhar chhe,” te Bhādrāmā Mahārāje kahelī vāt pahel-vahelī karāvelī.

One who sleeps a lot may be a great devotee, but we are not able to recognize him. On this, he talked about Dosabhai of Bhadra, that he would come to the mandir and sleep, and others would stay up half the night. But they did not compare to him1 in their devotion. Footnotes: 1. 1. Dosabhai was originally from Bhadra. He was one of the recipients of Shriji Maharaj’s grace. Shriji Maharaj once said that 18 muktas have taken birth in Bhadra. Dosa Bhakta was one of them. Because of Maharaj’s grace, he experienced the bliss of samādhi. On the banks of Und river of Bhadra, under a banyan tree, Maharaj taught Dosabhai Sanskrit shloks and kirtans. When Dosabhai of Bhadra came to Junagadh, Gunatitanand Swami received him with great affection. He was a great devotee. In Vikram Samvat 1905 (1849 CE), Gopalanand Swami first asked him to narrate the incident in which Shriji Maharaj had described Gunatitanand Swami as Mul Akshar in Bhadra. Maharaj often performed divine lilās with him when he bathed in the river. When Maharaj spoke the greatness of Mulji Bhakta to his mother Sakarba, Dosa Bhakta was present. Once, he was eating a dry rotlo. Some said, “Dosabhai, why are you eating dry food?” Dosabhai replied back, “Others eat dry food. With each morsel, I eat while remembering Maharaj. How can that be dry?” This was the high level of his devotion.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.357

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 357 · Chapter 5 · Verse 357

‘Tu Puruṣhottam hudo to gharaṇkī roṭī kim karīndo ne jo tu tilango hudo to tuy muṭho ne huy muṭho.’1 Brahma agnimā bāḷyā jeṇe bīj re, ūgyānī tenī āshā ṭaḷī re.2 Footnotes: 1. 1. Ā Kachchhī ukti chhe. Mahāprabhu Vallabhāchāryano ek bhakta temane jamavānu āmantraṇ āpavā āvyo. Mahāprabhue kahyu, “Āj grahaṇ chhe eṭale na jamāy.” Tyāre pelo bhakta kahe, “Tame to Mahāprabhu chho, tamane grahaṇnī roṭalī shu bādh karavānī chhe! Ne jo tame Mahāprabhu na ho ne fakta telang brāhmaṇ ja ho, to to pachhī mārāmā ne tamārāmā sho fer?” 2. Bhāvārtha: brahma agni eṭale ke satpuruṣhanā sānnidhyarūpī agnimān jeṇe vāsanānān bīj homī dīdhān chhe tene farī vāsanā udaya thatī nathī.

‘Tu Puruṣhottam hudo to gharaṇkī roṭī kim karīndo ne jo tu tilango hudo to tuy muṭho ne huy muṭho.’1 Brahma agnimā bāḷyā jeṇe bīj re, ūgyānī tenī āshā ṭaḷī re.2 Footnotes: 1. 1. This is a proverb in the Kachchhi language. A devotee went to invite Mahaprabhu Vallabhacharya to his home for dinner. Vallabhacharya said, “There is an eclipse so one cannot eat today.” The devotee replied, “You are a Mahaprabhu, so how can the eclipse hinder you? If you are not Mahaprabhu and are just another brāhmin from Tailang, then what is the difference between you and me?” 2. If one who has sacrificed the seeds of desires in the fire of Brahman (i.e. in the presence of the Satpurush), then his desires will not grow again.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.358

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 358 · Chapter 5 · Verse 358

Amane Mahārāje kahyu je, “Gāmmāthī āvyā?” Tyāre kahyu je, “Nā, Mahārāj! Nadīmāthī āvyā.” Em desh-kāḷ joīne bolyethī Mahārāj rājī thayā1 ne Muktānand Swāmīnā pūchhavāthī “Kathā sārī chhe”2 em kahyu, tethī Mahārāje kahyu, “Kāl paṇ teḍī lāvajo.” Em desh-kāḷ vichārī bolavu. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ogaṇoterā Kāḷmā Mahārāj Kāriyāṇīmā chhānā rahetā hatā. Te vakhate Suratthī ahī āvelā Guṇātītānand Swāmī gāmmā thaīne āvavānā badale pāchhaḷnā nadīvāḷā raste koī na jue te rīte Mahārāj pāse pahonchyā. Ā vigat jāṇī Mahārāj prasanna thayā. 2. Gaḍhaḍāmā Brahmasūtranā Bhāṣhyanī kathā Mahārāj pāse rātre vanchātī. Te sāmbhaḷvā badhā Akṣhar Orḍīmā bese te Orḍī bharāī jāy. Āthī Mahārāje rasto kāḍhyo ke jene āmā khabar paḍe te ja bese. Guṇātītānand Swāmīne to Mahārājnā darshan karavā hatā. Eṭale emaṇe pūchhatā jaṇāvyu ke kathā ‘Na bhūto na bhaviṣhyati’ evī chhe. Āthī emane besavānī chhūṭ maḷī.

Maharaj asked me, “Did you come through the village?” Then I said, “No, Maharaj, I came from the back road past the river.” Thus, I spoke considering the prevailing time and place, so Maharaj was pleased.1 And when Muktanand Swami asked me whether I knew the Brahmasutras I said that the discourses on it were uniquely good. So Maharaj said, “Allow him to come tomorrow as well.” Thus, think about the place and time and then speak.2 Footnotes: 1. 1. During the V.S. 1879 (1813 CE) famine Maharaj stayed secretly in Kariyani. At that time, Gunatitanand Swami went there from Surat taking the rarely used route past the river, rather than directly through the village to reach Maharaj, so that nobody would spot him. Hearing this, Maharaj was pleased. 2. In Gadhada, the Brahmasutra Bhashya was being read and discussed at night in the presence of Maharaj in the Akshar Ordi. So everyone sat there and there was congestion. So, Maharaj decided that only those who understand the Bhashya be allowed to sit. Gunatitanand Swami merely wanted to have Maharaj’s darshan. So, when asked, he replied in Sanskrit that the discourses were unprecedented. So, he was allowed to sit.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.359

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 359 · Chapter 5 · Verse 359

Samvat 1919nā Bhādarvā Sudi Pūnamne divase Vanḍānī vāḍīmā ek haribhakte Swāmīne kahyu je, “Pūchhavu chhe.” Tyāre Swāmī ūṭhīne oraḍīmā āvyā. Tyā pūchhyu je, “Tamane pūchhīe tenu samādhān karī āpo chho paṇ vaḷī em thāy chhe je, kem thāshe? Te dukh rahe chhe. Māṭe jem sukh thāy tem ṭharāv karī āpo.” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Sukh to āhī ja thāshe. Shatru pīḍe to paṇ āhī sukh thāshe, ne kriyā potāthī thāy evī evī haḷavī kriyā karavī, ne moṭā kāmmā bharāvu nahī ne kahevu je, ‘E mārāthī thāy nahī.’ Ne mandirmā to māṇasno khap chhe te saune rākhe, ne moṭā kāmmā to sukh na rahe ne dukh āve. Māṭe loḍhā, kodāḷī, pāvaḍo e sāchavavā. Tāḷu-kūchī rākhavā ne devā ne sambhāḷīne levā, evu kām karavu. Nīkar manḍaḷmā faravā jāvu tathā shodhavānu1 evā kām karīe. Ne deh pāḍavo te konā hāthmā chhe?” Em bolyā. Tyāre kahyu je, “E to tamārā hāthmā chhe.” Pote kahe, “E to Bhagwānnā hāthmā chhe.” Farī pūchhyu je, “Āvā rūḍā desh-kāḷmā māhīthī ne bahārthī dhakkā lāge chhe tyāre pachhavāḍe satsang kem raheshe?” Swāmī kahe, “Desh-kāḷe karīne kāī satsang jāto nahī rahe.” Vaḷī pūchhyu je, “Koī indriya to niyammā nathī thaī, eṭale mūnzavaṇ āve tyāre mūā sudhī mansūbā thāy chhe. Tame beṭhā mūnzavaṇ āve te ṭāḷo chho paṇ pachhavāḍe konāthī ṭaḷashe? Te niradhār karī āpo. Jem Shrī Kṛuṣhṇe Uddhavne karī āpyo hato, tem karī āpo. Mane to kāī sūzatu nathī, paṇ pachhavāḍe em na thāy je, ā vāt pūchhavī rahī gaī, tevu paṇ kaho.” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Indriyu, antahkaraṇnu to kāḷe karīne samādhān thāy, mūnzavaṇ to evī ja chhe te dhīre dhīre sāru thāshe. Pachhavāḍe mūnzavaṇ ṭāḷe evā ghaṇā chhe, pūchhavānu batāve evā paṇ pachhavāḍe chhe.” Farī pūchhyu je, “Tyāgī-gṛuhīmā jīv konī konī sāthe bāndhavo?” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Jīv bāndhavāmā Bālmukunddāsjī, Prāgajī Bhagat, Jāgā Bhagat, Lālābhāī, Kalyāṇbhāī, Arajaṇ Bābariyo ne Juṇobhāī ādi chhe.” Vaḷī pūchhyu je, “Pachhavāḍe samās thāshe ke asamās thāshe?” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Pachhavāḍe samās nahī thāy to barābar to raheshe.” Pachhī kahe, “Jīv sāmu juo to koṭi kalpe chhūṭako thāy tem nathī.” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Jīvnā sāmu to jotā ja nathī.” Ā rīte uttar āpyā. Footnotes: 1. 1. Shuddha (safāī) karavānu. (Sampradāymā ‘Grantho maṭhārvānu’ evo artha thāy chhe.)

On Bhadarva sud Punam in Vikram Samvat 1919, at the Vandā community’s place, a devotee said to Swami, “I want to ask something (in private).” Then Swami got up and went into the room. There, the devotee asked, “You resolve whatever we ask about but still the feeling remains that ‘How will it happen?’ So misery remains. Therefore, tell us how happiness can be attained.” Then Swami said, “Happiness will be experienced only here (in satsang). Even if the inner enemies (like anger, ego, lust, etc.) harass, happiness will only be experienced here. So, do whatever simple activities you can do (in satsang). “Do not get involved in big tasks but say, ‘I cannot do that.’ People are required in the mandir, so they look after everyone. And in big tasks happiness does not remain and misery occurs. Therefore, look after the iron equipment, axes and shovels; keep locks and keys, give and recollect them carefully. Such small work should be done. Otherwise go on religious tours in groups and undertake cleaning work, etc. Whose hands is it in to shed the body?” Swami spoke in this way. Then someone said, “It is in your hands.” Swami himself said, “It is in the hands of God.” Again someone asked, “If even in such convenient time and place jolts are felt from inside and outside, then how will Satsang remain afterwards?” Swami said, “Satsang will not decline because of place or time.” Again someone asked, “The senses have not been controlled, so worries arise and thoughts of death occur. While you are here you will solve our worries, but who will solve them afterwards? Please finalize it for us. Just as Shri Krishna did for Uddhav, do for us. I cannot think of anything, but so that afterwards I should not feel, ‘This question remained to be asked,’ give me a reply to this.” Then Swami said, “The senses and inner faculties can be controlled slowly over time. Difficulties are like that, but they will slowly resolve. There are many capable of resolving your worries later. There are also many who will remain behind and can teach you what to ask.” Again someone asked, “With what type of renunciants and householders should one attach the jiva?” Then Swami said, “Attach one’s jiva to Balmukunddasji, Pragji Bhakta, Jaga Bhagat, Lalabhai, Kalyanbhai, Arjan Babario, Junobhai and others.” Then someone said, “When one looks at the jiva, it appears that it will not attain moksha for tens of millions of years.” Then Swami said, “We do not look at the faults and drawbacks of the jiva.” In this way he gave the answer.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.360

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 360 · Chapter 5 · Verse 360

Āpaṇe brahmarūp mānavu, te āj em nahī thāy to deh paḍashe tyāre thāshe, paṇ deh hu mānashe tyā sudhī mān ādik doṣh kem ṭaḷashe? Māṭe deh mānavu nahī, em Mahārājno siddhānt chhe. Ne bahu prakārnā māṇas chhe temā jem jene fāve em kahevu; paṇ āvī rīte divasmā ek vār to vichār karavo. Ne ā to bahudhā māṇasmā ek jaṇ nātyamā rahe to sau maḷīne ekane vaṭalyo ṭherāve evī vāt chhe, paṇ e vāt mūkavānī nathī. Ne shāstramā to āvī vātu zāzī na maḷe ne āvī vātu paṇ zāzī thāy nahī, paṇ ā vāt samajvānī chhe ne ā vātmā Gopāḷ Swāmīne shankā thaī tyāre Mahārāj kahe, “E to jene upāsanā na hoy tenī vāt nokhī, paṇ āpaṇe to upāsanā chhe ne tene arthe e karavu chhe māṭe kem nirākār thaī javāshe.”

Believe oneself to be brahmarup. If one does not do this today, then when the body perishes one will have to do so. But as long as the body is believed as the self, how will ego and other faults be overcome? Therefore, do not believe oneself to be this body. That is Shriji Maharaj’s principle. And there are many types of people; explain to them as per their understanding. Consider this at least once a day. Maharaj told Gopal Swami, “For those who do not have an upāsanā, their situation is different. But we have an upāsanā and we want to do this for it. Therefore it is necessary to think of the ātmā.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.361

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 361 · Chapter 5 · Verse 361

Ā jīv dehno golo chhe te dehnī sevā kare chhe ne Bhagwān pāse paṇ dehnī rakṣhā karāve chhe ne Bhagwānne dehnī sevāmā rākhe chhe ne Prahlāde jone dehnī rakṣhā na mānī ne na māgī.

This jiva is a bonded servant and serves the body. It even makes God protect it and keeps God in the service of the body. However, Prahlad did not consider the protection of the body as the most important goal and so did not ask for it.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.362

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 362 · Chapter 5 · Verse 362

Nirantar ā dehmā ne ā lokmā sukh rahe to ā jīv kaye dahāḍe udās thāy evo chhe? Māṭe koīk prakārno kaṭhaṇ desh-kāḷ āve te paṇ ṭhīk chhe.

If there was continuous happiness in this (human) body and in this world, then is there any day the jiva would feel miserable and withdraw from worldly pleasures? So, that some difficult circumstances arise is alright.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.363

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 363 · Chapter 5 · Verse 363

Hāthī upar ambāḍī hoy paṇ gadheḍā upar ambāḍī na hoy. Tem jīv chhe te hāthīne ṭhekāṇe chhe ne deh to gadheḍāne ṭhekāṇe chhe, māṭe temā māl na mānavo.

A specially decorated seat is put only on an elephant, but not on a donkey. Similarly, the jiva is like the elephant (in which a seat for God can be arranged) and the body is like the donkey, therefore do not believe that it has any worth.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.364

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 364 · Chapter 5 · Verse 364

Bhādarvā Vadi Pratipadāne divase sandhyā āratī thayā pachhī santnā nāmnu prakaraṇ chālyu. Temā moṭā moṭā paṇ ek ek nāmnā be-chār-pāch kharā. Te pote kahetā jāy ne bījā pūchhatā jāy temā Guṇātītānand nām to ek ja. Pachhī kathāmā santnā nām āvyā tyāre koīke pūchhyu je, “Tamāre nāme bījā koī hatā?” Tyāre pote bolyā je, “E to ek ja, bākī bījā badhā nāmnā sādhu ne sanyāsī ghaṇā.” Pachhī sang karavānu pūchhyu, temā Jāgā Bhaktanu kahyu ne bījā nām līdhā.

On Bhadarva sud 1, after the evening ārti, a discussion on the names of sadhus took place. There are two-four-five sadhus with identical names even among the seniors. Swami himself would say the name and others would ask. In this the name of Gunatitanand came only once. During the spiritual discourse when sadhus with the same names were recalled, someone asked, “Was there anybody else with your name?” Then Swami said, “No, there was only one (myself), but for the other names there were many sadhus and sannyāsis (with the same name).” Then someone asked about keeping company (of enlightened souls). For this, (Swami) talked about keeping the company of Jaga Bhakta and also mentioned other names.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.365

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 365 · Chapter 5 · Verse 365

Ek vakhat Swāmī mahāpūjāmā beṭhā tyā antarvṛutti karīne ūtarī gayā, te be-traṇ divas sudhī ūṭhyā nahī ne pachhī potānī meḷe beṭhā thaīne goṭhaṇe fāḷiyu bāndhīne beṭhā. Pachhī saune khabar paḍī je, Swāmī samādhimāthī jāgyā. Tyā to sau mandirnā māṇasnī sabhā bharāī gaī ne Swāmī sāmu ek najare joī rahyā. Pachhī Swāmī bolyā je, “Ām joī rahyā chho em ne em jo vṛutti rahe to karmagranthi, sanshaygranthi, mamatvagranthi, ichchhāgranthi, ahaMgranthi ādi sarve granthiyu gaḷī jāy.”

Once, Swami sat in the mahāpujā and while introspecting entered into samādhi. For several days he did not wake up. Then he awoke of his own accord, tied a cloth strap to his knees and sat. When everyone came to know that Swami had awoken from the samādhi, an assembly of all the people in the mandir gathered and everyone looked at Swami intently. Then Swami said, “If your concentration on me remains as steadfast as it is now, all your difficulties regarding actions, doubts, attachments, desires and ego and all other difficulties will be dissolved.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.366

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 366 · Chapter 5 · Verse 366

Ek vakhat Mahārāj Akṣhar Orḍīmā birājmān hatā. Tyā hu Mahārājne darshane gayo. Tyāre Shuk Swāmī mārā sāru āsan gotavā lāgyā. Tyāre Mahārāj kahe, “Emanī āsane karīne moṭap nathī, e to anādinā moṭā chhe. Ne bījānī to āsanthī nānap-moṭap chhe em ā sādhune nathī.” Em kahyu.

Once, Maharaj was seated in his residence, Akshar Ordi. I went there for darshan and Shuk Swami began to look for a seat for me. Then Maharaj said, “His greatness is not due to any seat (i.e. external honour). He is eternally great. Others are great or small due to their seat but that is not the case with this Sadhu.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.367

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 367 · Chapter 5 · Verse 367

Vahevārnī vātmā keṭlāk kahe chhe je, “Swāmī samajtā nathī,” ne hu paṇ na māne evo hoy to kahu je, “Ame kāī jāṇīe nahī;” paṇ vahevār to Swāmīe chalāvyo evo keney āvaḍyo nahī, em bolyā.

Regarding worldly matters, some say that Swami does not understand. And even I say to one who has no idea of the extent of my knowledge of worldly matters that I do not know anything. But then he said that nobody has been able to carry out worldly duties like this Swami has.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.368

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 368 · Chapter 5 · Verse 368

Bhagwān jāṇe em Moṭā Sādhu paṇ jāṇe ne ā to Bhagwān jevā chhe, te sarva vāt jāṇe chhe. Māṭe ene viṣhe manuṣhyabhāv mūkīne prārthanā karavī. Kem je, e to sarvagna chhe.

Just like God, the great Sadhu also knows everything. And he is like God. Therefore, shed all perceptions of human traits in the Sadhu and pray, since he is omniscient.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.369

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 369 · Chapter 5 · Verse 369

Akṣharnu tej dekhāy temā paṇ māl na mānavo; tyāre aishvaryamā māl na mānavo emā shu kahevu? Ne Akṣharnu tej to sukhrūp chhe paṇ te Puruṣhottamnī mūrti jevu nahī em samaje te upāsanā kahevāy.

Even if the divine light of Akshar is seen, do not believe it to be of any worth. Also, do not place any worth in miracles. The divine light of Akshar is a source of happiness, but it is not like that of the murti of Purushottam. Such understanding is called upāsanā.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.370

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 370 · Chapter 5 · Verse 370

Keshavjīvandāsjīe Swāmīne kahyu ke, “Prāgjī vagere tamane ‘Mūḷ Akṣhar’ kahe chhe te mane samajātu nathī ne hu vishvāsī chhu te jem hoy tem kaho.” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Hu Akṣhar chhu em tu jāṇ ne bījo Akṣhar hashe to māre ne tene panchātya chhe. Tu māro vishvās rākhya.” Em be-traṇ vakhat kahyu.

Keshavjivandasji asked Swami, “Pragji and others describe you as Aksharbrahman, but I do not understand this. And I am trusting, so tell me as it is.” Then Swami said, “You believe me as Akshar, and if someone else is Akshar, it is for me and him to resolve. But, you keep trust in me.” He said this several times.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.371

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 371 · Chapter 5 · Verse 371

Mahārāj swadhām padhārvānā hatā, tyāre mane ekānte maḷyā, jem Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa ne Uddhavjī ekānte maḷyā hatā tem.

When Maharaj was to return to his abode, he met me in private, just like Shri Krishna and Uddhavji had met in private (when the former was about to leave the world).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.372

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 372 · Chapter 5 · Verse 372

Koīke Swāmīne kahyu je, “Ā Prāgjīne tame aishvarya āpyu te chhakī gayo māṭe Shekhjīnī peṭhe karo.” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Ā ṭhoṭboṭiyu1 nathī, ā to pātāḷe pāyā chhe, kharā rājīpānu maḷyu chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Chhichharī buddhivāḷu, chhichharu.

Somebody told Swami, “You have given divine powers to this Pragji1 and he has gone out of control, so do what had been done with Shekhji.”2 Then Swami said, “This is not a lighthearted matter. This has deep foundations, down to the very core of the earth. The powers have been attained due to true blessings.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Pragji Bhakta of Mahuva was the foremost disciple of Gunatitanand Swami. He had earned the blessings of Swami by serving him diligently and so had been blessed with many divine powers. Others who were jealous of Pragji Bhakta urged Swami to revoke the powers. However, Swami firmly stated that Pragji had been so bestowed because he merited them. 2. Shekhji was a devotee of Bhagwan Swaminarayan who had been instructed by Maharaj to spread Satsang in the Sindh region. He requested Maharaj to grant him some divine powers to make his task easier. So, Maharaj granted that anyone meditating on his beard would attain samādhi. Also, Maharaj told him not to have any contact with women and to keep control in his eating and drinking habits. But Shekhji became proud of his newly given powers and disobeyed Maharaj’s strict instructions. When Maharaj found out, he withdrew the powers he had given. Then Shekhji returned to Maharaj and asked for pardon.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.373

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 373 · Chapter 5 · Verse 373

Āmā rahīne vartamān na pāḷe e kevu kahevāy? Vaḷī, vartamān dīvā jevā pāḷe ne mandir, āchārya ne Moṭā Sādhunu khode ethī bhūnḍo koṇ? E to olyāthī paṇ bhūnḍo.

What can be said of one who stays in this Satsang and does not observe the basic rules. Further, who is worse than one who observes the codes as brightly as a lamp and yet slanders the mandir, āchārya and the great Sadhu? He is even worse than the former.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.374

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 374 · Chapter 5 · Verse 374

Suratthī Mahārāj chālyā te Kīm Nadīmā ūtaryā. Tyā bhāre bhāre sukhaḍā thāḷ bharīne Brahmachārīe mūkyā. Tyāre Mahārāj kahe, “Āpaṇe tyāgīe āvu na khavāy.” Pachhī sāthavo mangāvyo, temā paṇ sākar na nākhī, ne mīṭhu ne sāthavo jamyā.

Maharaj departed from Surat and crossed the Kim river. There, Brahmachari brought many delicious foods for Maharaj, but Maharaj said, “A renunciant should not eat this type of food.” Maharaj asked for sāthavo1 without added sākar, added salt, and ate. Footnotes: 1. 1. Flour made from baked grains.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.375

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 375 · Chapter 5 · Verse 375

Vātu karīne bījāne dravyādik khoṭu karāvīe chhīe, paṇ āpaṇe tyāgīne paṇ e karavānu chhe.

Through spiritual talks we remove the desire for wealth, etc. in householders, but we renunciants also have to do this.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.376

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 376 · Chapter 5 · Verse 376

Grāmyakathā karyā kare ne temā bhakti manāve ne moṭerā hoy tene koīthī kahevāy paṇ nahī ne koī kahe to bhaktino oth laīne tene paṇ sorī pāḍe. Ne emāthī nokhu paḍavu hoy tene to anek kaḷā chhe, te khasī jāvu.

If one gossips and makes others believe it is bhakti, and he is of a senior status, then no one can question him. And if one questions him, he will use the pretext of bhakti and will discredit the questioner vehemently. If one wants to separate from them, there are many ways. One should separate from them.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.377

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 377 · Chapter 5 · Verse 377

Hṛudaygranthi to ek strīne ja kahī chhe, paṇ bījā koī viṣhayne hṛudaygranthi lakhatā nathī. Māṭe enā doṣh to ekāntik jāṇe chhe, ne bījo tyāgī thayo hoy to paṇ emā koīk prakārnī sukhbuddhi rahe ne keṭalīk vāt kahevāmā bādh āve te kahevāy nahī.

A deep attachment from the heart is described only for women, but for no other object is such deep attachment from the heart described. Thus, the drawback of this is known by the God-realized (Sadhu), while another, one who has become a renunciant, still harbours a feeling that there is happiness in this. And some talks are not to be discussed, because there are obstacles in giving such talks.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.378

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 378 · Chapter 5 · Verse 378

Be prakārnā sādhu-satsangī chhe, temā ek viṣhay maḷe to rājī thāy ne ek viṣhay ṭaḷe to rājī thāy.

There are two types of sadhus and satsangis. Of them, one is pleased on attaining worldly pleasures and the other is pleased when desires for worldly pleasures are overcome.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.379

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 379 · Chapter 5 · Verse 379

Gharethī āve tyāre be prakārnī tāṇ hoy chhe: te ā loknī ne parloknī. Temāthī ek tāṇ rahe, parloknī tāṇ rahe evā to vīralā, kem je, evā shabdanā kahenārā na maḷe tyāre jīv te shu kare? Bākī ā lokmā choṭāḍe evā shabda ghaṇā āve.

After one renounces their home, they have two types of drives: one of this world and the other of the world beyond (i.e. Akshardham). Those who maintain only one drive - that of Akshardham - are outstandingly brave. The reason is that people who speak words (that encourage pursuing Akshardham) cannot be found. So what will the jiva do? Plentiful words that cause it to become attached to this world come its way.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.380

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 380 · Chapter 5 · Verse 380

Tyāgī hoy ne be mahinā strīnā hāthnā ghaḍelā roṭalā khāy to tenī smṛuti karāvī dye. Te upar vāt karī je, ‘Raho to rājā rasoī karu’ temā eno mat em je, ‘Evī khīr karīne khavarāvu te brahmānḍnī striyu badhī sāmbhare,’ em kahyu. Ek strī vinā bījā kayā viṣhayno tyāg chhe ne kayā viṣhayno abhāv chhe? Te to tapāsīne jue tyāre jaṇāy, ne strīno to dehe karīne tyāg chhe to paṇ tene joī liye ane tyāgī thaī beṭhā chho to paṇ tapās karavo je, keṭalu tyāg karyu chhe?

“If a renunciate eats rotlās rolled by a woman for two months, then that will cause him to remember the worldly pleasures.” Regarding this, Swami said, “‘Raho to rājā rasoi karu...’1 In this, her intention was: I’ll make such a delicious khir such that the king would remember all the women in the world. Other than a woman, what other vishay has one renounced and what other vishay does one have an aversion to? That can only be known if one examines oneself. And one has physically renounced women, yet one may steal a look. Though you all have renounced physically, you should examine how much you really have renounced.” Footnotes: 1. 1. This line is about a story of a king who renounced. When he went to beg for food, a woman said this to detract him from his renunciation. She told him to wait a few minutes while she made khir to serve him. Then, Swami mentions the intention of this woman was to foster his memory of the pleasures of the senses again.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.381

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 381 · Chapter 5 · Verse 381

Lāḍavā na khāvā, ne kaho to sāchu kahīe je, gṛuhasthnā chhokarāne lāḍavā vaḷāvīne thoḍāk divas khavarāve chhe tenu daivat bār mahinā sudhī rahe chhe. Tyāre ā to nirantar lāḍavā khāshe teno tyāg kem pār paḍashe? Ne ā tāvaḍā to rātripralay sudhī nahī ūtare.

One should not eat laddus. And if I may speak the truth, the gruhasthas who feed laddus to their sons for a few days have an effect that lasts 12 months. So, how will one succeed in maintaining their renunciation if one eats laddus everyday here? And these cooking pans will not come off the stove1 even till the rātri-pralay (the dissolution of the three worlds when one day of Virat-Purush ends). Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is saying that food will always have to be made for Thakorji and the devotees (so the cooking pans will always be on the stove). But, for renunciants, they will have to maintain discretion on what they eat and how much they eat, because food is the cause of laziness and lust.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.382

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 382 · Chapter 5 · Verse 382

Uparthī bhagavu; paṇ jīv kyā bhagavo chhe? Evu hoy te paṇ jovu.

One dresses the body in saffron. But has the jiva become saffron? If this is the situation (i.e. the renunciation is superficial), that, too, must be considered seriously and corrections made.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.383

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 383 · Chapter 5 · Verse 383

‘Vāsudev hare’no shabda har koī bole tethī tarat ūbhu thavāy chhe, em Moṭā koī kriyā sāru bolāve temā na uṭhāy e khoṭya kahevāy.

How easy is it for one to get up when they hear the words “Vasudev Hare!” Similarly, when the Mota-Purush calls one for some task and one cannot get up, that is a shortcoming.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.384

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 384 · Chapter 5 · Verse 384

Ek sādhu kahe, “Āpaṇā karammā lāḍavā nahotā ne ā to Bhagwānnā pratāpe emanī ichchhāe maḷe chhe māṭe bhogavavu teno bādh nathī.” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “E samajaṇ khoṭī chhe, kem je, khāvā-pīvā to ghaṇā vimukhne paṇ maḷe chhe.” Tyāre ko’ke kahyu je, “Mahārāj paṇ santne lāḍavā ādi jamāḍtā.” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Te to em samajvu je, jīvne potānī smṛuti thāy te sāru jamāḍtā, paṇ Mahārājno evo mat nahī je, viṣhay bhogavāvavā.”

One sadhu said, “We did not have laddus to eat according to our fate, but because of God’s grace and wish, we get such delicious items to eat. So, there is no objection in indulging.” Swami replied, “That understanding is wrong, because, many non-believers also get food and water.” Then, someone said, “Maharaj himself served laddus and other items to sadhus.” Swami replied, “In that, one should understand that he served delicious items so one can maintain his smruti. But Maharaj’s principle was not to enable the indulgence of vishays.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.385

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 385 · Chapter 5 · Verse 385

Khāīne deh jāḍu karavu ne zāzu ūnghavu e be mane game nahī. Kem je, e be kāmnā hetu chhe. Ne man paṇ navaru rahe to vyabhichār kare, māṭe navaru na rākhavu.

Eating and making the body fat, and sleeping a lot – these two I do not like, since these two are a cause of lust. And even the mind, if it is idle, will commit adultery. So do not let it remain idle.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.386

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 386 · Chapter 5 · Verse 386

Bhekhmā āvyā pachhī dehābhimān vadhī jāy chhe ne pachhī tene koīk kārasāmā1 le tyāre dukh thāy. Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhīḍāmā, kasoṭīmā.

When one joins the sadhu-fold, one’s consciousness of the body increases. Therefore, when he is tested with physical hardships, he experiences misery.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.387

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 387 · Chapter 5 · Verse 387

Gṛuhasthne rūpiyānu bhajan thāy chhe ne tyāgīne dehnu bhajan thāy chhe.

Gruhasthas worship (constantly remember) money and renunciants worship (constantly remember) their body.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.388

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 388 · Chapter 5 · Verse 388

Ḍāhyo hoy tene vaḍhe tyāre rājī thāy ne mūrkh hoy tene vakhāṇe tyāre rājī thāy, em Mahārāj kahetā.

One who is wise is pleased when rebuked by God and his holy Sadhu, while the foolish is pleased when praised.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.389

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 389 · Chapter 5 · Verse 389

Bhagwān tathā Ekāntik e beyno swabhāv em je, ā lokmā bolavāmā tathā kriyāmā tālmel nahī. Bākī bījāne tālmel, te pratyakṣha dekhāy chhe.

The nature of both God and the God-realized Sadhu in this world is that there is no hypocrisy in their speech and actions. While others are hypocrites, that is actually seen.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.390

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 390 · Chapter 5 · Verse 390

Moṭā sāthe het thayu hoy to vāsanāvāḷānā antarmā paṇ sukh āve ne te vinā to nirvāsanik thayo hoy to paṇ lūkho shuṣhka rahe.

If affection for the great is developed, then even one with worldly desires feels joy within and without this affection for the great, even one who is desireless remains miserable.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.391

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 391 · Chapter 5 · Verse 391

Lākhu māṇasne satsang karāve ne pote narkamā jāy em kahyu. Kem je, jīvnu kalyāṇ karyu te to Bhagwāne karyu. Jem shāhukārno gumāsto hūnḍī lakhe te svīkārāy tem. Footnotes: 1. 1. dṛuṣhṭānta: koī shāhukārano munīm hūnḍī lakhī āpe to te svīkārāya chhe, parantu emān munīmano koī prabhāv nathī, paṇ shāhukāranā nāmanathī paisā maḷe chhe. siddhānta: iṣhṭadev ane gurunā ādesh ane ādarsha pramāṇenā vartan vagar kadāch bhagavānano koī bhakta lākho māṇasane satsanga karāve, to e badhānun kalyāṇ to bhagavānanā pratāpe thāya chhe, paṇ emān bhaktano koī prabhāv nathī.

Swami said, “One may inspire satsang to a hundred thousand people, yet he himself goes to narak. The reason is that the liberation of the jiva was granted by God. This is similar to a check written by an agent of a wealthy banker being accepted.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. A wealthy banker’s clerk may write a check, which will be accepted not because of the clerk’s disposition but because of the wealthy banker’s financial backing. Similarly, without following God’s and guru’s command and abiding by their wishes, a devotee many inspire satsang in many people, but the liberation of the people is due to God’s grace, not the strength of the devotee.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.392

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 392 · Chapter 5 · Verse 392

“Panchāḷānā Vachanāmṛutmā kahyu chhe je, ‘Jem jem Bhagwānno sambandh rahe tem tem sukh thāy chhe; te Bhagwān parokṣha hoy tyāre kem sambandh rahe?’” Pachhī uttar karyo je, “Kathā, kīrtan, vārtā, bhajan ne dhyān teṇe karīne sambandh kahevāy. Ne te karatā paṇ Moṭā Sādhuno sang e to sākṣhāt Bhagwānno sambandh kahevāy ne Bhagwānnu sukh āve. Kem je, temā Bhagwān sarva prakāre rahyā chhe. Ne pratyakṣha hatā tyāre paṇ jevā chhe tevā na jāṇyā to sambandh na kahevāy ne em jāṇyā vinā to pratyakṣha hoy to paṇ shu! Ne tem ja je Santmā Bhagwān sarva prakāre rahyā chhe tene jāṇe to āje pratyakṣha chhe ne em jāṇyā vinā to āje parokṣha chhe.” Tyāre ek sādhue kahyu je, “Mūrtiyu pratyakṣha nahī?” Tyāre Swāmī bolyā je, “Pratyakṣha Bhagwān tathā Santnā charitramā manuṣhyabhāv āve to Amāvāsyānā chandramānī peṭhe ghaṭī jāy chhe ne divyabhāv jāṇe to Bījnā chandramānī peṭhe vadhe chhe. Tem mūrtiyu shu charitra kare je teno avaguṇ āve ne ghaṭī jāy? Māṭe bolatā-chālatā je Bhagwān te ja pratyakṣha kahevāy ne Moṭā Sant hoy te ja mūrtiyumā daivat mūke chhe, paṇ mūrtiyu, shāstra ne tīrth traṇ maḷīne ek Sādhu na kare. Ne evā Moṭā Sant hoy to mūrtiyu, shāstra ne tīrth traṇene kare. Māṭe jemā Bhagwān sarva prakāre rahyā hoy evā je Sant te ja pratyakṣha Bhagwān1 chhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Pratyakṣh Bhagwān eṭale ‘Bhagwānnu swarūp’ evo arth samajavo.

Only the great Sadhu can instil divinity in the murti. But the three – murtis, scriptures and places of pilgrimage – together do not equal a Sadhu. And such a great Sadhu is able to make all three – murtis, scriptures and places of pilgrimage. Therefore, such a Sadhu, in whom God fully resides, is the manifest form of God. A sadhu asked, “Is God not manifest in the murtis?” Then Swami said, “If one attributes human traits to the actions of God and his holy Sadhu then one’s spiritual progress vanishes like the new moon; and if one attributes divine traits, then one progresses spiritually like the waxing moon of the second day of the bright half of the lunar month. And what actions do the murtis perform that one perceives faults in them and regresses? Therefore, only the talking-walking form of God (i.e. human form) is called manifest.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.393

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 393 · Chapter 5 · Verse 393

“Klesh kem na āve?” E prashnano uttar karyo je, “Rāg, pakṣh ne agnān e traṇ na rahe to klesh na āve ne emāthī ek hoy to paṇ klesh āve.”

How can arguments be prevented? The answer to the question was given, “If desires, bias and ignorance are eliminated, then quarrels will not arise and if even one of these (three) is present, clashes will arise.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.394

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 394 · Chapter 5 · Verse 394

Sādhutānā guṇ hoy tevo gṛuhasth paṇ sādhu kahevāy, paṇ lūgaḍā rangelā teṇe karīne sādhu na kahevāy.

Even a householder with saintly qualities is considered as a sadhu. One who merely dons saffron coloured clothes cannot be called a sadhu.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.395

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 395 · Chapter 5 · Verse 395

Harek vāt sāmbhaḷīne te ākāre1 thaī jāvu, evī to koī moṭī khoṭya ja nathī. Moṭā Muktānand Swāmī ādi pāse koī vāt kare te pratham to sāmbhaḷī rahe, pachhī bolavu ghaṭe to bole nīkar na bole. Ānun mūḷ pratilom chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Sarva prakāre vātne svīkārīne te pramāṇe vartavā manḍavu ādi.

There is no greater deficiency than to listen to every talk and act exactly according to it. When somebody talks to Muktanand Swami and other seniors, at first they listen and, then, only if necessary they speak, otherwise they do not even speak. The root of this discipline is introspection.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.396

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 396 · Chapter 5 · Verse 396

“Bolavu to ghaṭe tem, paṇ samajvu to kharu.”1 Pachhī bolyā je, “Konā Rādhāramaṇ ne konā Gopīnāth? Āpaṇe to ek Swāminārāyaṇnī oḷakhāṇ chhe ne Mahārāj teḍavā āve chhe te bheḷā Sādhu kadāpi āve chhe paṇ koī avatār to sāthe āvatā nathī ne avatārnā to ṭoḷā chhe, tenī āpaṇe oḷakhāṇ nathī ne Mahārājnī āgnā chhe te thāḷ dharavā ne prasādī jamavī, bākī roṭalā khāvā. Paṇ samajavānu to āṭalu ja chhe je, laghushankā jevāne Puruṣhottam ṭherāve chhe to ā to Puruṣhottam chhe ja. Ne ām na samaje to ko’kno bhār rahī jāy. Ne Mahārāje Shikṣhāpatrīmā lakhyu chhe te jo em na lakhe to Patrī fāḍī nākhe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Guṇātītānanda svāmīnā kahevānun tātparya e chhe ke parabrahma ane akṣharabrahma satpuruṣh evā guruno mahimā jem chhe tem samajavo, parantu kahevāmān vivek rākhavo.

“One should speak only as much as is necessary, but should understand thoroughly.”1 Then, Swami said, “Who does Radha-Raman belong to and who does Gopinath belong to? We know only one - Swaminarayan. And when Maharaj comes to take one away at the end of their life, the Sadhu also comes with him, but no avatār comes with him. And there are multitudes of avatārs that we do not even know. It is Maharaj’s command to offer thāl and eat the prasādi;2 otherwise eat rotlā. But this is all that we need to understand: others believe those who are like urine to be Purushottam, whereas this [Shriji Maharaj] is Purushottam. If one does not understand this way, then one will be impressed by others. And Maharaj wrote in the Shikshapatri that way because if he did not write it that way, others would tear it up.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Gunatitanand Swami’s purport here is that one should understand the greatness of Parabrahma and Aksharbrahma thoroughly and completely; however, when speaking to others, one should use discretion. 2. Maharaj has commanded to serve the murtis - adorn with clothes, offer thāl, perform ārti, etc. - of the deities that he has installed in the mandirs he constructed.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.397

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 397 · Chapter 5 · Verse 397

‘Koṭi Kṛuṣhṇa tyā joḍe hāth, Sadguru khele Vasant’ e kīrtan to Kabīrnu, paṇ Mahārāj bahu bole ne bolāve. Temā ‘Koṭi Kṛuṣhṇa tyā joḍe hāth’ e shabda vāre vāre bole ne potānu swarūp samajāve. Sārangpurmā Rāṭhoḍ Dhādhalne ghare ūtaryā hatā tyā Hutāshaṇī karīne ā kīrtan bahu bole ne bolāve.

The kirtan ‘Koṭi Kṛuṣhṇa tyā joḍe hāth, Sadguru khele Vasant’ was written by Kabir, but Maharaj would sing it frequently and had others sing it. In this kirtan, he would sing the words ‘Koṭi Kṛuṣhṇa tyā joḍe hāth over and over again and explain his form. When he stayed at Rathod Dhadhal’s house in Sarangpur and celebrated Hutashani (Holi), he sang this kirtan often.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.398

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 398 · Chapter 5 · Verse 398

Satsangijīvanmā Puruṣhottamne ṭhekāṇe moralī ghāle te amane na game ne tene to shāstra āḍā fare. Māṭe jene Moṭā Sādhuno vishvās hashe tene ja pādharu paḍashe. Moṭerāne to hajār kām levā te dravyamā joḍashe ne dravyamā to strī paṇ rahī chhe. Te Arthī doṣhān na pashyati1 e Mahārāj bahu bolatā. Footnotes: 1. 1. Na pashyati cha janmāndhah kāmāndho naiva pashyati; Na pashyati madonmatto hyarthī doṣhān na pashyati. Arth: jem janmathī ja andha vyakti kaī joī shakato nathī, kām vāsanāmā chakachūr vyakti kaī joto nathī, nashāthī unmatta thayel vyakti kaī joto nathī, tem svārthī-lobhī manuṣhya paṇ anarth karavāmā koī doṣh joto nathī.

In the Satsangijivan, I do not like that a flute is used in the description of Purushottam;1 and none of the scriptures can fully describe Purushottam. Therefore, one who has trust in the great Sadhu will understand clearly. The [worldly] great want others to join in a thousand of their [worldly] tasks; therefore, they will entangle others in money matters. And where there is money, women are sure to follow. Maharaj used to say Arthī doṣhān na pashyati2 often. Footnotes: 1. 1. Gunatitanand Swami is pointing out that, despite Maharaj being Purushottam, in the Satsangijivan, he is described with a flute (i.e., as Krishna) because others would object referring to Maharaj as Purushottam. 2. Just as a person born blind cannot see anything, one who is overcome with lust cannot see right from wrong. Similarly, the selfish and greedy do not see anything wrong in immoral conduct.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.399

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 399 · Chapter 5 · Verse 399

Janma thayā mor shādī kyāthī lakhāy? Tem Puruṣhottam1 āvyā nahotā tenī vāt shāstramā kyāthī lakhāṇī hoy? Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhagwān Swāminārāyaṇ.

How can there be a marriage of a person before his birth? Similarly, when Purushottam had not incarnated, how could his story be written in the scriptures?

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.400

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 400 · Chapter 5 · Verse 400

Mahārāj kahe, “Ame māndā thayā tyāre dhām jovā gayā hatā; te devatānā, ṛuṣhinā ādik sarve joyā. Pachhī to Akṣhardhām najarmā āvyu.”1 Emā potānu swarūp kahyu ne dhāmnā sukhnī vistāre vāt karī. Ne Lakṣhmīnārāyaṇ, Narnārāyaṇ, Vāsudev Nārāyaṇ, Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa, Pradhān-Puruṣh ne Prakṛuti-Puruṣh e sarve karatā paṇ ā sarva prakāre adhik chhe ne emā antarjāmīpaṇu chhe ethī āmā visheṣh antarjāmīpaṇu chhe ne emā aishvarya chhe ethī āmā visheṣh aishvarya chhe. Ne Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa Bhagwān to ek brahmānḍnī govāḷī kare chhe ne evā to anant brahmānḍ chhe ne anant Shrī Kṛuṣhṇa chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ā varṇan Swāmīnī Vāt 3/11mā vistārathī āve chhe.

Maharaj said, “When I was ill, I went to look at other abodes. I saw many adobes of deities, rishis, and others. Then, Akshardham came into view.”1 Then, Maharaj explained his form and described the bliss of Akshardham in detail. And compared to Lakshminarayan, Narnarayan, Vasudev Narayan, Shri Krishna, Pradhan Purush, and Prakruti Purush, he [Maharaj] is greater in every way. These others are omniscient but Maharaj’s omniscience is greater. And they have powers, but Maharaj has even greater powers. Krishna herds cattle in only one brahmānd (i.e. protects one brahmānd), but there are infinite brahmānds and infinite Krishnas like this one. Footnotes: 1. 1. This narrative is found in Swamini Vat 3/11.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.401

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 401 · Chapter 5 · Verse 401

Nivṛutti mārgmā tyāgī khāṭyā ne Bhagwān rākhavāmā gṛuhasth khāṭyā. Te shu je, tyāgīne beṭhā beṭhā jamavānu maḷe, padārth maḷe ne kāī karavu na paḍe; ne gṛuhasthne pragaṭ Bhagwānnu swarūp jem chhe tem samajāṇu tethī gṛuhasth Bhagwān rākhavāmā khāṭyā chhe. Footnotes: 1. 1. Guṇātītānanda svāmī samajāve chhe ke jo koī tyāgī jāṇapaṇun chūkī jāya to nivṛuttimārgamān bandhāī rahe chhe, parantu pragaṭ bhagavānano ānanda bhogavī shake nahīn. Ane je gṛuhastha bhakto bhagavānano yathārtha mahimā samaje chhe teo pragaṭ bhagavānanā ānandamān alamasta rahī shake chhe.

In the path of nivrutti, the renunciants benefited, and in keeping God, the gruhasthas benefited. How so? The renunciants get food and items without effort and they do not have to endeavor. On the other hand, the gruhasthas have understood the form of God thoroughly, so they benefited in keeping God.1 Footnotes: 1. 1. Swami is explaining that if renunciants lose their awareness (forget the goal of their renunciation), they will become attached to food and materialistic objects on the path of nivrutti and will not be able to experience the bliss of God. On the other hand, if the gruhasthas understand the greatness of God thoroughly, then they can remain in ecstasy of God’s bliss.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.402

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 402 · Chapter 5 · Verse 402

Gopāḷānand Swāmīne dhoḷā paherāvavā māṭe olyā deshnā badhā ne ā deshnā trījā bhāgnā Vartālmā bheḷā thayā te vātnī amane khabar paḍī. Pachhī amane thayu je, “Gopāḷānand Swāmī kochavāshe ne Mahārāj temane teḍī jashe to rānknā hānḍalā fūṭī jashe.”1 Pachhī ame Vartāl gayā ne utāro karyā mor em ne em pādharā Raghuvīrjī Mahārāj pāse gayā ne kahyu je, “Ā vātnu kem chhe?” Tyāre Raghuvīrjī Mahārāj kahe je, “Emā māru kāī chāle em nathī. Nityānand Swāmīne pūchho.” Pachhī ame Nityānand Swāmī pāse gayā ne kahyu je, “Moṭā sādhunu apmān thāy te ṭhīk nahī, ane ṭhapako devo hoy to āpaṇe daīe.” Pachhī Nityānand Swāmīe Pavitrānand Swāmīne pūchhyu je, “Pavitrānand! Ā Guṇātītānand Swāmī shu kahe chhe?” Tyāre Pavitrānand Swāmī bolyā je, “Ṭhīk kahe chhe, kāraṇ ke olyā deshnā samovaḍiyā te āpaṇā deshmā āvīne āpaṇī mārfat Gopāḷ Swāmīnu apmān karāvīne chālyā jāy te to āpaṇu hīṇu kahevāy.” Tyāre Nityānand Swāmī bolyā je, “Hu to kāī nahī bolu ne hu sabhāmā āvīne hāthmā māḷā laīne besīsh eṭale koī bolāvshe nahī; kem je, māḷā feravtā hu bolato nathī em sau jāṇe chhe. Paṇ Bhagwadānand bahu faḍfaḍyo chhe tene samajāvo.” Pachhī ame Bhagwadānand Swāmī pāse gayā. Tyāre teṇe āsan nākhī āpyu te ame fagāvī dīdhu. Tyāre kahe, “Swāmī! Āvaḍo kop shu?” Tyāre kahyu je, “Moṭānu apmān karavā ā ṭhāṭh rachīne beṭho chhu, te āhī tu moṭo chhu paṇ Akṣhardhāmmā hu moṭo chhu. Māṭe jo āhī kāī unmattāī karīsh to Akṣhardhāmmā taḍake ūbho rākhīsh.” Tyāre Bhagwadānand Swāmī kahe, “Swāmī! Akṣhardhāmmā taḍako nathī te?” Tyāre ame kahyu je, “Bhagwān anyathākartum chhe, te tārā sāru navīn karīsh.” Pachhī to te kahe je, “Hu nahī bolu.” Pachhī ame utāre gayā ne bīje divase savārmā sabhā bharāṇī ne Nityānand Swāmī māḷā laīne feravavā manḍyā tyāre sarvee jāṇyu je, have Nityānand Swāmī kāī nahī bole. Eṭale Manjukeshānand Swāmīe prashna karyo je, “Dharmadevne putra keṭalā?” Tyā to hu paṇ gayo ne pūchhyu je, “Shu prasang chāle chhe?” Tyāre kahe je, “Dharmadevnā putra keṭalā?” Tyāre ame kahyu je, “Dharmadevnā traṇ putra chhe e koṇ nathī jāṇatu?” Pachhī to ame vātu karavā mānḍī je, “Dharmāmṛutnā karanārā beṭhā chhe tyā ja Dharmāmṛut lopāy chhe ne manḍaḷ dīṭh paṭārā thaī gayā chhe, māṭe āj bey āchārya bheḷā thayā chho te Dharmāmṛut paḷe tem karo ane kāle savāre saunā paṭārā jovā chhe ane jene Dharmāmṛut pāḷavā hoy te rahejo ne bījā chālavā mānḍajo.” Pachhī to rātya badhī āghu-pāchhu karavāmā koī ūnghyā nahī ne savārmā Bhajanānand Swāmīno paṭāro tapāsyo to temā kāī nīkaḷyu nahī. Tyāre ek sādhue kahyu je, “Swāmī! Ā Bhajanānand Swāmīnā paṭārāmāthī to kāī nīkaḷyu nahī.” Tyāre ame kahyu je, “Shu nīkaḷe tāru kapāḷ? Jyāre kāī na hoy tyāre be paṭārānu shu kām hoy! Ane satsangmāthī vaidu karīne adhmaṇ sonu bheḷu karyu hatu, te satsangnā kāmmā āvyu nathī ne kusangīnā gharmā rahyu.” Pachhī sabhā thaī tyāre olyā deshnā sarvene ame kahyu je, “Āpaṇe maḷyā nathī te lyo maḷīe.” Pachhī sau maḷyā ne chālī nīkaḷyā. Em sadguruno ṭanṭo ṭāḷyo. Footnotes: 1. 1. Mumukṣhuonu kalyāṇ aṭakī jashe.

I heard that people from the other diocese (Amdavad) and a third from this diocese (Vartal) gathered in Vartal to make Gopalanand Swami wear white robes. Then, I thought, “Gopalanand Swami will be hurt so Maharaj will take him to Akshardham, and the poor people’s clay pots will break.”1 Then, I went to Vartal. Before settling in my accommodations, I went straight to Raghuvirji Maharaj and asked, “What is behind this talk?” Raghuvirji Maharaj replied, “Nothing of what I say goes. Ask Nityanand Swami.” Then, I went to Nityanand Swami and said, “It is not proper for a senior sadhu to be being insulted. If he needs to be scolded, we will do it.” Nityanand Swami asked Pavitranand Swami, “Pavitranand! What is Gunatitanand Swami saying?” So, Pavitranand Swami said, “He is correct. It would make us look bad if those from the other diocese (Amdavad) come here to our diocese and insult Gopalanand Swami and leave.” Nityanand Swami said, “I will not say anything. I will come to the assembly and start doing the mālā so no one will ask me anything, because everyone knows I do not speak when doing the mālā. However, Bhagwadanand is incited so ask him.” Then, I went to Bhagwadanand Swami and he placed an āsan for me to sit. I flung the āsan away. He said, “Why such rage?” I said, “You have plotted to insult a senior sadhu. You may be great here, but in Akshardham, I am great. So, if you do anything wrong here, I will make you stand in the scorching heat.” Bhagwadanand Swami said, “Swami, there is no scorching heat in Akshardham.” I said, “God has the powers of anyathākartum, so I will create it for you.” Then, he said, “I will not say a word.” Then, I went to my accommodation and the assembly took place the next day. Nityanand Swami sat while turning the mālā and everyone knew he would not speak. So, Manjukeshanand Swami asked, “How many sons does Dharmadev have?” I arrived at the assembly and asked what is happening. The question was raised again, “How many sons does Dharmadev have?” I said, “Who does not know that Dharmadev has three sons?” Then, I started to speak, “The one who wrote the Dharmamrut (Nityanand Swami) is sitting here and yet it is being transgressed in his presence. And each group of sadhus now possesses one chest. Therefore, since both the āchāryas are together, do what is necessary so that everyone follows the Dharmamrut. Tomorrow, we want to examine everyone’s chests. Whoever wants to follow the Dharmamrut should stay and others should leave.” Then, the whole night passed in trying to hide the contents of their chests and no one slept. In the morning, Bhajananand Swami’s chest was examined but nothing was found inside. One sadhu said, “Swami, nothing was found in Bhajananand Swami’s chest.” I said, “What would be found? If he really did not have anything, what is the point of keeping a chest? He practiced medicine in Satsang and collected 10 kilograms of gold. That gold did not come into use for satsang, and now it is hidden in a kusangi’s house.” Then, the assembly took place and I said to the people of Amdavad, “We have not embraced, so let us embrace.” I embraced them all and left. In this way, I ended the dispute of the sadgurus. Footnotes: 1. 1. The liberation of many aspirants will cease.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.403

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 403 · Chapter 5 · Verse 403

Shrījī padhāryā swadhāmmā re melī potānā maḷel; Te paṇ tanne tyāgshe re tyāre rakhe paḍatī jo bheḷ.1 Ā kīrtan ākhu bolīne kahe je, “Have to bahudhā dā’ḍe dā’ḍe ām thavānu chhe, have to desh-kāḷ ūtartā āvashe.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Bhāvārth: Shrījī Mahārāj potānā āshritone chhoḍī potānā dhāmmā padhāryā, pachhī temaṇe jene potānā swarūp tarīke oḷakhāvyā te paṇ deh chhoḍīne to jashe ja. To pachhī (sāchā Sant) kadāch oḷakhāy ke na oḷakhāy e bhay chhe. Ā vāt Niṣhkuḷānand Swāmīnā ‘Shrījī padhāryā swadhāmmā re’ padmā ullekhāyelī chhe. Kirtan Shrījī padhāryā swadhāmamā re, melī potānā maḷel; Te paṇ tan tyāgshe re, tyāre rakhe paḍatī jo bheḷ. Shrījī Tyāre bhakti mane kem bhāvashe re, dharma parya re’she jo dveṣh; Vāt vairāgyanī nahī game re, gnānno nahī rahe lesh. Shrījī Kṣhamā dayāne ādintā re, syā sāru reshe santoṣh; Tyāg te paṇ ṭakashe nahī re, te to joī mūkyo chho joṣh. Shrījī Man māne tem mā’lashe re, chālashe chitta anusār; Māthethī bīk maṭī gaī re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Pisorī joḍā te pe’rashe re, bhīnjyā taiyār; Chaṭakantī chālyashu chālashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Panālā potiyā pe’rashe re, lāl kore līṭī lagār; Peche pāṭalīyu pāḍashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Avaḷ pachheḍiyu oḍhashe re, temā mar hoy jo tār; Baṇī ṭhaṇīne besashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Man mānyu māthe bāndhashe re, ruḍu hingale rangdār; Barobar gamatu goṭhavashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Gādī takiyā ne gādalā re, aval oshisā sār; Sajyā sundar samārashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Bhāvatān bhojan jamashe re, jevo hase potāne pyār; Sārā svādu shodhashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Garam naram gaḷyā chikaṇā re, sundar vaḷī sukh denār; Khaṭras khoḷīne khāvashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Sārā shāk vaghārshe re, melī ghaṇā ghīno vaghār; Jukte jujavu jamashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Pagepāḷā shīd chālashe re, āve jeṇe ange ajār; Ghoḍā-gāḍīyu rākhashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Moṭānī moṭap ḍhānkashe re, nākhashe potāno bhār; Vātunā vāyadā karashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Nārī dhanyane nandashe re, vātmā vāramvār; Antare abhāv to nahī kare re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Fāvatā deshmā farashe re, tatpar thaī taiyār; Gām gamatā te gotashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Sārā shaherne shodhashe re, jīyā dukh noye lagār; Mīṭhī rasoyune mānashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Chhoṭā chhoṭā shiṣhya rākhashe re, chākarī karavā bechār; Moṭānī mobatya mūkashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Tyāg hoy na hoy jo tanmā re, teno ati karashe uchchār; Dambhe karī dan kāḍhashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Vṛutti antare vāḷashe nahī re, bau bau varatashe bār; Lokmā lāj vadhārashe re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Sarve dagānā sthaḷ dekhāḍīyā re, evā bījā chhe jo apār; Tan abhimānī te nahī taje re, jene keno na rayo bhār. Shrījī Ā to bhākhyu chhe bhaviṣhyanu re, sau samajī grejo sār; Niṣhkuḷānand ke e nahī fare re, kayu chhe me karī vichār. Shrījī shrī niṣhkuḷānanda kāvya kīrtana-bhuja: 1/90

Shrījī padhāryā swadhāmmā re melī potānā maḷel; Te paṇ tanne tyāgshe re tyāre rakhe paḍatī jo bheḷ.1 Singing this kirtan fully, Swami said, “From henceforth, this is what will happen day by day, and unfavorable circumstances will arrive.” Footnotes: 1. 1. Essence: Shriji Maharaj left for his dhām, leaving behind his devotees. Those who helped others realize the form of Maharaj will also leave their physical body one day. Therefore, the fear that one may be able to realize a genuine Sant or not remains. This has been noted by Nishkulanand Swami in the kirtan ‘Shrījī padhāryā swadhāmmā re...’

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.404

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 404 · Chapter 5 · Verse 404

Rātrie vāt karī je, “Vahevār bahu vadhī gayo teṇe antar uzarḍāī jāy chhe. Jem ṭoparu khamaṇīe karīne uzarḍāy chhe temā ṭoparāno ākār raheto nathī, tem uzarḍāī jāy chhe. Vaḷī, vahevār chhe to nirguṇ em paṇ thaī jāy chhe, ne gnān to ek āno thāy chhe ne pandar ānā vahevār thāy chhe; paṇ nirantar vātu thāy to āhī rahyā Akṣhardhām mūrtimān dekhāy ne sukh āve. Paṇ ā vāt bolāy evī nathī, ā to rāt chhe te bolī gayā. Māṭe karavānu to sārā Moṭā Ekāntik Sādhuno sang ja chhe.”

At night, Swami spoke, “The heart of one whose social duties increases significantly becomes shredded. Just as a coconut is shredded with a grate, similarly, one’s heart becomes shredded. At times, it may appear as though social duties are nirgun. And only a sixteenth portion of time is spent on acquiring gnān while fifteen portions of sixteen is spent on social duties. But only when one listens to talks continuously will one see Akshardham from here and experience bliss. But we cannot speak in this way openly. Because it is nighttime, I have spoken. So, what needs to be done is the association of a great Ekantik Sadhu.”1 Footnotes: 1. 1. In this narrative, Gunatitanand Swami is explaining that when one gets involved in the activities of the mandir or the duties of worldly life, the involvement may cause one’s spiritual endeavors - such as āhnik, listening to kathā-vārtā, introspection, etc. - to become less of a priority. Therefore, Swami is cautioning us on this. Here, Swami is not speaking against the involvement in mandir activities, because this is a form of devotion when done as according to the commands of a Satpurush. However, when one exceedingly gets involved in mandir activities which stretch beyond the commands of the Satpurush, the result can be detrimental.

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.405

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 405 · Chapter 5 · Verse 405

Ā līdhu ne ā levu chhe, ā dīdhu ne ā devu chhe, ā karyu ne ā karavu chhe, ā khādhu ne ā khāvu chhe, ā joyu ne ā jovu chhe, e ādik anek vātu khūṭe tem nathī. Māṭe emāthī nivṛutti pāmīne Parmeshvarne bhajī levā.

I purchased this and I want to purchased that. I gave this and I want to give that; I did this and I want to do that; I saw this and I want to see that – all these and other talks are not likely to be exhausted. So, turn back from them and worship Parameshwar (God).

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.406

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 406 · Chapter 5 · Verse 406

“Uttam puruṣh sevyā hoy pachhī tene bījānī vāte evu sukh na āve, tene kem karavu?” Tyāre Swāmī kahe, “Evānī vāt sāmbhaḷī hoy tene dhāre, vichāre ne bākī bījāthī paṇ ghaṭe eṭalu grahaṇ kare em karīne gujarān kare. Bākī Moṭā tenu poṣhaṇ kare.”

One who has served the great Sadhu does not experience the same happiness when he listens to the talks of others. What should he do? Then Swami said, “One who has heard talks from such a Sadhu should remember them and think deeply about them and also accept whatever is appropriate from others, too. In this way, pass life. Additionally, the great will nourish him.”

🤖 AI Generated

Vaat 5.407

Swamini Vato Prakaran 5 Vaat 407 · Chapter 5 · Verse 407

Bīje sarva ṭhekāṇe māyāno kajiyo chhe, paṇ Akṣhardhām ne āhī Moṭā Ekāntikmā māyā nathī, bākī sarve ṭhekāṇe māyā chhe.1 Iti Shrī Sahajānand Swāmīnā shiṣhya Shrī Guṇātītānand Swāmīnī vātomā Bhagwānno mahimā ane kṛutārthpaṇu mukhyapaṇe kahyu e nāme Pāchmu Prakaraṇ samāpt. Footnotes: 1. 1. Ā vāto tathā ‘Rastānī Vāto’ Dhoḷakānā Rahīsh Vipra Harishankar Āshārāme utārel chhe.

There is the nuisance of māyā everywhere except in Akshardham. And here (on earth), there is no māyā in the great God-realized Sadhu. Otherwise, there is māyā everywhere.

🤖 AI Generated